JP6762987B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of performing a game using a game medium.

As a game machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device and the game medium wins a prize in a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area (also referred to as "starting prize"), it is determined. Some prize balls are paid out to the player. Further, a variable display device capable of variablely displaying (also referred to as "variable") the identification information when the game medium wins a prize in a specific winning area (also referred to as "starting area") is provided, and the variable display device can be used for identification. Depending on the display result of the variable display of information, the one configured to be controllable to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player or a predetermined state (small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. is there.

The advantageous state means an advantageous state for a player who has been given a predetermined game value. Specifically, the advantageous state is, for example, a state in which the state of the special variable winning means is advantageous to the player in which the game medium is likely to win a prize (big hit game state), or a state in which the right to become advantageous to the player is generated. , A state in which a predetermined game value is given, such as a state in which the conditions for paying out the prize game medium are easily satisfied. Further, the predetermined state is a state that is advantageous to the player as in the advantageous state, but is a state in which the degree of profit is relatively lower than that of the advantageous state (small hit game state).

In such a game machine, when the display result of the variable display device that displays the symbol as the identification information becomes the display mode (big hit symbol) indicating "big hit", for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times and the game medium is opened. It shifts to an advantageous state (big hit game state) where it is easy to win a prize, and in each opening period, it is large when there is a prize in a predetermined number (for example, 10) of large winning openings or when a predetermined opening time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses. The winning opening will be closed. Further, when the display result of the variable display device is in a display mode (small hit symbol) indicating "small hit", for example, an advantageous state in which the large winning opening is opened once and the game medium can win a prize (small hit game state). When a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.8 seconds) elapses, the big winning opening is closed.

Further, in the above-mentioned game machine, the first identification information is variably displayed when the game medium wins in the first start area, and the second identification information is variably displayed when the game medium wins in the second start area. Some of them can be displayed and the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (also referred to as "simultaneously variable"). Further, in such a game machine, when the variable display of the first identification information cannot be started, the information regarding the variable display of the first identification information is stored as the first hold storage, and the variable display of the second identification information is performed. If it cannot be started, it is possible to store the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information as the second hold storage. Then, in this game machine capable of simultaneous fluctuation, by providing a special state in which a time shorter than the normal state is set as the variable display time (variation time) of the second identification information, a predetermined state (small hit) is provided in the special state. Some are configured so that the frequency of control (for example, the frequency of small hits per unit time) is high. For example, in Patent Documents 1 and 2, in a high probability state (special state) of a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the fluctuation time of the second identification information is set shorter than that in the normal state (low probability state). It is described that control is possible in a state where the frequency of small hits is higher than in the normal state.

JP-A-2017-86643 (paragraphs 0128, 0234, 0237, 0512) Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-20287 (paragraph 0009, 0308-0311)

By the way, in Patent Documents 1 and 2 that can be controlled in the special state as described above, the fluctuation time of the second identification information is set to be relatively long in the normal state. Specifically, in Patent Document 1, it is set to 180 seconds to 300 seconds, and in Patent Document 2, it is set to 10 hours. As described above, in the gaming machine having a long fluctuation time of the second identification information in the normal state as described in Patent Documents 1 and 2, the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage (second hold display) in the normal state. It is not appropriate to make (also called) visible.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of realizing appropriate display control for the second hold display in a game machine that can be controlled in a special state.

(Means A) The game machine according to the present invention is a game machine capable of playing a game using a game medium, variably displaying identification information, and being controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and is the first identification. A variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display of information and a variable display of the second identification information in parallel, a predetermined state control means which is advantageous to the player and can be controlled to a predetermined state different from the advantageous state, and usually state and the high frequency of the special state to be controlled to the predetermined state by between the time had short at a high rate as the variable display execution time of the second identification information than the normal state is selected, controllable The state control means, the first reserved storage means capable of storing the information related to the variable display of the first identification information as the first reserved storage, and the information related to the variable display of the second identification information are stored as the second reserved storage. a second hold storage means capable, the first and hold display corresponding to the first hold memory, and a second hold display corresponding to the second hold memory, a hold display unit capable of displaying a variable running Corresponding display means that can display the corresponding display corresponding to the display, the setting means that can be set to one of a plurality of set values, and the control of the advantageous state are executed based on the set set values. A possible game control means, a game value giving means that gives a game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area, and an information display means that can display information about the game value given by the game value giving means. When, wherein the hold display unit, prior Symbol normal state, the first but can display hold display is impossible displaying the second hold display, in the special state, the second hold display It is possible to make the second hold display difficult to see in a specific period after the specific timing before the end of the special state, and the corresponding display means is the normal state. In the above, the information display means can display predetermined information according to a set value without displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information . According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display.
(Means 1) Further, as another game machine, the identification information is variably displayed, and the game machine can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit state) which is advantageous for the player, and the first identification information (for example, for example). Steps S26A and S26B in the variable display execution means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560) capable of executing the variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) in parallel. The part to be executed), the hold storage means capable of storing a plurality of information related to the variable display as hold storage (for example, the part where the CPU 90103 executes the start winning process shown in FIG. 87), and the advantageous and advantageous states for the player. A predetermined state control means that can control different predetermined states (for example, a small hit game state) (for example, a portion that executes steps S358 to S360 in the game control microcomputer 560) and a normal state (for example, a non-KT state). , A special state (eg, for example) that is frequently controlled to a predetermined state by selecting a shorter fluctuation time at a higher rate as the execution time of the variable display of the second identification information than the normal state (see, for example, FIG. 13). It is stored in the state control means (for example, the part that executes steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled by the KT state) and the hold storage means. A plurality of hold displays corresponding to each of the plurality of hold storages are displayed at each of a plurality of corresponding positions (for example, hold 1 display position to hold 4 display position in the first hold storage display area 905D) corresponding to the number of hold storages. It is possible, and based on the fact that the hold memory corresponding to the variable display is erased by executing a new variable display, the hold display corresponding to the hold memory other than the erased hold memory is displayed after the hold memory is erased. A hold display means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes the hold effect process shown in FIG. 89) that can be displayed at a corresponding position corresponding to the new number of hold storage means, and the hold storage means is the first. 1 A first reserved storage means (for example, a first reserved storage buffer) that can store information related to variable display of identification information as a first reserved storage, and information related to variable display of second identification information can be stored as a second reserved storage. The second holding storage means (for example, the second holding storage buffer) is included, and the holding display means is the first holding display corresponding to the first holding storage (for example, the first holding in the first holding display unit 61). The hold display) and the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage (for example, the second hold display in the second hold display unit 62) can be displayed, and the normal state (for example, the non-KT state) can be displayed. In, the first hold display can be displayed, but the second hold display cannot be displayed (for example, step S7075 is executed when Y in step S7073, and step S7077 is N). S7080 and S7082 are not executed), and the number of reserved memories is corresponded to from a predetermined appearance position (for example, the character image C displayed in the upper left portion of the effect display device 905) based on the newly stored reserved memory. It is possible to execute the appearance display of the hold display at the corresponding position (for example, the first start winning effect), and it is being executed based on the change in the number of hold memories due to the execution of the new variable display during the execution of the appearance display. It is possible to set the corresponding position regarding the appearance display to the corresponding position corresponding to the new reserved memory number (for example, as shown in FIG. 91, when the reserved memory number decreases during the execution of the first start winning effect. Redetermines the destination of the hold display), and when the hold storage is not stored in the hold storage means and the variable display is not executed, a new hold storage is stored in the hold storage means. In this case, at least a part of the appearance display is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 93 as a modification 1, when the number of reserved memories is 0 and a new start prize is generated while the variable display is not executed. May be characterized in that the hold display is displayed as the active display in the active display area 905F without executing the second start winning effect). According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the player with respect to the second hold display corresponding to the second hold memory in the normal state, and it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display. .. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption of the appearance display during execution and to reduce the effect of the appearance display.

(Means 2) When the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed in the means 1, the specific display corresponding to the second identification information (for example, the second in the second specific display unit 62a) is performed. A specific display means (for example, a portion for executing steps S9308 and S9310 in the effect control microcomputer 200) capable of displaying the specific display) is further provided, and the above-mentioned specific period (for example, a period in which the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time) is provided. ), The hold display means can display the second hold display and the specific display means can display the specific display, and the hold display means makes the second hold display difficult to see in the specific period. (For example, step S7082 is not executed when it is Y in step S7081) and the specific display means makes it difficult to see the specific display (for example, step S9310 is not executed when it is Y in step S9309). It may be characterized in that it is possible. According to such a configuration, when the special state ends, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the specific display corresponding to the second identification information.

(Means 3) In the means 2, with a predetermining means for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state based on the establishment of the start condition (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S65A and S65B). Prior to the determination of the prior determination means, the specific determination means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an advantageous state is obtained based on the second reserved storage) executes steps S312, S215, S216, and S322. Part), and the hold display means changes the second hold display corresponding to the second hold memory that is the judgment target of the specific judgment means to the first special mode according to the judgment result of the specific judgment means. It is possible to execute the first aspect change effect (for example, hold notice) to be caused, and the specific display means corresponds to the second identification information to be determined by the prior determination means according to the determination result of the prior determination means. The second aspect change effect (for example, specific notice) for changing the specific display to the second special aspect can be executed, and in a predetermined period including the specific period (for example, a period in which the remaining 9 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time) The hold display means restricts the execution of the first aspect change effect (for example, step S7079 is not executed when Y in step S7078), and the specific display means restricts the execution of the second aspect change effect (for example, step S7078). Step S9307 is not executed when it is Y in S9306). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid inconsistency in the effect in a specific period in which the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage and the specific display corresponding to the second identification information are difficult to see.

(Means 4) In any of the means 1 to the means 3, the state control means has a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and a second special state having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state as a special state. It may be characterized in that it can be controlled to (for example, the second KT state). According to such a configuration, the monotonousness of the game playability in the special state can be eliminated, and the interest of the game in the case of controlling the special state can be improved.

(Means 5) In any of the means 1 to the means 4, the effect symbols (for example, the background symbols in the first background symbol display unit 91a and the second background symbol display unit 92a) are variable in response to the variable display of the identification information. An effect control means (for example, an effect control microcomputer) capable of performing display and variable display of a reduced symbol smaller than the effect symbol (for example, a small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b or the second small symbol display unit 92b). The computer 200 includes a portion for executing S920D, S920E, S920H, S920I, and S920K), and the effect control means is an effect symbol (for example, a production symbol corresponding to variable display of the first identification information) in a normal state (for example, a non-KT state). , The variable display of the background symbol in the first background symbol display unit 91a) is executed, and the variable display of the effect symbol (for example, the background symbol in the second background symbol display unit 92a) corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is executed. (For example, step S920E is executed when it is Y in step S920C, and step S920J is executed when it is N in step S920G), and the second identification information is variable in a special state (for example, KT state). The variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the display is executed, and the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is not executed (for example, step S920I is executed when Y of step S920G is executed, and the step Step S920F is executed when N of S920C), a reduced symbol corresponding to variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information depending on whether it is controlled in the normal state or the special state. (For example, the small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b or the second small symbol display unit 92b) is executed (for example, in steps S920D and S920H depending on whether it is in the non-KT state or the KT state). It may be characterized by performing either). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate display control corresponding to the state of the reduced symbol, and it is possible to reduce the degree of recognition of the second identification information to the variable display by the player in the normal state.

(Means 6) In any of means 1 to 5, the hold display means displays the second hold in a specific period including the timing when the special state ends (for example, a period in which the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time). Can be made difficult to see (see, for example, FIG. 64). According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine that can be controlled in a special state, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display. More specifically, when the special state ends, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display.

(Means 7) In means 6, regardless of whether the hold display means is controlled in a normal state or a special state, the first hold storage number display corresponding to the number of first hold storages (for example, the first hold). The storage number display 71) is displayed, and the second hold number display corresponding to the number of the second hold storage is not displayed (for example, when step S7071 is Y, step S7072 is executed and step S7076 is Y). Even if the process corresponds to step S7072 is not executed), it may be characterized. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the player with respect to the number of second reserved memories while ensuring the player's recognizability with respect to the number of first reserved memories, and the first reserved memory and the first (2) Appropriate display control can be realized for each of the reserved storage numbers.

(Means 8) In any of means 1 to means 7, the game medium (for example, a game ball) is provided on a predetermined path (for example, to the right of the game area 7) among the flow paths to which the game medium (for example, a game ball) flows down, and the game medium can pass through. After the specific area (for example, the operating gate 17) and the predetermined condition (for example, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) are satisfied, an advantageous state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) is based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area. ), And the predetermined condition is satisfied with the advantageous state control means (for example, the portion where steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 are executed in the case of Y in step S2501 in the game control microcomputer 560). Based on this, a predetermined promotion notification (for example, the first instruction notification) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the predetermined route is executed, and after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the execution of the predetermined promotion notification, the specific area is reached. With the promotion notification means (for example, the part that executes steps S4404, S4405, S4604, S4605 in the effect control microcomputer 200) that can execute the specific promotion notification (for example, the second instruction notification) that promotes the launch of the game medium. , May be further provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the production.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention according to the following means 9. Conventionally, a plurality of information related to variable display can be stored as hold storage in a game machine as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-97173, and the hold display corresponding to each of the plurality of hold storages is held. It can be displayed at each of a plurality of corresponding positions corresponding to the number of stored items. Further, in such a game machine, based on the occurrence of a new hold memory, the appearance display (display effect) accompanying the display of the new hold display is displayed at a corresponding position corresponding to the new number of hold memories. There is something feasible in. However, if a new variable display is started while the appearance display (display effect) is being executed, the appearance display is interrupted (interrupted), which gives the player a sense of discomfort and causes the appearance display to appear. There is a problem that the effect is reduced. It was made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of preventing the effect of appearance display from being lowered.

(Means 9) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another form can execute a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a gaming machine). The pachinko gaming machine 1) is stored in the hold storage means (for example, the portion where the CPU 90103 executes the start winning process shown in FIG. 87) and the hold storage means, which can store a plurality of information related to the variable display as hold storage. A plurality of hold displays corresponding to each of the plurality of hold storages are displayed at each of the plurality of corresponding positions (for example, hold 1 display position to hold 4 display position in the first hold storage display area 905D) corresponding to the number of hold storages. The hold display corresponding to the hold memory other than the erased hold memory is displayed in the hold memory based on the fact that the hold memory corresponding to the variable display is erased by executing a new variable display. The hold display means is provided with a hold display means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes the hold effect process shown in FIG. 89) that can be displayed at a corresponding position corresponding to a new number of hold storages after erasing. , The hold display from a predetermined appearance position (for example, the character image C displayed in the upper left portion of the effect display device 905) to the corresponding position corresponding to the hold memory number based on the newly stored hold memory. The appearance display (for example, the first start winning effect) can be executed, and the corresponding position regarding the execution appearance display is determined based on the change in the number of reserved memories due to the execution of the new variable display during the execution of the appearance display. It is possible to set the corresponding position corresponding to the new hold storage number (for example, as shown in FIG. 91, when the hold storage number decreases during the execution of the first start winning effect, the hold display is moved. (Part for redetermining the destination), when the reserved storage means does not store the reserved storage and the variable display is not executed and a new reserved storage is stored in the reserved storage means, the appearance display is displayed. When at least a part of the above is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 93 as a modification 1), when the number of reserved memories is 0 and a new start prize is generated while the variable display is not executed, the second start prize effect is produced. The part that displays the hold display as the active display in the active display area 905F without executing) is characterized. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption of the appearance display during execution and to reduce the effect of the appearance display.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a front view of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the closed state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the open state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit configuration example of a relay board, an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the relationship between the random number for jackpot determination and the jackpot determination value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch passing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the hold storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the 1st special symbol change in the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for passing through the 1st gate. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big prize opening opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol process process. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of the special symbol display control processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the external output signal output by a game machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of the external output signal output by a game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ordinary symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal design normal processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the ordinary symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening of a normal electric accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric accessory operation process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the production control microcomputer. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving a confirmation command. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the instruction notification control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the demo display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the demo display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the background symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit middle processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of instruction notification in this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of instruction notification in this embodiment. It is a timing chart when the jackpot game state ends and is controlled to the first KT state. It is a flowchart which shows the hold storage display control processing in the modification. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol change start processing in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows the specific display control processing in the modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the screen layout in the modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display control such as the 2nd hold display in a modification. It is a front view which shows the pachinko game machine in an Example. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of a pachinko game machine. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), and (C) Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a front view which shows the structure of the 2nd special variable winning ball device. (A) is a simplified front view of the main board, and (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the display monitor. It is a figure which shows the structure of a part of the storage area in the RAM of a main board. It is a figure which showed the memory map of the CPU in the main board. It is a figure which showed the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the main board RAM. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-6) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display contents of the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the movement of the data stored in the storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the setting change processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 1st start winning effect and the 2nd start winning effect. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variation display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variation display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variation display in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variation display in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variation display in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the setting change processing in the modification 3. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor in the modified example 4, and (B) is an explanatory diagram explaining a change in the display content of the display monitor in the modified example 4. It is a rear perspective view which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification 15. It is a rear perspective view which shows the state which opened the frame for game machine in the modification 15. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 15. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 15.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine (ball game machine) 1 as viewed from the front. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown here as an example of a gaming machine, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and is, for example, an image-type gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like. May be good.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided in the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including (excluding board 6).

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 3, a surplus ball receiving plate 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 3 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 6 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, a game area 7 is formed in which the hit game ball (hit ball) can flow down.

An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. On the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are a plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition, which is the first execution condition (for example, the hit ball has won the first start winning opening 13). Satisfaction of the display area (hereinafter referred to as the first variable display unit 9a) for variably displaying the decorative symbol for production (first decorative symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result, and the second start condition which is the second execution condition. A display area in which a plurality of types of decorative symbols (second decorative symbols) that can be identified based on (for example, the hit ball has won the second start winning opening 14) are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. (Hereinafter referred to as a second variable display unit 9b) and a display area (hereinafter, a background symbol) in which it is easier for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents than the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b. There is a display unit 9c). Note that it is easy to visually recognize the displayed contents, for example, while the size of the display area is large and the displayed contents in the variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b are always monochromatic. The display color may change. Further, in this embodiment, the background symbol effect unit 9c is controlled to display identification information (hereinafter, also referred to as a background symbol) in three display areas of left, middle, and right. It should be noted that the winning is that the game ball enters the area defined in advance as the winning area such as the winning opening. Further, to derive and display the display result is to stop and display the symbol. In this embodiment, one background symbol effect unit 9c is provided for two variable display units (first variable display unit 9a and second variable display unit 9b), and the background symbol effect unit 9c has 2 Since the effect corresponding to any of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) that are variably displayed in the two variable display units is executed, whether the decorative symbol status (for example, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed) is executed. It is difficult to grasp (whether or not). In this embodiment, the background symbol is for displaying the symbol variation for the effect on the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device), and corresponds to the effect identification information, the decorative symbol, and the effect symbol. ..

A first special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8a and a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying a special symbol as identification information are provided on the upper part of the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, respectively. Has been done. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a may be referred to as a first special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b may be referred to as a second special symbol. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol.

In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the number of first holding storages (holding storage is also referred to as starting storage or starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol hold storage display 18a composed of four displays is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 18a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one. Further, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 18b composed of four indicators for displaying the number of valid winning balls entered in the second start winning opening 14, that is, the number of hold storages. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

The first variable display unit 9a performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative (directing) symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a. Further, the second variable display unit 9b performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. The first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b that perform variable display of the decorative symbol are controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first variable display unit 9a may be referred to as a first decorative symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second variable display unit 9b may be referred to as a second decorative symbol. Further, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol. The type of the first decorative symbol and the type of the second decorative symbol may be the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), or the types may be different. If the types are different, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first decorative symbol includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the type of the second decorative symbol is the numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters and the first decorative symbol. It may include a character different from the character of.

On the display screen of the effect display device 9, the number of valid winning balls in the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the number of first reserved balls, and the number of valid winning balls in the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the number of second reserved storages. There is an area (hereinafter, referred to as a symbol hold storage display unit 18c) for displaying the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of and. As described above, in this embodiment, the total number of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 18c, which is relatively easy for the player to see, so that the player can see the total. It is difficult to grasp each of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. In this embodiment, the first special symbol holding storage display 18a and the second special symbol holding storage display 18b are four indicators such as lamps and LEDs, which are smaller than the symbol holding storage display unit 18c, respectively. Although it is configured, in order to make it more difficult to grasp the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number, an indicator of another aspect may be used. As an example, if the first special symbol hold storage display 18a and the second special symbol hold storage display 18b are each composed of one display, the display color is different or the display density is different according to the number of hold storages. Let me do it.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the total number of pending storages that can be displayed, that is, the total number of reserved storages, is 8. The symbol hold storage display unit 18c increases the number of lighting display areas by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighting display areas is reduced by one. Alternatively, out of the eight display areas in the symbol hold storage display unit 18c, the number of areas displayed in a color predetermined as a valid start prize is increased by one. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of areas displayed in the colors determined in advance as the effective start prize is reduced by one.

Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4. Therefore, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 when the first reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the first starting condition. When the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 13 when the first reserved memory number is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (first valid starting winning) that satisfies the first starting condition. Similarly, when the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14 when the second reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning in which the second starting condition is not satisfied. When the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14 when the number of second reserved memories is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (second valid starting winning) that satisfies the second starting condition. In this example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory is set to 4, the upper limit of the second reserved memory is set to 4, and the upper limit of the total reserved memory is set to 8, but these values are examples. .. Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 13a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

A gate 32 is provided on the right side of the effect display device 9. The game ball that has passed through the gate 32 is detected by the gate switch 32a. Further, an operating gate 17 is provided below the gate 32. The game ball that has passed through the operating gate 17 is detected by the operating gate switch 17a.

Below the operating gate 17, a special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 20 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. In the advantageous state (big hit game state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 21, so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected by the first count switch 23a. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Below the special variable winning ball device 20, a special variable winning ball device 22 forming a special winning opening 24 for small hits and a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 are provided. As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 22 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 15 is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. Although the details will be described later, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom surface formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down. By moving the member forward and backward, the game ball wins in the open state (also called the open state) where the game ball can win in the special winning opening 24 and the second starting winning opening 14 located below the bottom member. Change to an impossible closed state (also called a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 22 moves the bottom member forward toward the front in the small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is executed so that the special winning opening 24, which is the winning area, is opened. Further, the variable winning ball device 15 moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed by hitting the normal symbol display 10. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening 14 which is the winning area is executed.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 are formed so as to have the same structure, but as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 15 The special variable winning ball device 22 is slightly larger than the above. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other, the game area 7 was dropped without winning the special variable winning ball device 20. The game ball first falls on the variable winning ball device 15, but at this time, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is moved backward and the second starting winning opening 14 is in the open state, The game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14, and the game ball does not flow toward the special variable winning ball device 22. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening 14 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom surface member of the variable winning ball device 15 and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 22. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 22 is moved backward and the special winning opening 24 is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening 24. Further, if the special winning opening 24 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom surface member of the special variable winning ball device 22 and falls toward the out opening 26 as it is.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 22 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 15 is arranged on the right side. However, the special variable winning ball device 22 and The bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 15 is used for a special variable winning. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward the ball device 22, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is on the downstream side. It can be said that it is provided.

In the special winning opening 24, a switch (second count switch 25a, see FIG. 5) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening 24 is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 25a, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening 24 opened in the special variable winning ball device 22, the number of prize balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) other prize openings such as the first start winning opening 13a and the second starting winning opening 13b. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 22 is open-controlled and the special winning opening 24 is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening 24 is closed, the game ball cannot be passed (entered) through the special winning opening 24 to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage for the person.

Further, an S switch 14a capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening 14 is provided in the second starting winning opening 14. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 14a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this embodiment, the gate 32, the operating gate 17, the special variable winning ball device 20 (large winning opening), the variable winning ball device 15 (second starting winning opening 14), and the special variable winning ball device 22 (special). Since the winning opening 24) is provided on the right side of the game area 7, when the player is in a big hit game or in the KT state described later, the player aims at the right side of the game area 7 and launches (so-called right). Hitting operation) is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time required from the game ball passing through the gate 32 to reaching the variable winning ball device 15 is set to be 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the gate 32 and the variable winning ball device 32, and the nail group forming the flow path of the game ball. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the gate 32, and the game ball is the gate 32 in the first KT state described later. The time from passing through to the variable winning ball device 15 being controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when it reaches the variable winning ball device 15. Since it is shorter than the required time of 0.6 seconds, when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the first KT state, the one game ball is released. It is possible to win the variable winning ball device 15 as it is.

Below the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying a normal symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol “7”), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is a state in which the player is advantageous from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14) when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. Changes to. In the vicinity of the ordinary symbol display 10, an ordinary symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 32, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by 1.

Decorative lamps 25 that blink during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and an out port 26 that captures a hit ball that has not won a prize is provided at the lower part. Further, two speakers 27 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right outside the game area 7. Top frame lamps 28a, left frame lamps 28b, and right frame lamps 28c provided on the front frame are provided on the upper outer circumference, the left outer circumference, and the right outer circumference of the game area 7. Further, a prize ball lamp 51 that lights up when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided near the left frame lamp 28b, and a ball burnout lamp 52 that lights up when the supply ball runs out is provided near the right frame lamp 28c. It is provided.

The game machine is a ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball striking handle 5 and launches the game ball into the game area 7 by using the rotational force of the drive motor. ) Is provided. When the player continuously operates the hitting ball operation handle 5, the game ball is launched every 0.6 seconds. The game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game ends or the previous variable display ends). Then, the first start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display unit 8a, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the variable display unit 9a. To be started. That is, the first special symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved memory displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 18c (total number) on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by 1.

Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game ends or the previous variable display). The second start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display unit 8b, and the second decorative symbol is started on the second variable display unit 9b. Variable display of is started. That is, the second special symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 14. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved memories displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 18c (total number) on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by 1. However, even if the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, if the total reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the total number displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 18c is incremented by one.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 9a are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the first special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened until a certain time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win a prize in the large winning opening. One round in the big hit game state is from the time when the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened until a certain period of time elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of hit balls wins the big winning opening. When a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the large winning opening, or when a certain period of time has elapsed after the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened, the continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened again. The generation of the right to continue is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 rounds, 6 rounds, 16 rounds). In addition, a V winning area may be provided in the large winning opening, and the continuation right may be generated on condition that the hit ball wins the V winning area while the special variable winning ball device 20 is open. The number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs depending on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, the types of jackpots are 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 6R probability variable jackpot, and 16R probability variable jackpot. For example, if a 2R normal jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot occurs, a two-round jackpot game A state is given, and if a 6R normal jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 2-round jackpot gaming state is granted, and if a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 16-round jackpot gaming state is granted.

When it is decided that the stop symbol when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display 8a is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also The probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b becomes a big hit symbol also increases. That is, not only the jackpot determination based on the first start winning prize but also the jackpot determination based on the second starting winning prize is determined to be a jackpot with a higher probability than the low probability state.

Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 9b are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state.

When it is decided that the stop symbol when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped in the second special symbol display 8b is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also The probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a becomes a big hit symbol also increases. That is, not only in the determination of the big hit based on the second start winning prize, but also in the determination of the big hit based on the first starting winning prize, the big hit is determined with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

Further, when the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes the small hit symbol, the state shifts to the small hit game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened until a certain period of time has elapsed so that the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. As a result, the small hit game state is also open so that the player can get a ball, although it is less than the big hit game state.

In the probabilistic state, as described above, the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are jackpot symbols (specific display result: for example. , An odd number of 0-9) is higher than in the low probability state.

Here, the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, the gaming state in the present embodiment includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this embodiment, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 22 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is extremely long, and small hits are made. There are very few cases in which a game ball wins a special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is moved to the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side. Easy to win.

The probability change state is a gaming state in which a big hit is more likely to occur than the low probability state. Specifically, since the number of jackpot judgment values in the jackpot determination table in the probability variation state is 10 times the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the low probability state, the probability variation state is more likely to be a jackpot than in the low probability state. It is in a game state that is easy to play.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability that the variable winning ball device 15 will be in the open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, since it is configured to be a small hit except when it is a big hit when the second special symbol fluctuates (however, except for the case of forced loss described later), the KT state is changed to a smaller hit than the normal state. It is in a game state where it is easy to become. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

The configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 15 will be in the open state is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is set to the normal state. It may be in a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

Next, the transition of the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, in this embodiment, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area 7. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening 13, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the normal state, it shifts to a low probability / first KT state, a high probability / first KT state, or a high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the low probability / first KT state, and then when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the jackpot occurring, the first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

In this embodiment, the case where the first KT state is terminated when the fluctuation display of 100 times is uniformly completed when the probability is controlled to the low probability / first KT state is shown, but it is limited to such an embodiment. Absent. For example, a plurality of jackpot types that trigger a low probability / first KT state are provided, and the number of fluctuation displays in which the first KT state continues after the jackpot game ends differs depending on the jackpot type (for example, 20 times). Or 30 times, 50 times, 100 times).

In this embodiment, when the player has transitioned to the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the player moves to the right of the game area 7. Aim and perform a game ball launch operation (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening 14, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the KT state, it shifts to the low probability / first KT state, the high probability / first KT state, or the high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the low probability / first KT state, and after that, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the jackpot occurring, the first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 2R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

However, as will be described later, if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed and the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained even though the jackpot was in the non-KT state before the start of the jackpot, the state shifts to the high probability state. However, it is controlled to shift to the first KT state instead of the second KT state (see steps S2208B and S2209B described later). That is, it is a case where a 16R probability variation big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol even though it is in the normal state, and in such a case, it shifts to the second KT state and a considerable number in the small hit game. If the prize ball is made to be obtained, some players may actively play the game by right-handed in the normal state, and the original playability is impaired. From this, even if you hit right in the normal state and a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, by imposing a penalty by shifting only to the first KT state, in the normal state It is possible to suppress aggressive right-handed games.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 9a are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 9b are synchronized with each other. Here, synchronization means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 9a. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 9b.

Further, when the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 9a. When the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, a special decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 9b.

Further, in the background symbol display unit 9c, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 9c. When performing the reach effect, for example, the left and right background symbols are stopped and displayed during the variable display. Then, although there are exceptions as described later, basically, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived on the background symbol display unit 9c. It is displayed (the background symbol is finally stopped in the three display areas). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the stop symbol of the background symbol is a background symbol that reminds the player that the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (for example, left). Three background patterns with the middle and right sides aligned). Hereinafter, such a background symbol is also referred to as a jackpot symbol.

When the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 9c.

Further, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b at the same time, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. The effect corresponding to any of the variable displays is executed.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed independently, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is completed and the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped. When is derived and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends, and the stopped symbol of the background symbol is derived and displayed. Further, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, specifically, when there is a period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, it is late. When the special symbol whose variable display ends is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends.

Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variable display) of a background symbol that has not yet stopped when the stopped background symbol constitutes a part of the jackpot symbol among the three background symbols. ) Is performed, and all or part of the background symbols are displayed in a variable manner while forming all or part of the jackpot symbols.

For example, in the left, middle, and right display areas of the background symbol display unit 9c, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") that becomes a part of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right display areas. The display area inside is in a state where variable display is still performed, and a state in which all or part of the symbols in the display area are synchronously and variablely displayed while forming all or part of the jackpot symbols (for example, background). The reach display mode or reach is a state in which variable display is performed in all of the left, middle, and right display areas of the symbol display unit 9c, and variable display is always performed in a state where the same symbols are always aligned.

In addition, at the time of reach, unusual effects are performed with lamps and sounds. The effect and the reach display mode in the background pattern display unit 9c are referred to as a reach effect. In addition, at the time of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from the background symbol) can be displayed, or the background of the background symbol display unit 9c (the background color or pattern different from the symbol and the character) can be displayed. The display mode (for example, color, etc.) of (such as) may be changed.

Next, FIGS. 2 to 4 are views showing a special variable winning ball device 22. Hereinafter, the special variable winning ball device 22 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4. Regarding this embodiment, the structure of the special variable winning ball device 22 is described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, but the size is only slightly smaller than that of the special variable winning ball device 22, and the variable winning ball device 22 is used. The structure of the ball device 15 is the same as that of the special variable winning ball device 22.

As shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, the special variable winning ball device 22 includes a rectangular plate-shaped base plate portion 101 that is long in the left-right direction. The special variable winning ball device 22 is fixedly supported in the game area 7 by fixing the base plate portion 101 to the game area 7 with, for example, a screw. In the substantially central region of the base plate portion 101, a special winning opening 24 (second starting winning opening 14 in the case of the variable winning ball device 15) that opens toward the front is formed, and a special winning opening in the base plate portion 101 is formed. At a position above the mouth 24, a slit-shaped accommodating hole 102 long in the left-right direction is formed for accommodating the bottom surface member 23 on the back surface side (rear side) of the game area 7 when the bottom surface member 23 moves backward. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the special winning opening 24 is specifically formed on the left side of the center of the base plate portion 101 in the left-right direction, but may be left or right.

The bottom member 23 is tilted downward to the left so that the game ball that has entered the upper surface from the right flows down to the left, and the accommodation hole 102 is tilted downward to the left so as to follow the inclination of the bottom member 23. It is formed to do. The bottom surface member 23 can be moved forward and backward between the state of being moved forward as shown in FIG. 3 and the state of being moved backward as shown in FIG. 4, and the bottom surface member 23 is on the back surface side (rear) of the base plate portion 101. A drive device (not shown) is arranged to move the vehicle forward and backward.

Returning to FIGS. 2 to 4, a flow path forming base 112 projecting forward is formed on the front side of the base plate 101, and a forward movement is formed on the upper portion of the flow path forming base 112. The upstream region 23U, which is the upper end (right end) of the bottom member 23 in this state, and the upstream flow path portion 113, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 23 and forms a flow path for the game ball together with the bottom member 23, A downstream region 23L, which is a lower end (left end) of the bottom member 23, and a downstream flow path portion 114, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 23 and forms a flow path for a game ball together with the bottom member 23, are formed. There is.

Further, the upper part of the flow path forming base portion 112 is recessed downward from the ends of the upstream side flow path portion 113 and the downstream side flow path portion 114 on the bottom surface member 23 side, and the special winning openings 24 are left and right and left and right in front view. A guide flow path portion 115 for guiding the game ball that has fallen below the bottom surface member 23 to the special winning opening 24 is formed so as to surround the bottom member 23 from below.

The upstream side flow path portion 113 and the downstream side flow path portion 114 are formed so as to incline downward to the left so that the game ball flows down to the left. Further, the bottom portion of the guide flow path portion 115 extends downward to the left toward the special winning opening 24 side and is recessed at a position in front of the special winning opening 24. Then, in the recessed space at the bottom of the guide flow path portion 115, a triangular guide portion 116 that guides the game ball rearward toward the special winning opening 24 side (the back side of the game area 7) is arranged. ing.

Furthermore, a covering portion 117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 113, the downstream side flow path portion 114, and the guide flow path portion 115 from the front is integrally formed on the front portion (player side) of the flow path forming base portion 112. Has been done. The covering portion 117 covers the upstream side flow path portion 113, the downstream side flow path portion 114, and the guide flow path portion 115 from the front, so that the game ball flowing down each of these flow paths portions bounces toward the glass door frame 4. It has a function to prevent it from being lost. In the present embodiment, the covering portion 117 is integrally formed with the flow path forming base portion 112, but it may be fixed separately.

In the special variable winning ball device 22, a flow of game balls continuous in the left-right direction, which is composed of an upstream side flow path portion 113, a bottom surface member 23, and a downstream side flow path portion 114, between the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. Road F is formed. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of regulation pieces 118 for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the flow path F are formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117.

In the present embodiment, the regulation piece 118 is integrally formed with the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117, and is formed in a rib shape protruding forward from the base plate portion 101 or protruding rearward from the covering portion 117, and is a game ball. By interfering with, the flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the game ball that flows down to the left meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow is reduced when there is no regulation piece 118. Delay than. These regulation pieces 118 are formed so as to be arranged at predetermined intervals in the flow direction of the game ball in the flow path F, and are alternately formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. Further, the regulation piece 118 is set to a width dimension of about 1/3 to 1/4 of the width in the front-rear direction of the bottom member 23, and is set to a width dimension in which a game ball can pass between adjacent members. There is. More specifically, in the present embodiment, one regulation piece 118 is formed at a portion of the covering portion 117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 113 from the front, and the downstream side flow path portion of the covering portion 117 is formed. One regulation piece 118 is formed at a portion that covers the 114 from the front. Further, in the portion of the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 that covers the bottom surface member 23, a total of five regulation pieces 118 formed alternately on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 are formed. The number of such regulation pieces 118 is not particularly limited. Further, in the present embodiment, most of the regulation piece 118 is covered by the covering portion 117 from the front (player side).

With the arrangement of the regulation piece 118 as described above, with reference to FIG. 3, the special variable winning ball device 22 (and the variable winning ball device 15 having the same configuration) of the present embodiment attempts to flow down the flow path F. The game ball P meanders down the flow path F. Then, when the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) in which such a flow path F is formed is closed, the game ball P is placed in the special winning opening 24 (or the second starting winning opening 14). Basically, it passes through the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) without winning a prize. On the other hand, referring to FIG. 4, when the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) in which the bottom surface member 23 is moved backward is opened, the game ball P guides the flow path forming base portion 112. It becomes possible to fall into the flow path portion 115, and it is possible to flow down the guide flow path portion 115 and win a prize in the special winning opening 24 (or the second starting winning opening 14).

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board (game control board) 31. Note that FIG. 5 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 that controls the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built into the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least a CPU 56 and a RAM 55 built-in, and the ROM 54 may be externally attached or built-in. Further, the I / O port portion 57 may be externally attached.

Since the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) will execute (or process) the following. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

Further, the detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the operation gate switch 17a are given to the game control microcomputer 560. The input driver circuit 58 is also mounted on the main board 31, and game control controls the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20, the solenoid 106 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 22, and the solenoid 206 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15. An output circuit 59 that is driven according to a command from the computer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31, and a system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the game control computer 560 when the power is turned on and a big hit game state are generated. An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the above to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board 31 is also provided with a test signal output circuit (not shown) for outputting the test signal to the outside of the game machine.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (consisting of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 issues an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Display control is performed between the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b that receive and variably display the decorative symbol, the background symbol display unit 9c that variably displays the background symbol, and the symbol hold storage display unit 18c.

FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 6, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 may not be provided, and only the effect control board 80 may be provided for the effect control.

The effect control board 80 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 200 including an effect control CPU 201 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 201 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and a capture signal (capture signal) from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 (not shown). The effect control command is received via the input driver 202 and the input port 203 in response to the effect control INT signal). Further, the effect control CPU 201 causes the VDP (video display processor) 209 to control the display of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 202 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 202 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulatory means.

As a signal direction regulating means, the relay board 77 allows the signal input from the main board 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 of the above is mounted. As a unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. FIG. 6 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 560). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port portion 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit, which is a unidirectional circuit, may be further provided on the outside of the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the input / output port 205. Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the input / output port 204.

In the lamp driver board 35, the signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input / output driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies it to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. Further, it is supplied to the decorative lamp 25 provided on the frame side. Further, in this embodiment, the special winning opening lamp 24a is provided in the special variable winning ball device 22, and the lamp driver 352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies it to the special winning opening lamp 24a.

In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input / output driver 702. The voice synthesis IC 703 generates voices and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. Control data corresponding to the sound number data is stored in the voice data ROM 704. The control data according to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, the fluctuation period of the decorative symbol) in chronological order.

The signal and sound number data for driving the lamp are bidirectionally communicated between the effect control CPU 201, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70 (such as transmitting a response signal from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side). Communicated by communication).

The effect control CPU 201 reads necessary data from the character ROM (not shown) according to the received effect control command. The character ROM stores in advance character image data that is frequently used among the images displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative symbols and background symbols). It is for keeping. The effect control CPU 201 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 209. The VDP 209 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 201.

In this embodiment, the VDP 209 that controls the display of the effect display device 9 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 209 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 200, and VRAM is mapped there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by VDP. Then, the VDP 209 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

In this embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. However, the circuit for controlling the effect device is 1. It may be mounted on one board. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 is mounted, and a second effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27, etc.) is mounted. You may provide two boards with the effect control board of. Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 200, but another board (for example, the audio output board 70 and the lamp shown in FIG. 6). It may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 on the effect control board 80 via the driver board 35 or the like). In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35, and the control means receives the command. Controls related to voice control and lamp control are executed, and further, the received command is changed to a simplified command as it is or, for example, a simplified command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 that controls the effect display device 9. You may. Further, when two boards, a first effect control board and a second effect control board, are provided, a command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 560 is transmitted to the second effect control board. The command is transmitted from the second effect control board to the first effect control board as it is, or after processing (for example, changing the form or content of the command, simplifying, or selecting only the necessary command). It may be configured to be.

Next, the operation of the game machine will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When the power is turned on to the game machine and the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56) determines whether the program content is valid or not. After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, the built-in device is initialized (the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) are initialized, etc.) (step S4). In interrupt mode 2, the interrupt address is the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device. This is the mode shown.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port only once (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing in the backup RAM area (for example, processing when power supply is stopped such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the game machine was stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing. In this example, if "55H" is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is a backup (on state), and if a value other than "55H" is set, it means that there is no backup (off state).

After confirming that there is a backup, the CPU 56 performs a data check (parity check in this example) of the backup RAM area (step S8). In step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and saved by the same processing in the power supply stop processing. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S92). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of steps S91 and S92, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), and the unpaid prize ball. This is the part where the data indicating the number is set.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S93), and a control command (power) indicating that the power supply has been restored to the effect control board 80 according to the contents. A recovery command as an initialization command at the time of supply recovery) is controlled to be transmitted (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is stored by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity to execute the state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for jackpot determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, a prize ball in-ball flag, a ball out flag, a payout stop flag, and the like are selectively processed according to a control state. The initial value is set in the flag for.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 in the pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub-board according to the contents to the sub-board. The process is executed (step S14). As the initialization command, there is a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 9.

Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S16), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the initial value of the count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a random number generation counter for determining a big hit). Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the big hit judgment random number generation counter or the like is one round (the big hit judgment random number generation counter or the like). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (step S20). The power off signal is output when, for example, the voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a voltage drop of the power supply supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power supply cutoff detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power supply cutoff signal is output, it executes a power supply stop time process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the operating gate switch 17a are input via the input driver circuit 58. , The state determination is performed (switch processing: step S21).

Next, the CPU 56 performs a display control process for controlling the display of the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the first special symbol hold storage display 18a, and the second special symbol hold storage display 18b. Execute (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, control to output a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in step S32.

Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for jackpot determination used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows. (1) Random 1: Determine whether to generate a big hit or whether to generate a small hit (for big hit judgment) (2) Random 2: Type of big hit, that is, 2R normal big hit, 2R probability variation big hit , 6R normal jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot (for determining the jackpot type) (3) Random 5: determining the variation pattern of the special symbol (for determining the variation pattern) (4) Random 6: Determine whether to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for determining the normal symbol hit) (5) Random 7: Determine the initial value of random 1 (for determining the initial value of random 1) (6) Random 8: Determine the initial value of random 6 (for determining the initial value of random 6)

In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 8, the game control microcomputer 560 is used for (1) a random number for determining a jackpot, (2) a random number for determining a jackpot type, and (4) for determining a normal symbol hit. The counter for generating random numbers is counted up (1 addition). That is, they are random numbers for determination, and random numbers other than these are random numbers for display or random numbers for initial values. In addition, random numbers other than the random numbers (1) to (6) above are also used in order to enhance the game effect. Further, in the present embodiment, a common random number (random number 2) is provided as a random number for determining the type of big hit and a random number for determining the type of small hit, but different random numbers are provided for each. You may.

Further, the CPU 56 performs the first special symbol process process (step S26A). In the first special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball device 20 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. Next, the CPU 56 performs the second special symbol process process (step S26B). In the second special symbol process process, according to the second special symbol process flag for controlling the second special symbol display 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the special variable winning ball device 22 in a predetermined order according to the game state. Execute the corresponding process. The CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. Then, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol process process (step S26C). In the normal symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the normal symbol display 10 and the variable winning ball device 15 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the game state.

Next, the CPU 56 performs the hold storage process (step S27a). In the hold storage process, the CPU 56 executes a process of calculating and managing the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number.

Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command related to display control of the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b and an effect control command related to the number of reserved memories (effect control command control process: step S28).

Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a. (Step S30). Specifically, the payout control board 37 responds to the winning detection based on any of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a being turned on. A payout control command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 informs the output port of the contents related to the on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port. Output (step S31: output processing).

Further, the CPU 56 sets the first special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the first special symbol according to the value of the first special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the first special symbol display control data. At the same time, the special symbol display for setting the second special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the second special symbol according to the value of the second special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the second special symbol display control data. Control processing is performed (step S32). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, so that the special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b can be variably displayed. To execute.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data ( Step S33). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 executes variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process ends.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. It may be executed in.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed by the two indicators, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, but the CPU 56 uses the CPU 56. Control is performed so that big hits do not occur at the same time on the two indicators.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot judgment table includes a jackpot judgment table at the time of non-probability change used in a low probability state (low probability / non-KT state, low probability / first KT state) and a probability change state (high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high). There is a jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change used in (probability / second KT state)). Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 10 is set in the non-probability change jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 10 is set in the probability variation jackpot determination table. .. The numerical value shown in FIG. 10 is the jackpot determination value.

The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1). The jackpot determination random number value is any one shown in FIG. If it matches the jackpot judgment value, it is decided to make a jackpot for the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 10 indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a jackpot means determining whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

In this embodiment, if it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, all of them are unconditionally missed. In addition, if it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, all are unconditionally made a small hit (however, as will be described later, it is a forced loss after the fact). In some cases).

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table 131a stored in the ROM 54. The jackpot type determination table 131a sets the jackpot type to "2R normal jackpot" or "2R" based on a random number (random 2) for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining one of "probability variation jackpot", "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", or "16R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 11A, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a 20% probability, and the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is 45%. It is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", and it is determined as "6R normal jackpot" with a probability of 35%. Further, as shown in FIG. 11B, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 30%, and the probability of 30%. Is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", 5% probability is determined as "2R probability variation jackpot", and 35% probability is determined as "2R normal jackpot".

The "16R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of 16 rounds and shifts to the high probability / second KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, the state shifts to the second KT state. See steps S2207A, S2208A, S2207B, and S2210B described later). Then, the probabilistic state and the second KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

However, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if it is in the non-KT state before the start of the big hit, even if it becomes the "16R probability variation big hit", it is not in the second KT state. It may shift to the first KT state (see steps S2208B and S2209B described later).

The "6R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of 6 rounds and shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, the state is also shifted to the first KT state. See steps S2210A, S2211A, S2212B, and S2213B described later). Then, the probability change state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S2212A described later). Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends (see steps S2213A and S2010 to S2013). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of two rounds and shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, the state is also shifted to the first KT state. See steps S2212B and S2213B described later). Then, the probability change state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S2214B described later). Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends (see steps S2215B and S2010-S2013). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The type of jackpot type is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in addition to the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation jackpot, and the 2R normal jackpot, the 3R probability variation jackpot to the 7R probability variation jackpot may be determinably configured, and various aspects can be considered. Be done.

12 to 14 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in this embodiment. The EXT shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, seven types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 07 for the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. Eighteen types from # 01 to # 18 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 07 or 01 to 18) is used, it means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 12 (A) is displayed. It is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 12A, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 05.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, in the case of the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the KT shown in FIG. 12B The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for time is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 12B, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 06 to # 07.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 13C is displayed. It is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 13C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 02. Specifically, when it is determined to be a small hit, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain period of 5 minutes.

In this embodiment, even in the non-KT state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, a certain prize ball can be expected by winning the game ball to the special prize opening 24. It will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is reduced. By doing so, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and the situation where a small hit is aimed at winning a prize ball is prevented even though the player is in a non-KT state. In this embodiment, the "frequency of small hits" is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. The rate of occurrence of is higher than the normal state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is set to 5 even if it is a big hit. By making it relatively long, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by unreasonably winning the special winning opening 24 during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 13 (D) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is set. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 13 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 03 to # 04. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 13D, when the small hit is determined as the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as the small hit. Pattern # 03 (variable pattern for preparing to open the second starting winning opening) is determined. In this embodiment, as described above, when the first KT state is controlled, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, a special variable winning is actually achieved. The special winning opening 24 in the ball device 22 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 22 is controlled in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening 24. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 are used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 22 to the open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 24. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the first KT state.

Further, if the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed, FIG. 13 (E). The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the 2nd to 99th fluctuations shown in is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 13 (E), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation patterns # 05 to # 07, # 30 It is decided to be one of. Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (E), when a small hit is determined as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second fluctuation pattern # 05 of the shortened fluctuation. Alternatively, the second fluctuation pattern # 030 of the shortened fluctuation, which has a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second, may be determined. The second variation pattern # 05 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second variation pattern # 30 can be selected only when one or more second hold memories are stored. It is a fluctuation pattern. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. In this embodiment, when a small hit is determined as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state and the fluctuation display is executed based on the second fluctuation pattern # 06, the effect display device 9 In the variable display of the background symbol in the above, the effect of fanning the pattern is executed, such as reaching or sliding effect.

In addition, the 100th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 100th variation shown in FIG. 13 (F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 13 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 08 to # 09. Will be done.

In this embodiment, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as "during chance time" is displayed on the effect display device 9. As shown in FIG. 13 (F), when a small hit is determined as the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state, the effect display device 9 displays a character such as "chance time ends !!" The second variation pattern # 08 is determined to be accompanied by. Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (F), when the big hit is determined as the 100th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the effect display device 9 displays characters such as "chance time ends !!" The second variation pattern # 09 with a predetermined revival display after the display is determined.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, when a big hit is obtained in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 07 with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is determined. It is configured as follows. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is set to a long fluctuation time, Since the change of the second special symbol executed during the big hit change of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced loss, the forced loss occurs frequently even in the second KT state, and the player makes a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profit from this. Therefore, in this embodiment, by setting the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, it is possible to shift to the jackpot gaming state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol before the forced loss occurs frequently. It is configured.

In addition, unlike the present embodiment, even when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is not forcibly missed (for example, the first configuration). If the game machine has a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly removed when the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped), the fluctuation time of the first special symbol jackpot in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the jackpot of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that a small hit can occur at least a plurality of times. (For example, 1 minute) is configured to be secured.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 14 (G) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is set. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 14 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 10 to # 12. Will be done.

As in the case of the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), the second start prize is also obtained when the small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state. The variation pattern for preparing to open the mouth (second variation pattern # 10) may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), when a big hit is determined as the first fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 12 including the effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 11 including the battle effect may be determined.

Further, in the case of executing the fluctuation display after the second fluctuation after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state, FIG. 14 (H) shows. The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the second and subsequent fluctuations is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 14 (H), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation patterns # 13 to # 15, # 31 It is decided to be either.

As in the case of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the fluctuations occur. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 13 of the shortened fluctuation having a short time of 5 seconds or the second fluctuation pattern # 031 of the shortened fluctuation having a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second. The second variation pattern # 13 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second variation pattern # 31 can be selected only when one or more second hold memories are stored. It is a fluctuation pattern. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), when the big hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations of the high probability / first KT state, it is for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 15 including the battle effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), the second fluctuation pattern # 14 including the battle effect may be determined even when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state. ..

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 14 (I) is selected. The fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 14 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 16 to # 18.

As shown in FIG. 14 (I), when a small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the shortening fluctuation occurs in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). The second fluctuation pattern # 16 of the shortened fluctuation, which has a shorter fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds than when the fluctuation display is executed, may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (I), when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation including the continuation effect suggesting whether or not the high probability / second KT state continues. It may be determined by pattern # 17. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (I), when a big hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends after the continuous production. The second variation pattern # 18 including the effect is determined.

In this embodiment, when the variation pattern including the continuation effect and the battle effect is determined, the effect display device 9 executes the continuation effect and the battle effect in the variation display of the background symbol. When it becomes a big hit (16R probability change big hit, 6R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit), the production of the winning mode is executed in the battle production, and when it becomes a normal big hit (6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit), in the battle production. The effect of the defeat mode is executed, and in the case of a small hit, the effect of the draw mode is executed in the battle effect. Not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, even in the case of a 2R probability variation big hit in which the number of rounds during the big hit game is small, the effect of the defeat mode may be executed in the battle effect. ..

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the case of the second KT state. Cases are shown, but not limited to such aspects. For example, the shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the low probability state, and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 15 (1) shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state, and FIG. 15 (2) shows the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 15 in the second KT state. The opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 22 is shown.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (1). As shown in FIG. 15 (1), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 executes a variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol hits. If it is determined that the symbol is out of line, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10, and if it is determined to be off, the out-of-order symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missed symbol is 0.2 seconds. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 0.1 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 14 while the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. It becomes. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds. The opening time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening 24 (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is completed, the next variable winning ball device 15 can be opened only after the fluctuation time of the next normal symbol. After at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 0.1 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, has elapsed. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 15 is opened.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the first KT state, it is normal that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the symbol fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-opening processing time of 0.1 seconds, has passed, the game ball is gated. The time required from passing through 32 to reaching the variable winning ball device 15 is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state is usually in the state where the normal symbol is not changed. Since it is shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 in a state where the symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 15 is already in the open state. The game ball will reach the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball that has passed through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed is likely to win the variable winning ball device 15.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (2). As shown in FIG. 15 (2), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 executes a variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol hits. If it is determined that the symbol is out of line, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10, and if it is determined to be off, the out-of-order symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missed symbol is 0.2 second. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 2.6 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 14 while the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. It becomes.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is as short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol variation time 1.0 second + symbol confirmation time 0). A relatively long period of .2 seconds + time before the opening process of the second start winning opening is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long, so that the downstream side is compared with the first KT state. It is easy for the game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 22 of the above, and it is easy for the game ball to win the special winning opening 24.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the second KT state, it is normal that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After a total of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time before opening the second start winning opening of 2.6 seconds, has passed, and the game ball is gated. The time required from passing through 32 to reaching the variable winning ball device 15 is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state is usually in the state where the normal symbol is not changed. Since it is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 in a state where the symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state. The game ball will reach the variable winning ball device 15 before it is played. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for the game ball that has passed through the gate 32 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed to win the variable winning ball device 15.

In this embodiment, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and opening control of the variable winning ball device 15 is the normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56). This is done by executing (see step S26C). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 also executes a process of determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol in the normal symbol process process of step S26C, depending on whether it is in the KT state or the normal state. Whether or not to hit the normal figure is determined by different probabilities (for example, 10/11 in the KT state and 1/11 in the normal state). The same probability regardless of whether the gaming state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state or a second KT state, or whether it is a jackpot gaming state. (For example, 10% or 100%) may be used to determine whether or not to make a normal figure.

In this embodiment, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same at 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the opening processing of the second start winning opening is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 is made different by making it as short as 0.1 seconds in the 1 KT state and as long as 2.6 seconds in the second KT state is shown, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 may be made different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 15 can be controlled, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closed period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 may be different depending on the device. In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 in the first KT state is shortened by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winning of the special winning opening 24 in the first KT state. it can.

Further, for example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, the variable winning is as shown in FIG. 15 (1). A second opening pattern (long opening) in which the ball device 15 is opened for a long time and the variable winning ball device 15 shown in FIG. 15 (2) is opened for a short time if a special flag is not set. It may be configured to be controlled by short opening). That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, in the 100 times shortened fluctuation period of the special symbol in the low probability / first KT state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 99th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort to the variable winning ball device 15 being long open when performing a left-handed notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 15 is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 15, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 15 may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 15 is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. It is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 15 from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during a low probability / non-KT state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 15 is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the gate 32 The variable winning ball device 15 does not open by the time the game ball that has passed through the above reaches the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special winning opening 24 can be won.) On the other hand, in this embodiment, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened after the game ball passes through the gate 32 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 15. Since it is set to start, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

16 and 17 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 200. In the example shown in FIG. 16, the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8022 (H) correspond to the variable display of the special symbol and correspond to the first variable display unit 9a or the second variable display unit. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in 9b. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 200 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8022 (H), the first variable display unit 9a or the second variable display unit 9b Controls to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 16R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation received by the effect control microcomputer 200 immediately before the first fluctuation pattern command is specified. Since the command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the first decorative symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the second decorative symbol. The display result designation command can be used for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, but the display result designation command for the first decorative symbol and the display result designation command for the second decorative symbol may be separated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 does not send a display result specification command, but corresponds to each of 15R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control microcomputer 200 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command (first decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the first decorative symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command (second decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the second decorative symbol.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the first jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) for designating the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) for designating the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during the opening of the big winning opening) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening 13 in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening 14 in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. A command indicating the number of first reserved storages may be transmitted as the first valid start prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start prize designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / second KT state.

The effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b and the display state of the background symbol display unit 9c are changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, and the display state of the lamp is changed. Then, the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process process (step S26A) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the first special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball device 20 is executed.

When the CPU 56 performs the first special symbol process process, the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 provided in the game board 6 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning prize is generated in which the game ball wins the first starting winning opening 13 (step S311), the first starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S312). After that, the CPU 56 performs any of steps S300 to S307 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S300 to S307 are as follows.

First special symbol normal process (step S300): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the first big hit flag. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S301 (1 in this example). The first jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

First variation pattern setting process (step S301): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S302 (2 in this example).

First display result designation command transmission process (step S302): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S303 (3 in this example).

First special symbol changing process (step S303): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the first fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 200 is notified. Controls the transmission of the symbol confirmation designation command, and updates the internal state (first special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 so that the decorative symbol is stopped when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

First special symbol stop process (step S304): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. When the first jackpot flag is set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S304A (8 in this example). If the first jackpot flag is not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer in the display control process in step S22.

First gate passage waiting process (step S304A): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 8. In the first gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the operating gate 17. When the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 17 is detected, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example).

First big winning opening pre-opening process (step S305): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5. In the first large winning opening opening preprocessing, the special variable winning ball device 20 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 20) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during opening of the first special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). The first big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the first big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

First Grand Prize Opening Opening Process (Step S306): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 6. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the jackpot game state to the effect control microcomputer 200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20, and the like are performed. Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, the control is performed to transmit the large winning opening prize designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

First jackpot end process (step S307): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first reserved storage number). (Whether or not is 4) is confirmed (step S212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the first start port switch passing process is terminated as it is.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (step S213), and at the same time, the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S214). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 20) (step S215). .. In the process of step S215, the software random numbers for jackpot determination (random 1), jackpot type determination random numbers (random 2), and fluctuation pattern determination random numbers (random 5) are extracted and stored in the storage area. .. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 5) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 directly extracts a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random number 5) in the first variation pattern setting process described later. You may.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the holding storage. As shown in FIG. 20, in the first hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first hold storage number is secured. Further, in the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer store a random number for determining a jackpot (random 1), a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (random 5). Will be done. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

Further, the control is performed to transmit the first effective start winning command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S216). It should be noted that this first effective start winning command includes a preliminary determination result.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process (step S300) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300, it means that the first special symbol display 8a is not displaying the variation of the first special symbol, and This is the case even during the first big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened a predetermined number of times).

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step S52A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed.

If the first hold storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S51A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55, and the RAM 55. (Step S53A), decrement the value of the first reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the 1st reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step S54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55 is set to the first reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also identifiable and saved.

After that, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S60A). Specifically, when the probability change flag, the first KT flag, and the second KT flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. If the 1KT flag is on, it is determined that it is in the low probability / first KT state, and the low probability / first KT background specification command is issued. If the probability variation flag is on and the first KT flag is on, the probability is high / first. High accuracy / 1st KT background specification command is determined to be in the 1KT state, and high probability / 2nd KT state is determined to be high accuracy / 2nd KT when the probability variation flag is on and the 2nd KT flag is on. Send the background specification command.

Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step S64AA). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step S68A without performing the processing after step S64A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the material is not limited to the above. For example, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step S64AA, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as the jackpot determination random number (random 1) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S65A. Regardless of which big hit determination random number (random number 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the second special symbol is being changed in step S64AA, steps S64A to S161A A random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for small hit judgment (a random number common to the random number for big hit judgment or a completely different random number) without performing the processing of. By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which big hit determination random number (random number 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random number 1) from the first random number storage buffer (step S64A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step). S65A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for jackpot determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S66A), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step S67A). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot based on random 2 (step S160A), the jackpot type is stored (step S161A), and the process proceeds to step S68A. .. Further, if the jackpot is not achieved in step S66A (that is, if it is missed), the process proceeds to step S68A.

In this embodiment, when the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it is unconditionally determined to be all out of order, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, even if the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it may be determined to be a small hit with a low probability.

Then, in step S68A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step S68A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S68A is determined.

In step S65A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process (step S302) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first selects any variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 12A to 12B according to the game state. (Step S201). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in step S201 and the variation pattern determination random number (random 5) stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Then, which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 12 is used is determined (step S1700). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 560 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1701).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step S1700, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first special symbol process timer and fluctuates. At the same time as starting the time measurement (step S1702), the measurement execution flag described later is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is started (step S1703). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first display result designation command transmission process (step S1706).

In the first display result designation command transmission process (step S302), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) is based on the determination result of whether or not to make a big hit and the determination result of the big hit type. Control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 200.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol changing process (step S303) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step S1121A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step S1122A), the symbol is confirmed on the effect control microcomputer 200. Control to transmit the designated command (step S1123A). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1124A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (step S1125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1123A and controls to transmit the symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1123A). , The value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S304) (step S1124A).

By executing the processes of steps S1125A to S1125A, in this embodiment, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol Is forcibly stopped so that a big hit does not occur at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control microcomputer 200 side, when the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the first variable display unit 9a in the first variable display unit 9a is based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command. 1 The stop display of the decorative symbol is stopped, and the display result 1 designated command transmitted in step S302 is used to control the stop display of the out-of-order symbol as a variable display result of the first decorative symbol.

In this embodiment, in the first special symbol process process shown in FIG. 18 and the second special symbol process process shown in FIG. 28, the first start port switch passage process is performed for each timer interrupt (see step S312). And the second start port switch passing process (see step S322) is executed. Therefore, even if the stop display of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed, if a new start prize is generated, It is configured to store a new hold memory.

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (N in step S1125A), the process ends as it is.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the KT count counter indicating the low probability / remaining number of times in the first KT state is “0” (step S2010), and in “0”. If there is, that is, if it is not in the low probability / first KT state, the process proceeds to step S2014. When the value of the KT count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the CPU 56 subtracts the value of the KT count counter by "1" (step S2011) to see if it becomes "0". (Step S2012). If the value of the KT count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step S2014. When the value of the KT count counter becomes "0", that is, when the 100th fluctuation of the low probability / 1st KT state is completed, the CPU 56 resets the 1st KT flag indicating the 1st KT state ( Step S2013) and step S2014. As a result, the first KT state ends (shifts to the low probability / non-KT state) when 100 fluctuations are completed in the low probability / first KT state.

In step S2014, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step S2014). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability change flag, the first KT flag, the second KT flag, and the KT count counter if they are set (step S2015).

Next, the CPU 56 controls to start external output of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 (see FIGS. 32 and 33) if they have not yet been output (step S2015X).

Next, the CPU 56 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step S2017), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step S2018), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". (Step S2019), and set the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first gate passage waiting process (step S2020).

In this embodiment, by executing the process of step S2015X, with respect to the external outputs of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2, even before the game ball passes through the operating gate 17 and the jackpot game is started. , The external output of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 is started at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed.

Although details will be described later, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, a right-handed notification that urges the player to launch a game ball to the right of the game area 7 can be executed. .. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, as a right-handed notification, a firing promotion notification that urges the player to launch the game ball aiming at the operating gate 17 can be executed.

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the gate 32 or the operating gate 17 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, low volume sound output or low volume). The screen display) may be configured to give a left-handed notification to the player to urge the player to launch the game ball to the left of the game area 7. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 or the special winning opening 24 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, a loud sound). It may be configured to perform left-handed notification by output or large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area 7 is given a slight left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. Therefore, the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation may be configured to perform the left-handed notification in a manner in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the game machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation to return to the left-handed operation from the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, when the number of detected game balls at the gate 32, the operating gate 17, the second starting winning opening 14, and the special winning opening 24 reaches a certain number, a left-handed notification is performed. May be good. Further, at the gate 32 and the operating gate 17, when the game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and the second start winning opening 14 and the special winning opening 14 and the special winning opening In 24, when a specific number (for example, one) or more of game balls smaller than a predetermined number is detected, a left-handed notification may be performed.

Further, for example, the external signal is not output when the game ball is detected at the gate 32 or the operating gate 17, while the external signal is output when the game ball is detected at the second starting winning opening 14 or the special winning opening 24. It may be configured to do so.

In the present embodiment, the demo display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied, but when the demo display is performed in the normal state, the gate 32, the operation gate 17, the second start winning opening 14 or the second start winning opening 14 or When the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 24 is detected, the execution of the demo display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be given.

In this embodiment, since the external output of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 is executed at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, for example, the low probability / first KT state is terminated before the amusement store is closed. If the hold memory of the 2nd special symbol remains afterwards, the fluctuation of the 2nd special symbol for a long time (5 minutes) in a situation where the player has finished the game due to the closing of the game store. Since the jackpot symbol can be output externally when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed through the display, it is possible to urge the clerk of the game store to initialize the game machine 1 between the closing of the game store and the next opening. At this time, the clerk will open the store after initializing (RAM clear).

In addition, not only before the amusement store is closed, but also when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed after the player leaves the seat (for example, the second hold memory generated in the KT state is digested in the normal state, and the second special There is a case where the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed after a long time (5 minutes) fluctuation display of the symbol), but even in such a case, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 is output at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. Since it is executed, it is possible to urge the clerk of the game store to initialize the game machine 1.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a first gate passage waiting process (step S304A) in the special symbol process process. In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the operating gate switch 17a has been input (step S2501). If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a is input, the CPU 56 transmits the first big hit start designation command (step S2502), and sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first big winning opening pre-opening process. Set to the corresponding value (step S2503).

In this embodiment, the jackpot game is not started as soon as the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the first special symbol by executing the first gate passage waiting process, but the operating gate 17 The game ball passes through the game and is detected by the operation gate switch 17a, so that the game shifts to the big hit game.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the first large winning opening pre-opening process (step S305) in the special symbol process process. In the first large winning opening pre-opening process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the large winning opening pre-opening timer by -1 (step S1401). If it is before the start of round 1, the process of step S1401 is executed, so that the value of the timer before opening the large winning opening set in step S2017 of the first special symbol stop process is measured. , The jackpot display time (fanfare period) before the start of Round 1 will be measured. Further, in the case of round 1 or later, the process of step S1401 is executed, and the value of the timer before opening the large winning opening set in the processing during opening of the large winning opening is measured, so that after each round ( The interval period (except after the final round) will be measured.

In this embodiment, the jackpot display time (fanfare period) and the interval period are measured using a common time measurement timer, but the jackpot display time (fanfare period) and the interval period are separated. It may be configured to measure the time using the timer of.

Next, when the CPU 56 sets the current number of rounds in the EXT data of the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening when the timer before opening the large winning opening times out (the value of the time measurement timer is 0) (step S1411). , Control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1412).

Next, the CPU 56 initializes the winning number counter for counting the number of winning games balls to the large winning opening (step S1413). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to 0.

Next, the CPU 56 controls the large winning opening in the open state (step S1414). Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning ball device 20.

Next, the CPU 56 sets the opening time according to the jackpot type and the starting round in the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the winning opening (step S1415).

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S306) (step S1416).

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the first big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200A), and if the big hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step S2204A. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the first jackpot flag is reset (step S2201A), and control is performed to transmit the first jackpot end designation command (step S2202A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time when the jackpot end display is being performed on the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer (step S2203A), and the process is terminated.

In step S2204A, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S2204A). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S2205A). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205A), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S2206A). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 sets a probability variation flag indicating that it is in the probability variation state and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207A), and at the same time, a second KT flag indicating that it is in the second KT state. Is set to shift to the second KT state (step S2208A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step S2209A). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability change jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability change flag and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step S2210A), and sets the first KT flag indicating the first KT state to the first KT state. (Step S2211A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

If it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot), the CPU 56 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S2212A). Further, the CPU 56 sets “100” in the KT number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the low probability / first KT state (step S2213A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S2214A).

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the second special symbol process process (step S26B) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the second special symbol process process, a process for controlling the second special symbol display 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is executed.

When the CPU 56 performs the second special symbol process process, the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 provided in the game board 6 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning prize is generated in which the game ball wins the second starting winning opening 14 (step S321), the second starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S322). If the "first" of the first start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 19 is read as "second", the second starting port switch passing process will be explained. After that, the CPU 56 performs any of steps S350 to S360 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the second special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S350 to S360 are as follows.

Second special symbol normal process (step S350): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending memory counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the second big hit flag. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit, a small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S351 (1 in this example). The second jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. In addition, the small hit flag is reset when the small hit game ends.

Second variation pattern setting process (step S351): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S352 (2 in this example).

Second display result designation command transmission process (step S352): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S353 (3 in this example).

Second special symbol changing process (step S353): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the second fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S351 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 200 is notified. Controls the transmission of the symbol confirmation designation command, and updates the internal state (second special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 so that the decorative symbol is stopped when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

Second special symbol stop process (step S354): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 4. When the second jackpot flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S354A (11 in this example). When the small hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S358 (8 in this example). If neither the second big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (when forced to be missed), the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S350 (0 in this example). Update. In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer in the display control process in step S22.

Second gate passage waiting process (step S354A): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 11. In the second gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the operating gate 17. When the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 17 is detected, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S355 (5 in this example).

Second big winning opening pre-opening process (step S355): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 5. In the second large winning opening opening preprocessing, the special variable winning ball device 20 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 20) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during opening of the second special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S356 (6 in this example). The second big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the second big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

Second Grand Prize Opening Opening Process (Step S356): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 6. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the jackpot game state to the effect control microcomputer 200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20, and the like are performed. Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, the control is performed to transmit the large winning opening prize designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S355 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S357 (7 in this example).

Second jackpot end process (step S357): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

Second small hit release pre-processing (step S358): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 8. In the second small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the special variable winning ball device 22. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 24) is initialized, and the solenoid 106 is driven to control the special variable winning ball device 22 to open. Further, the execution time of the process during the opening of the second small hit is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S359 (9 in this example). The second small hit opening pre-processing is also a process for starting the small hit game.

Second small hit opening process (step S359): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9. A process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 22 is performed. In this embodiment, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 has elapsed by 0.8 seconds (see FIG. 15). Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the special winning opening and the game ball is detected by the second count switch 25a, a control is performed to transmit a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. When the closing condition is satisfied, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S360 (10 (decimal number) in this example).

Second small hit end process (step S360): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal process (step S350) in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S350. The case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is the value indicating step S350 means that the second special symbol display 8b is not displaying the variation of the second special symbol, and This is a case where neither the second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened).

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step S52B). Specifically, the count value of the second hold storage counter is confirmed.

If the second hold storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S51B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55, and the RAM 55. In addition to storing in the second random number buffer area of (step S53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S54B). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second hold storage number buffer of the RAM 55 is set to the second hold storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S60B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step S60A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step S64BB). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S68B without performing the processing after step S64B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the material is not limited to the above. For example, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step S64BB, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as a random number for jackpot determination (random 1) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S65B. Regardless of which big hit determination random number (random number 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the first special symbol is being changed in step S64BB, steps S64B to S161B A random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for small hit judgment (a random number common to the random number for big hit judgment or a completely different random number) without performing the processing of. By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which big hit determination random number (random number 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random number 1) from the second random number storage buffer (step S64B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step). S65B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for jackpot determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S66B), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step S67B). .. Then, based on random 2, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 2R probability variation jackpot (step S160B), the jackpot type is stored (step S161B), and the step Move to S68B.

If the big hit is not made in step S66B, the game control microcomputer 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made (step S164B), and decides to make the small hit as it is. Then, the process proceeds to step S68B.

In this embodiment, when the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it is unconditionally determined to be a small hit (forced loss). (Except for cases), but not limited to such aspects. For example, even if the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, a lottery process based on a random number may be performed to determine whether or not to make a small hit. In this case, although the lottery process is executed, it may be configured to determine a small hit with a 100% probability, or it may be configured to determine a deviation with a low probability.

Then, in step S68B, the value of the second special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step S68B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S68B is determined.

In step S65B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process (step S351) is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S301) shown in FIG. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 22, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained.

In the second display result designation command transmission process (step S352), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit, and determines the big hit type. Based on this, control is performed to send one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 3 designation command, display result 5 designation command to display result 7 designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 200. ..

The second special symbol changing process (step S353) is the same as the first special symbol changing process (step S303) shown in FIG. 23. That is, in the first special symbol changing process shown in FIG. 23, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol changing process is explained.

The second gate passage waiting process (step S354A) is the same as the first gate passage waiting process (step S304A) shown in FIG. 25. That is, in the first gate passage waiting process shown in FIG. 25, if "first" is read as "second", the second gate passage waiting process is explained.

The second large winning opening pre-opening process (step S355) is the same as the first large winning opening opening pre-processing (step S304A) shown in FIG. 26. That is, in the first large winning opening pre-opening process shown in FIG. 26, if "first" is read as "second", the second large winning opening pre-opening process is explained.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the second big hit end process (step S357) in the special symbol process process. In the second big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200B), and if the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2204B. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the second jackpot flag is reset (step S2201B), and control is performed to transmit the second jackpot end designation command (step S2202B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is being performed on the effect display device 9 is set in the big hit end display timer (step S2203B), and the process is terminated.

In step S2204B, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S2204B). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S2205B). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205B), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S2206B). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207B). Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not it was controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the jackpot this time (step S2208B). Whether or not the player was controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the big hit is, for example, in the second special symbol stop process before starting the big hit game, the first KT state is set before the big hit starts. A first KT storage flag indicating that the situation has been set and a second KT storage flag indicating that the state has been in the second KT state are set, and in step S2208B, whether or not these the first KT storage flag or the second KT storage flag is set is set. You just have to check. If neither the first KT state nor the second KT state is set before the start of the big hit, the first KT flag is set and the state shifts to the first KT state (step S2209B). If it was in the first KT state or the second KT state before the start of the big hit, the second KT flag is set and the state shifts to the second KT state (step S2210B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

By executing the processes of steps S2208B to S2210B, in this embodiment, when a 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, when the KT state is before the start of the jackpot. Only the second KT state is set, and if the non-KT state is reached before the start of the big hit, the first KT state is set. That is, as described above, in this embodiment, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the left-handed operation is performed, and the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. It is configured on the assumption that. However, if the variation display of the 2nd special symbol is configured to unconditionally shift to the 2nd KT state when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the right-handed operation is intentionally performed even in the non-KT state. It becomes possible to shift to the 2KT state, which may impair the original playability and unnecessarily increase the gambling. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the second KT state is shifted only when the KT state is before the start of the jackpot. In the non-KT state, the player is urged to perform a left-handed operation to prevent such a situation.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 confirms whether the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step S2211B). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2212B), and sets the first KT flag to shift to the first KT state (step S2212B). Step S2213B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

If it is neither a 6R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 56 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S2214B). Further, the CPU 56 sets “100” in the KT count counter (step S2215B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step S350) (step S2216B).

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, whether or not the process during special symbol change is being executed) (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the processing during special symbol change is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol change display for setting the special symbol display control data. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates the special symbol display control data for performing the variable display of the special symbol. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every 0.2 seconds. After that, the display control process (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, whether or not the special symbol stop process is being executed) (step S3203). ). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the process shifts to the special symbol stop processing), the CPU 56 stops and displays the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. A process of setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol. After that, the display control process (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. Since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is set in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol will continue to be stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. Further, if the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if it is either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol changing process), the special symbol variation display is used. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a discrepancy between the fluctuation time recognized by the game control microcomputer 560 and the fluctuation time recognized by the effect control microcomputer 200, the display result designation command transmission process also fluctuates. It may be configured to subtract 1 from the time timer.

In this embodiment, the case where the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag is shown, but in the special symbol process processing, the start flag is set at the start of the change of the special symbol. At the same time, the end flag may be set at the end of the change of the special symbol. Then, in the special symbol display control process (step S36), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and is based on the fact that the end flag is set. It is also possible to set special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol.

Next, the external output signal output by the game machine 1 will be described. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) is in the information output process (step S29), the process of step S2015X in the first special symbol stop process, and the second special symbol stop process. By executing the same process as in step S2015X, an external output signal is output to an external device such as a hall management computer via the external output terminal plate provided in the game machine 1.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an external output signal output by the game machine 1. A prize ball signal is assigned to the terminal 01 of the external output terminal plate. The prize ball signal is a signal that is output externally every time a predetermined number of prize balls (10 in this example) are paid out. Further, a jackpot signal 1 is assigned to the terminal 05 of the external output terminal plate. The jackpot signal 1 is a signal that is continuously output to the outside during the entire jackpot game. Further, a jackpot signal 2 is assigned to the terminal 06 of the external output terminal plate. The jackpot signal 2 is a signal that is continuously output to the outside during all the jackpot games, during the probability variation state, and during the KT state (during the first KT state and the second KT state). Further, a special winning opening signal is assigned to the terminal 07 of the external output terminal slope. The special winning opening winning signal is a signal that is output externally based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 24. Further, a prize ball planned number signal is assigned to the terminal 09 of the external output terminal plate. The planned number of prize balls signal is a signal that is output externally every time the planned number of prize balls to be paid out reaches a predetermined number (10 in this example).

In the example shown in FIG. 32, a case where a common special winning opening winning signal is output externally without distinguishing between the first KT state and the second KT state is shown. Not limited. For example, it may be configured to externally output different special winning openings winning signals depending on whether it is in the first KT state or the second KT state. FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modification of the external output signal output by the game machine 1. In the modified example shown in FIG. 33, the special winning port signal 1 is assigned to the terminal 07 of the external output terminal slope, and the special winning port signal 2 is assigned to the terminal 08 of the external output terminal slope. .. The special winning opening winning signal 1 is a signal that is output externally based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 24 in the first KT state. Further, the special winning opening winning signal 2 is a signal output externally based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 24 in the second KT state.

In addition, in FIG. 32 and FIG. 33, a signal dedicated to the small hit which is continuously output to the outside during the period of the small hit game may be provided.

Next, a normal symbol process process (step S26C) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol process process. In the normal symbol process processing, when the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 and the gate switch 32a is turned on (step S5111), the gate The switch passage process (step S5112) is executed. Then, the CPU 56 executes any of the processes shown in steps S5100 to S5103 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

Gate switch passage processing (step S5112): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the count value (gate passage storage number) of the gate passage storage counter has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by +1. The LED of the normal symbol hold storage display 41 is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of extracting the value of the normal symbol hit determination random number (random 4) and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of stored gates.

Normal symbol normal processing (step S5100): When the CPU 56 is in a state where the fluctuation of the normal symbol can be started (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step S100, specifically, the normal symbol In the case where the display 10 does not display the variation of the normal symbol and the variable winning ball device 15 is not in the opening / closing operation based on the fact that the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10), the gate passage memory is stored. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory counter is confirmed. If the number of memory passing through the gate is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the hit symbol). Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S5101).

Normal symbol variation processing (step S5101): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "2") indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step S5102).

Normal symbol stop processing (step S5102): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a missing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S5100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the time before opening the normal electric accessory is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "5") indicating the normal electric accessory opening pretreatment (step S5102A).

Pre-processing for opening the normal electric accessory (step S5102A): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol process timer to the normal electric accessory operating time and timers. Is started, and the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "3") indicating the normal electric accessory operation process (step S5103).

Normal electric accessory operation process (step S5103): The CPU 56 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S5100).

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal process (step S5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the gate passing memory number is 0 by checking the count value of the gate passing memory number counter (step S5121). If the number of gate passage memories is 0 (Y in step S5121), the process ends as it is. If the gate-passing memory number is not 0 (N in step S5121), the CPU 56 reads out the normal symbol hit determination random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate-passing memory number = 1 (step S5122). Then, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the gate passage storage counter by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S5123). That is, the random value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random values for normal symbol hit determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each gate passing memory number are always extracted is that the gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is designed to match.

Next, the CPU 56 uses the normal symbol determination table to determine whether or not the normal symbol hits.

FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol judgment table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a normal symbol hit judgment value to be compared with a normal symbol hit judgment random number (random 4) is set, and is in a normal state. There is a normal symbol determination table for KT used in the KT state and a normal symbol determination table for KT used in the KT state.

As shown in FIG. 36, in this embodiment, it is determined that the probability of winning is 1/10 in the normal state and 10/11 in the KT state. In the present embodiment, since the probability of hitting a normal symbol differs between the normal state and the KT state, the start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 is more likely to occur in the KT state than in the normal state. Although the configuration is such that small hits are likely to occur, the probability of hitting a normal symbol may be the same in the normal state and the KT state.

Specifically, if the CPU 56 is in the KT state (if the first KT flag or the second KT flag is set), the normal symbol determination table for KT is selected (Y, S5123B in steps S5123A), and if it is in the normal state. Normally, the normal symbol determination table is selected (unless the first KT flag or the second KT flag is set) (N, S5123C in step S5123A).

Then, in step S5124, if it is in the KT state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the normal symbol hit determination random number value read in step S5122 is within the range of [3 to 12], and in the normal state. If there is, it is determined whether or not the random value for determination of hitting the normal symbol read in step S5122 is [3]. If it is a hit, a hit symbol is set as a display result (step S5125), and the process proceeds to step S5130A.

Further, in step S5124, if the read normal symbol hit determination random value is not within the hit range, the CPU 56 sets the outlier symbol as the display result (step S5126), and proceeds to step S5130A.

In step S4130A, if the first KT flag is set, the CPU 56 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol fluctuation time in the normal symbol process timer (Y, S5130B in step S5130). If the first KT flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal symbol fluctuation time (N, S5130C in step S5130).

Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S5101) (step S5131).

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process (step S5101). In the normal symbol variation process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S5141). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S5141), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S5144).

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (Y in step S5141), the CPU 56 corresponds to 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol stop symbol display time on the normal symbol process timer. Set the value (step S5142). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S5102) (step S5143).

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol stop process (step S5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S3701). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3702), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step S3702), the CPU 56 determines whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (hits in step S5124). (Whether or not it was determined) is confirmed (step S3703). Whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol is confirmed by, for example, setting the normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step S5124, and checking whether or not the flag is set. Can be done.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a hit symbol but a missed symbol (N in step S3703), the CPU 56 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step S5100) (step S5100). Specifically, it is updated to "0") (step S3708).

In step S3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (Y in step S3703), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first KT flag is set (step S3704), and if it is set, That is, in the first KT state, 0.1 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step S3706). Further, when the first KT flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step S3705). ..

Next, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “5”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing (step S5102A) (step S5164).

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening pretreatment (step S5102A). In the normal electric accessory release preprocessing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S3801). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3802), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before opening the normal electric accessory has elapsed (Y in step S3802), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first KT flag is set (step S3803). , That is, in the case of the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step S3805). When the first KT flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step S3804).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal electric accessory opening time is set to 5.5 seconds in the first KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is in a state in which it is easier to win a start prize in the second start winning opening 14 than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, the first KT state is configured so that the game ball is less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 22 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 15 than in the normal state or the second KT state.

The control method for facilitating the start winning of the second starting winning opening 14 when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, in the case of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened many times as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state (for example, the variable winning ball device in the normal state or the second KT state). The number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 may be set to 2 in the first KT state, whereas 1 is set as the number of times of opening of 15. By doing so, in the case of the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, it is possible to facilitate the starting winning of the second starting winning opening 14.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, the control for lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 shown above and the variable winning ball device 15 as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state. It may be executed in combination with the control for increasing the number of times of opening.

Next, the CPU 56 controls the variable winning ball device 15 in the open state (step S3806). Specifically, the solenoid 16 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 15.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory operation process (step S5103) (step S3807).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory operation process (step S5103). In the normal electric accessory operation process, the CPU 56 sets the value of the normal symbol process timer to -1 (step S3901). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer becomes 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3902). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3901), the process ends as it is.

In step S3902, when the normal symbol process timer times out (Y in step S3902), the CPU 56 controls the variable winning ball device 15 to the closed state (step S3911). Specifically, the drive of the solenoid 16 is stopped to close the variable winning ball device 15.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S5100) (step S3912).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 201 starts executing the main process. In the main process, first, an initialization process is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the activation interval of the effect control (step S701). After that, the effect control CPU 201 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 201 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 201 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 201 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 201 performs the first decorative symbol process process (step S705A). In the first decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the first variable display unit 9a is executed. .. In addition, the second decorative symbol process process is performed (step S705B). In the second decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the second variable display unit 9b is executed. .. Further, a background symbol process process for controlling the display state of the background symbol display unit 9c is executed (step S706). In addition, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 18c is executed (step S707). In addition, a random number update process for updating the counter value of the counter for generating a random number such as a random number for determining the advance notice is executed (step S708). After that, the process proceeds to step S702.

FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing an effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte production control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is composed of a 12-byte area of the reception command buffers 1 to 12. Then, a command reception number counter is used to indicate in which area the received command is stored. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. It does not necessarily have to be in the ring buffer format.

The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIGS. 16 and 17) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

43 to 45 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 201 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 201 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step S617), the effect control CPU 201 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) in the RAM. It is stored in the display result specification command storage area (step S618A).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 201 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S620). The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation specification command has been normally received. After that, the effect control CPU 201 executes the process when the confirmation command is received (step S620A).

If the received effect control command is the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 201 has the first jackpot start designation command reception flag or the second jackpot start designation command reception flag. Is set (step S622). In this embodiment, the first jackpot start designation command reception flag and the second jackpot start designation command reception flag set in step S622 are also referred to as fanfare flags.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 ends the instruction notification (step S3804). The instruction notification is an effect of notifying how to hit the game ball, the first instruction notification for prompting the launch of the game ball to the substantially right side of the game area 7, and the second instruction notification for prompting the launch of the game ball to the operating gate 17. Instruction notification is provided. The first instruction notification includes the first normal instruction notification that displays an image including the characters "right-handed" on the entire surface of the effect display device 9, and "right-handed" on a part (upper right part) of the effect display device 9. A first reduction instruction notification for displaying an image containing the characters "" is provided, and as a second instruction notification, an image including the characters "Aim at the gate" is displayed on the entire surface of the effect display device 9. 2 A normal instruction notification and a second reduction instruction notification for displaying an image including the characters "Aim at the gate" are provided in a part (upper right part) of the effect display device 9.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the first instruction notification is started, and the passage of the game ball to the gate 32 is not detected by 10 seconds after the start of the first instruction notification. In this case, the image of the second instruction notification is superimposed on the image of the first instruction notification.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 resets the instruction notification timer for measuring the period until the instruction notification is switched from the first instruction notification to the second instruction notification (step S3805).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 201 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S624A). In this embodiment, the jackpot end designation command reception flag set in step S624A is also referred to as an ending flag.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 201 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step S626).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step S627), the effect control CPU 201 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step S628).

If the received effect control command is low accuracy / non-KT background designation (step S630), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen according to the low probability / non-KT state (for example). , Background screen of blue display color) (step S631). If the effect control CPU 201 is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the first KT state flag indicating that it is in the first KT state (step S632).

If the received effect control command is low probability / first KT background designation (step S633), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 with a low probability / background screen according to the first KT state (for example). , The background screen of the green display color) (step S634). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the first KT state flag (step S635). If the effect control CPU 201 is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the probability change state flag indicating that it is in the probability change state and the second KT state flag indicating that it is in the second KT state (step S636).

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / first KT background designation (step S637), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 with a high probability / background screen according to the first KT state (for example). , The background screen of the yellow display color) (step S638). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability change state flag and the first KT state flag (step S639). If the effect control CPU 201 is set, the second KT state flag is reset (step S640).

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / second KT background designation (step S641), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 with a high probability / background screen according to the second KT state (for example). , The background screen of the red display color) (step S642). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability change state flag and the second KT state flag (step S643). Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is set, the first KT state flag is reset (step S644).

If the received effect control command is a large prize opening prize designation command (step S650), the effect control CPU 201 sets the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter to 15 each (one prize to the large prize opening). (Equivalent to the number of prize balls per prize) is added (step S651).

The first prize ball number counter is a counter for counting the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas, and is used as a big prize opening in the big hit game that triggered the start of the consecutive villas and all the big hit games that occurred during the consecutive villas. The prize ball based on the winning of the game ball and the prize ball based on the special winning opening 24 in all the small hit games generated in the probabilistic state in the consecutive villa, the first KT state and the second KT state. It will be added at any time. The second prize ball number counter is a counter for counting the number of prize balls in the second KT state, and is a jackpot game that triggered the start of the second KT state and all the jackpot games that occurred during the second KT state. A prize ball based on the game ball winning in the large winning opening and a prize ball based on the game ball winning in the special winning opening 24 in all the small hit games generated in the second KT state are added at any time.

Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is displaying the display of the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas indicating the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas on the effect display device 9, it is based on the value of the first prize ball counter after the addition. If the display of the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas is updated and the display of the number of prize balls in the special rush indicating the number of prize balls in the second KT state is being displayed on the effect display device 9, the second prize ball counter after addition is displayed. The display of the number of prize balls during the special rush is updated based on the value of (step S652).

If the received effect control command is a special prize opening prize designation command (step S653), the effect control CPU 201 sets the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter to 10 (1 to the special prize opening 24), respectively. Add (corresponding to the number of prize balls per winning) (step S654). Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is displaying the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas, the CPU 201 updates the display of the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas based on the value of the first prize ball counter after the addition, and also performs a special rush. If the middle prize ball number display is being displayed, the special rush middle prize ball number display is updated based on the value of the second prize ball number counter after addition (step S655).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S656). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 displays the prize ball addition display (for example, character display such as "+10") on the effect display device 9. (Step S657). Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a predetermined winning sound from the speaker 27 (step S658), and lights and displays the special winning opening lamp 24a (step S659).

On the other hand, if the second KT state flag is not set (if it is not the second KT state), the process returns to step S611 without executing the processes of steps S657 to S659.

By executing the processes of steps S656 to S656, in this embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening 24 during the second KT state, the prize ball addition display is displayed and the winning sound is output. , And the special winning opening lamp 24a is lit and displayed, while the special winning opening 24 is not in the second KT state even if the game ball wins, the winning ball addition display is displayed, the winning sound is output, and the special winning opening is displayed. The lighting display of the mouth lamp 24a is not performed.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to display the prize ball addition display, output the prize sound, and display the lighting of the special prize opening lamp 24a, and it is configured to execute only one or two of these. You may.

If the received effect control command is the first customer waiting demo display specification command (step S4301), the effect control CPU 201 sets the first demo command reception flag indicating that the first customer wait demo display specification command has been received. (Step S4302).

If the received effect control command is the second customer waiting demo display specification command (step S4303), the effect control CPU 201 sets the second demo command reception flag indicating that the second customer wait demo display specification command has been received. (Step S4304).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect CPU 201 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command or executes processing (step S670). Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the processing at the time of receiving the confirmation command. The effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not any of the display result 2 designation command to the display result 6 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area, so that the stop-displayed symbol is a jackpot symbol. Whether or not it is determined (step S4401). When any of the display result 2 designation command to the display result 6 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area, that is, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the received symbol confirmation designation command is the second symbol confirmation designation. It is determined whether or not it is a command (step S4401A), and if it is the first symbol confirmation designation command, the process proceeds to step S4404.

If the received symbol confirmation designation command is the second symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the normal state (step S4401B), and if it is in the KT state (first KT flag and second KT). If any of the flags is set), the process proceeds to step S4404.

Under the normal state, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the preparatory display flag indicating that the jackpot preparing display indicating that the jackpot is fluctuating has already been executed is set (step S4402). If it is set, the preparing display flag is reset (step S4403), and the process proceeds to step S4404.

In step S4404, the effect control CPU 201 starts the first normal instruction notification (step S4404), and sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds in the instruction notification timer (step S4406).

If the preparing display flag indicating that the preparing display has been executed is not set in step S4402, the effect control CPU 201 starts the first reduction instruction notification (step S4405), and proceeds to step S4406. To do. The "preparing display" is an effect that is executed when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol in the normal state. Specifically, the characters "preparing for the jackpot" are displayed. This is an effect in which the included image is displayed on the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, a case where a still image including the characters "preparing for a big hit" is displayed is shown, but not limited to such a mode, for example, a big hit game is started as a display in preparation. The display may be configured to correspond to the period up to (the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction notification is performed. Further, when the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction notification is performed if it is in the KT state. In addition, when the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction notification is performed only when the preparing display is executed in the normal state, and the preparing display is not executed. Performs the first reduction instruction notification.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the background symbol process process (step S706) shown in FIG. 41. First, the effect control CPU 201 performs an instruction notification control process for controlling the instruction notification (step S4501), and performs a demo display control process (step S4502) for controlling the demo display.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 performs any of steps S900 to S908 according to the value of the background symbol process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed.

Background symbol change start waiting process (step S900): It is determined whether or not the background symbol change start condition is satisfied, and if the background symbol change start condition is satisfied, the background symbol display unit 9c starts the change. To control. The fluctuation start condition of the background symbol is satisfied when it is confirmed in the command analysis process that any fluctuation pattern command has been received. Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start processing (step S901).

Background symbol variation start processing (step S901): Control is performed so that the background symbol variation on the left, middle, and right is started. In addition, the stop symbol of the background symbol is determined according to the received display result command, and the fluctuation time of the background symbol is set. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S902).

Process during background symbol change (step S902): The end of the background symbol change time is monitored. When the fluctuation time ends, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol stop processing (step S903). In the process of changing the background symbol, the effect control CPU 201 may extend the fluctuation time of the background symbol.

Background symbol stop processing (step S903): Control is performed to finally stop the fluctuation of the background symbol and display the stopped symbol. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900), the big hit display process (step S904), or the small hit medium process (step S908). When updating to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S904), the jackpot display process (step S904) is performed on condition that the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command is received. Update to the value corresponding to. Further, when updating to a value corresponding to the small hit middle processing (step S908), the value corresponding to the small hit middle display processing (step S908) is set on the condition that the small hit start designation command is received. Update.

Big hit display process (step S904): Controls the big hit display. Then, when the big winning opening opening display command (the big winning opening opening display command related to the first round) that indicates that the big hit game has actually started is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is processed during the round ( Update to the value corresponding to step S905).

Process during round (step S905): Display control during round is performed. For example, when a large winning opening opening display command indicating that the large winning opening is open is received, the number of rounds is displayed and controlled.

Round post-processing (step S906): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the large winning opening is received, which indicates that the large winning opening is open (closed), interval display is performed.

Big hit end effect processing (step S907): Controls the big hit end display after the big hit game is finished. For example, when the ending designation command (first ending designation command, second ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot is received, the ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900).

Small hit middle processing (step S908): Display control during the small hit game is performed. Then, when the small hit end designation command is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900).

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the instruction notification control process. In the instruction notification control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first instruction notification is in progress (step S4601), and if the first instruction notification is in progress, the value of the instruction notification timer is decremented by 1 (step S4602). ), It is determined whether or not the instruction notification timer times out (step S4603). If the time-out has occurred (10 seconds have passed since the execution of the first instruction notification), the second normal instruction notification is started if the first normal instruction notification is being executed (Y, S4605 in step S3503), and the first 1 If the reduction instruction notification is being executed, the second reduction display notification is started (step S4506).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second instruction notification is executed 10 seconds after the start of the first instruction notification. Further, when the first normal instruction notification is executed, the second normal instruction notification is performed after 10 seconds, and when the first reduction instruction notification is executed, the second reduction instruction notification is performed after 10 seconds. It becomes.

When executing the second instruction notification image, the second instruction notification image may be superimposed and displayed on the first instruction notification image, or the first instruction notification image may be deleted and the second instruction notification image may be displayed. It may be displayed.

49 and 50 are flowcharts showing a demo display control process. In the demo display control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first demo command reception flag is set (step S4701), and if it is not set, the process proceeds to step S4706. If it is set, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal state (step S4702), and if it is not in the normal state, the process proceeds to step S4705. Specifically, if neither the first KT flag nor the second KT flag is set, the normal state is determined.

Under the normal state, the effect control CPU 201 sets the first demo standby timer for measuring the value corresponding to the time (for example, 30 seconds) until the first demo display is started (step S4703). The first demo waiting flag indicating that the first demo display is waiting is set (step S4704). Then, the first demo reception flag is reset (step S4705).

After that, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first demo waiting flag is set (step S4706), and if it is set, the first special symbol variation is started (step S4707). Y), or when the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (Y in step S4708), the process proceeds to step S4712. As a result, the first demo display is not executed when the first special symbol change is started or the jackpot game state is controlled based on the change of the second special symbol. Specifically, in step S4707, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation of the first decorative symbol is received, it is determined that the first special symbol variation has started. Further, in step S4708, when the second big hit start designation command is received, it is determined that the big hit game state is controlled based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol.

When the first demo waiting flag is set, the first special symbol change is not started (N in step S4707), and the jackpot game state is not controlled based on the change in the second special symbol (N in step S4708). , The value of the first demo standby timer is subtracted by 1 (step S4709), and when the first demo standby timer times out, the first demo display is started (step S4711) and the first demo standby flag is reset (step S4711). Step S4712).

After that, when the effect control CPU 201 is in the first demo display (Y in step S4713), the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started (Y in step S4714), or based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol. When the game is controlled to the jackpot game state (Y in step S4715), the first demo display is terminated (step S4716).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second demo command reception flag is set (step S4801), and if it is not set, the process proceeds to step S4806. If it is set, it is determined whether or not it is in the KT state (step S4802), and if it is not in the KT state, the process proceeds to step S4805. Specifically, if any of the first KT flag and the second KT flag is set, the KT state is determined.

In the KT state, the effect control CPU 201 sets a second demo standby timer for measuring a value corresponding to the time (for example, 30 seconds) until the second demo display is started (step S4803). The second demo waiting flag indicating that the second demo display is waiting is set (step S4804). Then, the second demo reception flag is reset (step S4805).

After that, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second demo waiting flag is set (step S4806), and if it is set, the second special symbol variation is started (step S4807). If it is not in the Y) or KT state (N in step S4808), the process proceeds to step S4812. As a result, the second demo display is not executed when the second special symbol change is started or the KT state ends. Specifically, in step S4807, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation of the second decorative symbol is received, it is determined that the second special symbol variation has started. Further, in step S4808, if either the first KT flag or the second KT flag is not set, it is determined that the KT state has ended.

If the 2nd demo waiting flag is set, the 2nd special symbol change is not started (N in step S4807), and the KT state is not completed (Y in step S4808), the value of the 2nd demo waiting timer Is subtracted by 1 (step S4809), and when the second demo standby timer times out, the second demo display is started (step S4811), and the second demo standby flag is reset (step S4812).

After that, the effect control CPU 201 is in the second demo display (Y in step S4813), the change of the second special symbol is started (Y in step S4814), or the KT state is finished (step). N) of S4815, the second demo display is terminated (step S4816).

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the background symbol variation start processing (step S901). In the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the background symbol (step S920). In this embodiment, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be out of alignment), only the outlier symbol or the left and right background symbols in which the left, middle, and right background symbols do not match completely match. Determine the combination of out-of-reach symbols. Further, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols in which the background symbols on the left, middle, and right are odd-numbered is determined. In addition, when a display result 3 designation command or a display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot is determined), a combination of symbols in which the background symbols on the left, middle, and right are even numbers. To determine. In addition, when the display result 4 designation command or the display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot is determined), the same combination as the reach-off symbol in which only the left and right background symbols match. To determine. Further, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), the combination of the background symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table according to the variation pattern of the background symbol to be used according to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command (step S921). Then, the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the selected process table is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S922). Next, the effect control CPU 201 executes control of the effect device (effect display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). (Step S923). For example, the background symbol display unit 9c outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP 209 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

When the execution of the continuous effect is specified in the fluctuation pattern (in the case of the second fluctuation patterns # 17 and # 18), step S923 and the background symbol fluctuation processing described later are performed according to the process table selected in step S921. By executing the process of step S944, the continuous effect is executed during the variable display of the background symbol. When the execution of the battle effect is specified in the fluctuation pattern (in the case of the second fluctuation pattern # 11, # 12, # 14, # 15, # 18), step S923 is performed according to the process table selected in step S921. By executing the process of step S944 of the background symbol changing process, which will be described later, the battle effect is executed during the background symbol changing display.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time in the background symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the background symbol fluctuation time timer (step S924). Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S902) (step S925).

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the background symbol changing process (step S902) in the background symbol process process. In the background symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 201 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S940) and 1 subtracts the value of the normal symbol variation time timer (step S941). When the process timer times out (step S942), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step S943). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S944).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the continuous effect is executed during the variable display of the background symbol and it is the start timing of the continuous effect (step S945). It should be noted that whether or not the continuous effect is executed can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second variation patterns # 17 and # 18 are specified in the received variation pattern command. Further, whether or not it is the start timing of the continuous effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the background symbol fluctuation time timer set in step S924 of the background symbol variation start processing. If it is the start timing of the continuous effect, the effect control CPU 201 causes the effect display device 9 to display the prize ball number display during the consecutive villas based on the current value of the first prize ball number counter (step S946). .. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls displayed during the special rush is displayed when the player is in the second KT state (see step S9010 described later), but the start timing of the continuous effect during the second KT state is displayed. Then, by executing the process of step S946, the display of the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas is displayed in addition to the display of the number of prize balls in the special rush.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the first KT transition effect is executed during the variable display of the background symbol and it is the start timing of the first effect (step S947). It should be noted that whether or not the first KT transition effect is executed can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second variation pattern # 18 is specified by the received variation pattern command. That is, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the background symbol is executed based on the second variation pattern # 18, whether the continuation effect is executed during the variation display of the background symbol and the second KT state continues. After suggesting whether or not, the first KT transition effect is executed, and the effect as if the second KT state has ended and the state has shifted to the first KT state is executed (however, at this stage, it is still the first internally. The 2KT state is not finished, and to be exact, the second KT state is finished at the start of the big hit), and then it develops into a battle production. Further, whether or not it is the start timing of the first KT transition effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the background symbol fluctuation time timer set in step S924 of the background symbol variation start processing.

If it is the start timing of the first KT transition effect, the effect control CPU 201 ends the sound output of the music for the second KT from the speaker 27 (step S948). That is, in this embodiment, when the second KT state is controlled, the sound output of the music for the second KT is started at the start of the jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot that triggered the control (step described later). (See S982), but when the process of step S948 is executed, the sound output of the music for the second KT is terminated.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 erases the display of the number of prize balls during the consecutive villas and the display of the number of prize balls during the special rush in the effect display device 9 (step S949). Further, in this embodiment, the character display such as "during special rush" is displayed in the second KT state, but in step S949, the character display such as "during special rush" is also deleted.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 executes the background symbol variation time extension process (step S950). That is, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is started, or when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the first There is a possibility that the variable display of the special symbol may be started, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in parallel. Therefore, in this embodiment, the background symbol variation time extension process of step S950 is executed, so that when the background symbol variation display is executed in response to the variation display of one special symbol, the other special symbol is executed. When the variation display of the symbol is started, the variation pattern of the background symbol is replaced or the variation time is extended as necessary.

In step S950, for example, when the effect control CPU 201 is executing the variation display of the background symbol in response to the variation display of one special symbol that is out of alignment, the variation display of the other special symbol that becomes a big hit is displayed. When it is started, it is replaced with the fluctuation pattern of the background symbol corresponding to the special symbol of the big hit, and the fluctuation time is extended. Further, for example, when the variable display of the background symbol is executed in response to the variable display of one special symbol that becomes a big hit, and the variable display of the other special symbol that becomes an outlier is started, the background symbol The fluctuation display of the background symbol currently being executed is executed as it is without replacing the fluctuation pattern or extending the fluctuation time. Further, for example, when the variable display of the background symbol is executed in response to the variable display of one special symbol that becomes a big hit, and the variable display of the other special symbol that becomes a big hit is started, it has already been described. As described above, in this embodiment, since the variation display of the special symbol that is started later is forcibly removed in the middle, the variation pattern of the background symbol is not replaced or the variation time is not extended, and the background currently being executed is not performed. The variable display of the symbol is executed as it is.

Further, in the normal state, the effect control CPU 201 is undergoing a jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, and when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started (Y in step S5000, Y in S5001, Y in S5002), the jackpot is changed. The preparation display is executed (step S5003), and the preparation display flag is set (step S5004). In step S5000, if neither the first KT flag nor the second KT flag is set, it is determined that the normal state is set. In step S5001, the process during the change of the second decorative symbol is executed in the second decorative symbol process process (step S705B), and any one of the display result 2 designated command to the display result 6 designated command for the second decorative symbol is executed. If it is stored, it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is changing. In step S5002, it is determined that the variation of the first special symbol has started when the variation pattern command for the first special symbol is received.

As described above, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started while the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is being performed in the normal state, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forcibly excluded. At that time, the game control microcomputer 560 may send a forced disconnection designation command indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forced to be missed to the effect control microcomputer 200. In that case, the effect control may be performed. The microcomputer 200 may execute the jackpot preparation display based on the reception of the forced loss designation command. Alternatively, only when the variation display result is determined to be forced out, the game control microcomputer 560 determines a special variation pattern in which the variation display result is determined only by forced error, and the variation pattern showing this special variation pattern. A command may be transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 200, and the effect control microcomputer 200 may execute the jackpot preparation display based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command. Good.

Then, if the background symbol variation time timer has timed out (step S951), the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation stop process (step S903) (step S952). ).

53 and 54 are flowcharts showing the background symbol fluctuation stop processing (step S903) in the background symbol process processing. In the background symbol fluctuation stop processing, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set (step S970A). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step S974. In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step S973. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S971 is executed. Without doing so, the process proceeds to step S974.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set. (Step S970B). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step S987. In this embodiment, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step S986. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the effect during the small hit game is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the small hit game has not yet been executed. Therefore, the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S971 is set. The process proceeds to step S987 without executing the display process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 201 uses the effect display device 9 to display the stop symbol of the left, middle, and right background symbols (missing symbol, jackpot symbol). , Small hit symbol) is controlled to be fixedly displayed (step S971).

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S971 (Y in step S972), the effect control CPU 201 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S973).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags (first jackpot start designation command reception flag, second jackpot start designation command reception flag) is set (step S974). .. When any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S975). The effect control CPU 201 also resets the set jackpot start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table according to the fanfare effect (step S976). Next, the effect control CPU 201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S977), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (effect display device 9 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step S978).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the probability change state flag, the first KT state flag, or the second KT state flag is set (step S979). If none of the probability change state flag, the first KT state flag, and the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the low probability / non-KT state), the effect control CPU 201 resets the first prize ball counter. (Step S980). That is, since it is a case where a big hit occurs in a low probability / non-KT state, it is a case where a so-called first hit occurs, and the first prize ball number counter is reset.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the current jackpot is based on the 16R probability variation jackpot (step S981). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not a display result designation command (display result 2 designation command) for designating the 16R probability variation jackpot has been received. If it is a 16R probability variation big hit, it is a case where the big hit game that triggers the start of the second KT state is started. Therefore, the effect control CPU 201 controls to start the sound output of the music for the second KT from the speaker 27 ( Step S982).

On the other hand, if it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 201 resets the second prize ball number counter if it is set (step S983). That is, in this case, if the player is in the second KT state, a jackpot other than the 16R probability variation jackpot occurs and the second KT state ends, so the second prize ball number counter is reset.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S904) (step S984).

When the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S971 (Y in step S985), the effect control CPU 201 sets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S986).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (step S987). When the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit start designation command is received), the effect control CPU 201 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S988). The effect control CPU 201 also resets the set small hit start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S989). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, during the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 selects the process table according to the small hit medium effect (step S990). Next, the effect control CPU 201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S991), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (effect display device 9 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step S992).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a predetermined opening sound corresponding to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 22 from the speaker 27 (step S993), and lights and displays the special winning opening lamp 24a (step S994).

On the other hand, if the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S995 without executing the processes of steps S990 to S994. By executing the determination process of step S989, in this embodiment, the effect during the small hit game is executed only when the small hit game is performed during the second KT state, and the special variable winning ball device 22 A predetermined opening sound corresponding to the opening is output, and the special winning opening lamp 24a is lit and displayed.

In this embodiment, a case where a predetermined opening sound is output and the special winning opening lamp 24a is lit and displayed when a small hit occurs during the second KT state is shown, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, it may be configured to execute only one of the output of a predetermined opening sound and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a. Further, for example, even during the second KT state, it may be configured so that neither the output of the predetermined opening sound nor the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a is executed, and the effect during the small hit game is produced in the first place. It may be configured not to execute the small hit medium processing itself.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit middle processing (step S908) (step S995).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step S971 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S972 and N in step S985), the effect control CPU 201 is the background symbol. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900) (step S996).

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end effect process (step S907) in the background symbol process process. In the jackpot end effect process, the effect control CPU 201 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step S9000). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the completion of all rounds of the jackpot game in the round post-processing (see step S906). Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step S9001).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S9001), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S9002), and the effect device (effect display device 9) follows the contents of the process data n. , Speaker 27, etc.) (step S9003). For example, an effect of displaying the end of the jackpot or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S9004), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S9005). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S9006).

If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S9001), the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the jackpot game ending this time is based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot (step S9007). ). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is determined by, for example, a display result specification command (display result 3 designation command) that specifies the 6R probability variation jackpot or a display result specification command (display result 5) that specifies the 2R probability variation jackpot. It can be determined by checking whether or not the specified command) has been received. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it becomes a high probability state / first KT state after the jackpot game ends), the effect control CPU 201 is displayed in the effect display device 9 if it is not displayed. Control is performed to start the display of the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas based on the first prize ball number counter (step S9008). In step S9008, the effect control CPU 201 also controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying a character display such as "during normal rush".

If it is neither a 6R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the jackpot game ending this time is based on the 16R probability variation jackpot (step S9009). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not a display result designation command (display result 2 designation command) for designating the 16R probability variation jackpot has been received. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it becomes a high probability state / second KT state after the jackpot game ends), if the effect control CPU 201 is not displayed, the second prize ball is displayed in the effect display device 9. Control is performed to start the display of the number of prize balls during the special rush based on the number counter (step S9010). In step S9010, the effect control CPU 201 also controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying a character display such as "during special rush".

Although not shown in FIG. 55, if the jackpot game ending this time is based on a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot (that is, a low probability state / first KT state is reached after the jackpot game ends). If), the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying a character display such as "chance time".

Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900) (step S9011).

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a small hit medium process (step S908) in the background symbol process process. In the small hit middle process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (step S9201). When the small hit end designation command reception flag is not set (that is, when the small hit end designation command has not been received yet), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S9202). , The process of controlling the effect device (effect display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n is executed (step S9203). That is, the production corresponding to the small hit game is continuously performed.

However, as described above, in this embodiment, when the second KT state is not in progress, the process table corresponding to the small hit medium effect is not set in the first place (see step S989), so the small hit end designation command is received. Even if it is not done, the production corresponding to the small hit game is not executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S9204), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S9205). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S9206).

When the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit end designation command is received), the effect control CPU 201 ends the effect corresponding to the small hit game, and step S9207. Move to. Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900) (step S9207).

57 and 58 are explanatory views showing a display example of instruction notification according to the present embodiment. In the display example shown in FIG. 57, a display example of the instruction notification when a big hit is obtained based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol is shown. For example, first, as shown in FIG. 57 (1), the background symbol corresponding to the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and as shown in FIG. 57 (2), the background symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (3), the first normal instruction notification 55A is performed. The first normal instruction notification 55A at this time is performed by displaying an image including the characters "right-handed" and a right arrow. Then, when 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operating gate 17, the second normal instruction notification 55B is performed as shown in FIG. 57 (4).

The second normal instruction notification 55B at this time is an image showing the characters "Aim at the gate" and the game ball passing through the operating gate 17 (the square area through which the game ball is passing indicates the operating gate 17. , The square area above it indicates the gate 32).

In the display example shown in FIG. 58, a display example of the instruction notification when a big hit is obtained based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the normal state is shown. For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (1), the first demo is displayed because the first special symbol is not changed even in the normal state, and the jackpot change of the second decorative symbol is performed. Is being done. Then, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 58 (2), the jackpot preparation display is performed and the preparation display flag is set, and then in FIG. 58 (3). As shown, the change of the second special symbol ends at the jackpot symbol. At this time, since the preparing display flag is set, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed as shown in FIG. 58 (4), and 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operating gate 17. The second normal instruction notification 56B is performed as shown in FIG. 58 (5). At this time, the first normal instruction notification 56A and the second normal instruction notification 56B may be displayed separately in parallel, or only the second normal instruction notification 56B is displayed without displaying the first normal instruction notification 56A. You may.

At this time, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed by displaying an image including the characters "right-handed" and a right arrow, and the second normal instruction notification 56B operates with the characters "aim at the gate". By displaying an image showing a game ball passing through the gate 17 (a square area through which the game ball passes indicates an operating gate 17, and a square area above it indicates a gate 32). Will be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (6), when the change of the second special symbol is completed in the jackpot symbol without the change of the first special symbol being performed, the first reduction is performed as shown in FIG. 58 (7). When the instruction notification 56C is performed and 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operating gate 17, the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed as shown in FIG. 58 (8).

At this time, the first reduction instruction notification 56C is performed by displaying only the image showing the characters "right-handed". Further, the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed by displaying only an image showing the characters "Aim at the gate".

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is performed, the jackpot preparation is displayed and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is performed. When is not performed, the execution of the jackpot preparation display is restricted (not executed).

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, the first normal instruction notification and the second normal instruction notification are performed when the first special symbol is changed. When the first special symbol is not changed, the first reduction instruction notification and the second reduction instruction notification, which are less visible than the first normal instruction notification and the second normal instruction notification, are performed.

FIG. 59 is a timing chart when the jackpot gaming state ends and is controlled to the first KT state. The timing chart shown in FIG. 59 shows the presence / absence of control of the jackpot game state, the presence / absence of the setting of the first KT flag, the presence / absence of execution of the normal symbol fluctuation, the presence / absence of the opening of the variable winning ball device 15, and the presence / absence of the fluctuation of the second special symbol. , And whether or not the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened is shown for each timing.

For example, while the jackpot game state is controlled (before timing T0 in FIG. 59), the normal symbol has a fluctuation time of 1.0 second, the normal symbol has a fluctuation stop time of 0.2 seconds, and the normal symbol hits. In this case, 2.6 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, and 0.2 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15. At this time, the closing period of the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled to the jackpot game state is 1.0 second, which is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and 0.2 seconds, which is the symbol determination period of the normal symbol. It is 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of 2.6 seconds, which is the time before the opening of the variable winning ball device 15. While the jackpot game state is controlled, the special symbol is not changed and the opening control of the special variable winning ball device 22 is not performed.

Further, while being controlled to the first KT state (after timing T0 in FIG. 59), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, the fluctuation stop time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the normal symbol hits. In this case, 0.1 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, and 5.5 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15. At this time, the closing period of the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled to the jackpot game state is 0.2 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and 0.2 seconds, which is the symbol determination period of the normal symbol. It is 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of 0.1 seconds, which is the time before the opening of the variable winning ball device 15. In addition, the first KT state is 7.0 seconds as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol for the first time after being controlled to the first KT state, and 0.8 seconds as the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 at the time of a small hit. 1.0 second (assuming that the second reserved storage number ≥ 1) is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol after the second time after being controlled by.

At this time, rather than the closing period (3.8 seconds) of the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled to the jackpot game state, the fluctuation time (7) of the first second special symbol after being controlled to the first KT state. .0 seconds) is longer. For example, if the standby before opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is started immediately before the timing T0, it is assumed that the variable winning ball device 15 is closed for a maximum of 2.6 seconds. If the fluctuation time of the first second special symbol after being controlled to the first KT state is too short, the special variable winning ball device 22 will be controlled to the open state while the variable winning ball device 15 is closed. It is conceivable that a game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device 22 despite being in the first KT state. Therefore, the variation time of the second special symbol is lengthened so that the special variable winning ball device 22 is not controlled to be open while the variable winning ball device 15 is closed and controlled.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the game machine is capable of performing a game using a game medium (in this example, a game ball), and is a predetermined path among the flow paths through which the game medium flows down. (In this example, a specific area (in this example, the operating gate 17) provided in the game area 7 on the right side) through which the game medium can pass, and predetermined conditions (in this example, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed). After the establishment of, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560. When it is Y in step S2501 (the part where steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 are executed), it is possible to control a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) which is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state. (In this example, the part where steps S358 to S360 are executed in the game control microcomputer 560), it is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is higher than that of the normal state. Yes (in this example, the portion where steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560 are executed), and the launch of the game medium to the predetermined route is promoted based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions. The predetermined promotion notification (first instruction notification in this example) is executed, and the launch of the game medium to the specific area is promoted after a predetermined period (10 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the execution of the predetermined promotion notification. It is decided that the specific promotion notification (in this example, the second instruction notification) can be executed (in this example, the portion where steps S4404, S4405, S4604, and S4605 in the effect control microcomputer 200 are executed). As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the production.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-202287, it is possible to control a state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state, and a predetermined condition (for example, stopping and displaying a big hit symbol indicating a big hit) is satisfied. After that, a game machine that controls the advantageous state (big hit game state) when the game medium passes through the specific area is described, and the game machine appropriately notifies the opportunity to control the advantageous state. However, if a notification for prompting the launch of the game medium to a specific area is performed each time a predetermined condition is satisfied, the production may become complicated. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the production.

For example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol after the KT state ends and the normal state is entered, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the normal state is long, so that the second special symbol is displayed. It is assumed that the player leaves the seat for reasons such as a break without waiting for the fluctuation of. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to control so as not to be in the big hit game state during the break by appropriately notifying the opportunity to control the big hit game state.

Further, unlike the game machine described above, there is a game machine having a configuration in which the jackpot game state is controlled on condition that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed regardless of whether or not the game ball passes through the operating gate 17. , The player waits until the jackpot game state starts (until the jackpot is opened) after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed for the purpose of suppressing wasteful hitting of the game ball, and then launches the game ball. May be done. Similarly, in a game machine that shifts to the jackpot game state on the condition that the game ball passes through the operating gate 17, such a player also has a game ball from the time when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed until the jackpot game state is started. It may try to wait for launch, in which case the jackpot game state will not start. Therefore, by adopting the above-described configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify such a player of the opportunity to control the jackpot game state.

Further, specific examples of the predetermined promotion notification and the specific promotion notification are not limited to those described above. Specifically, the effect using an effect member other than the effect display device 9 (for example, a speaker 27, a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED) may be used as a predetermined promotion notification and a specific promotion notification. In addition, an effect using a plurality of effect members may be performed as a predetermined promotion notification and a specific promotion notification. Further, the effect members used for the predetermined promotion notification and the specific promotion notification may be different from each other. For example, the game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in the predetermined promotion notification, and the predetermined screen may be displayed on the effect display device 9 in the specific promotion notification.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to externally output an advantageous state signal (in this example, a big hit signal 1 and a big hit signal 2) that can be specified to be controlled in an advantageous state (in this example, game control). In step S2015X and the second special symbol stop process in the microcomputer 560, the same process as in step S2015X is executed), and the advantageous state signal can be output externally based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions (in this example,). The game control microcomputer 560 executes step S2015X before executing step S2501 in the first special symbol stop process and the second special symbol stop process). As a result, it is possible to notify the game clerk that the unmanned game machine without a player has become advantageous, and it is possible to promote the initialization of the game machine.

Further, although the description is omitted in this embodiment, if a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power of the game machine is turned on, it may be possible to notify that fact (in this example, the game control). When the power is turned off before the game ball passes through the operating gate 17 after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the microcomputer 560 waits for the current situation (passing the game ball to the operating gate 17). If the information related to (in this example, "8", which is the value of the special symbol process flag corresponding to the process of waiting for passage through the first gate) is backed up, and the information is backed up when the power is turned on. A predetermined command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200, and the effect control microcomputer 200 executes a first instruction notification, a second instruction notification, or an effect that can be executed only when the power is turned on when the predetermined command is received. By doing so, it may be notified that the predetermined condition is satisfied). As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state.

Further, although the description is omitted in this embodiment, the specific promotion notification may be executed in different modes depending on the situation in which the predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200 is generated). The second instruction notification may be executed in a different manner depending on the type of jackpot to be played and the game state). As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state according to the situation.

Specifically, when the fluctuation is performed using the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the jackpot, a battle production in which the ally character and the enemy character confront each other is performed as the effect during the fluctuation, and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed before the victory or defeat of the confrontation is shown. At the same time, "Aim at the gate" is displayed, and in the subsequent big hit game state, the battle production is continued as a big hit production (that is, the variable production and the big hit production are a series of battle productions). Good. At that time, if the jackpot is of an advantageous type (for example, a jackpot with a large number of rounds, a jackpot with a long opening period of the jackpot, a jackpot that shifts to a probabilistic state, a jackpot that shifts to a KT state), the battle is won. If it is a big hit of a disadvantageous type (for example, a big hit with a small number of rounds, a big hit with a short opening period of the big winning opening, a big hit that does not shift to the probability change state, a big hit that does not shift to the KT state), it will be defeated in the battle. May be good.

Further, although the description is omitted in this embodiment, the variable display of the first identification information (first special symbol in this example) and the variable display of the second identification information (second special symbol in this example) are executed. It is possible (in this example, the part that executes steps S26A and S26B in the game control microcomputer 560), and the first effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (in this example, the first decorative symbol). The display result can be derived and displayed by executing the variable display of, and the second effect identification information (in this example, the second decoration) corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (the second special symbol in this example). It is possible to derive and display the display result by executing the variable display of the symbol) (in this example, the part where steps S705A and S705B in the effect control microcomputer 200 are executed), and in the normal state, the second effect identification information. The variable display may be difficult to see, and the display result of the variable display of the second effect identification information may be easily visible (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200 has the second special symbol in the normal state. The second decorative symbol may be erased during the fluctuation of, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed). As a result, attention can be paid to the variable display of the first identification information in the normal state.

Further, in the normal state, it may be difficult to visually recognize the display result of the fluctuation of the second decorative symbol and the display related to the second reserved storage number.

It should be noted that "difficult to see" is a concept including "not visible" and "difficult to see".

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the game machine is capable of performing a game using a game medium (in this example, a game ball), and is a specific area (a specific area through which the game medium can pass). In this example, the operation gate 17), the variable display of the first identification information (first special symbol in this example) and the variable display of the second identification information (second special symbol in this example) can be executed. At the same time, while the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is being executed, the other variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information can be executed (in this example, the game control microcomputer). By executing steps S26A and S26B in the computer 560, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel), predetermined conditions (in this example, the jackpot symbol is After the stop display) is established, it is possible to control the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (in this example, the game control). A predetermined state (a portion for executing steps S305-S307 and S355-S357), which is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state (in this example, a small hit game state) in the case of Y in step S2501 in the microcomputer 560. (In this example, the part that executes steps S358 to S360 in the game control microcomputer 560), and a special state in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is increased compared to the normal state (in this example, the KT state). ) (In this example, the part that executes steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560), and based on the fact that the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the specific area is set. It is possible to execute the specific promotion notification (in this example, the second instruction notification) that promotes the launch of the game medium (in this example, the part that executes steps S4604 and S4605 in the effect control microcomputer 200), and the player When the absence condition corresponding to the absence (in this example, the first special symbol is not changed even though it is in the normal state) is not satisfied, the predetermined condition is set by the variable display of the second identification information. Based on the establishment, the specific promotion notification is executed in a predetermined mode (in this example, the second normal instruction notification is performed), and when the absence condition is satisfied, the predetermined condition is set by the variable display of the second identification information. Based on the fact that it was established The specific promotion notification is executed in a special mode having lower visibility than the normal mode (in this example, the second reduction instruction notification is performed). As a result, in consideration of the fact that the absence condition is satisfied, the specific promotion notification for promoting the launch of the game medium to the specific area can be appropriately performed.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-202287, it is possible to control a state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state, and a predetermined condition (for example, stopping and displaying a big hit symbol indicating a big hit) is satisfied. After that, a game machine that controls the game medium to an advantageous state (big hit game state) when the game medium passes through the specific area is described, but the game machine promotes the launch of the game medium to the specific area. There was a risk that the specific promotion notification could not be properly performed. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately perform the specific promotion notification for promoting the launch of the game medium to the specific area in consideration of the fact that the absence condition is satisfied.

For example, in the case of a gaming machine that performs a second normal instruction notification (notification in the entire display area of the effect display device 9) even when the absence condition is satisfied (when there is no player), the game is finally played. When the final player who has been playing the game has already finished the game, but the other player is temporarily away from the seat and plays the game of the game machine. It is conceivable that a new player may be reluctant to play a game on the game machine because he thinks that it may lead to trouble. Therefore, as in the game machine shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to eliminate the consciousness of avoidance by a new player by performing the specific promotion notification in a mode according to the situation, and promote the operation of the game machine. be able to.

In addition, there are those who try to enjoy the advantageous situation (big hit game state) generated based on the game by the player who has finished the game, and if such an act is performed, the game lacks fairness. It becomes. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, when the absence condition is satisfied (when there is no player), the visibility is lower than when the absence condition is not satisfied (when there is a player). By executing the specific promotion notification in, it is difficult to recognize that the situation is before the advantageous situation, and the fairness of the game can be ensured.

In the present embodiment, it is set as an "absence condition" that the change of the first special symbol is not executed even though it is in the normal state (to be exact, the change of the first special symbol is started in the normal state). When, it is considered that the absence condition is no longer satisfied), but it is not limited to this. For example, the player does not touch the ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 5, or any area (operation gate 17, gate 32, first start winning opening 13, second starting winning opening 14, large winning opening, etc. The "absence condition" may be that the passage of the game ball to the special winning opening 24) is not detected for a predetermined period. Further, for example, it may be set as an "absence condition" that the start winning prize does not occur within a predetermined period (for example, 2 minutes) after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the absence condition is satisfied, the absence effect indicating that the absence condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the specific promotion notification is performed in the predetermined mode (in this example, the absence effect). , 1st demo display) is feasible (in this example, the part where step S4716 is executed in the effect control microcomputer 200). As a result, the player's game can be appropriately promoted.

Although the description is omitted in this embodiment, it is controlled to a power saving state that reduces the power consumption on condition that a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed since the demonstration display was started. It may be. In the power saving state, it is consumed in each effect member by reducing the volume output from the speaker 27, reducing the brightness of the image display device 5, and reducing the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. The power is reduced.

Further, according to this embodiment, the execution of the effect is controlled based on the game control means (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game and the information transmitted from the game control means. The game control means is provided with the effect control means (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200), and the game control means is the first absence information (in this example) indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the first identification information. , 1st customer waiting demo display specification command) and 2nd absence information (in this example, 2nd customer waiting demo display specification command) indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the 2nd identification information. It is determined that transmission is possible (in this example, the portion where steps S51A and S51B in the game control microcomputer 560 are executed). As a result, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the situation.

In the present embodiment, the first customer waiting demo display designation command indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the first special symbol and the absence condition are satisfied based on the second special symbol. It was decided to provide a second customer waiting demo display designation command to indicate whether or not, but it is not limited to this, and a command to indicate whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the first special symbol, A common command may be provided as a command indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the second special symbol. For example, in the normal state, when the first special symbol is not changed in the state where the first reserved memory is not stored (regardless of whether the second special symbol is changed or the second reserved memory is present). When the common command is transmitted and the second special symbol is not changed in the KT state when the second reserved memory is not stored (whether or not the first special symbol is changed or the first reserved memory is stored). The common command may be sent (with or without).

Further, according to this embodiment, the game control means includes a game control means for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect based on the information transmitted from the game control means. Special state control information (in this example, a background specification command) indicating whether or not the device is controlled to a special state, and absence information indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied (in this example, the first customer waiting demo display). A designated command and a second customer waiting demo display designated command) can be transmitted (in this example, the part that executes steps S51A, S51B, S60A, and S60B in the game control microcomputer 560), and the effect control means is special. It is possible to execute an absence effect indicating that the absence condition is satisfied based on the state control information and the absence information (in this example, in step S4502 of the effect control microcomputer 200, a background designation command and a customer waiting demo display are displayed. The part where the customer waiting demo display can be executed based on the specified command). As a result, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the situation.

Further, according to this embodiment, information indicating whether or not to control in an advantageous state based on the variable display of the second identification information can be stored as a hold storage (in this example, the second hold storage). A means (in this example, a second hold storage buffer) is provided, and an advantageous notification effect (in this example, a big hit effect) indicating control to an advantageous state can be executed (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200). Steps S904 to S907 in steps), the variable display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold storage indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state is started during the execution of the variable display of the first identification information controlled in the advantageous state. If this is done, the advantageous notification effect corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is not executed (in this example, when the game control microcomputer 560 is Y in step S64BB, the processing after step S65B is not performed. Even when the jackpot random number is stored as the second hold memory, the fluctuation with respect to the second hold memory is forcibly removed, and the effect control microcomputer 200 does not execute the jackpot effect regarding the second identification information). .. As a result, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the situation.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the gaming machine is capable of executing the game, and the first identification information (in this example, the first special symbol) is variablely displayed and the second identification information. The variable display of (in this example, the second special symbol) can be executed, and the first identification information and the second identification information can be displayed during the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information. The other variable display can be executed (in this example, by executing steps S26A and S26B in the game control microcomputer 560, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel. The specific display result (in this example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information. It is possible to control to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player (in this example, a portion that executes steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 in the game control microcomputer 560). It is advantageous and advantageous for the player based on the fact that the predetermined display result (in this example, the small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of either the variable display of the identification information or the variable display of the second identification information. It is possible to control to a predetermined state different from the normal state (in this example, the small hit game state) (in this example, the part where steps S358 to S360 are executed in the game control microcomputer 560), and the state is controlled to a predetermined state rather than the normal state. It is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) with increased frequency (in this example, a part that executes steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560). , It is possible to execute a notification effect (in this example, a jackpot preparation display) for notifying that a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, a part in which step S5003 is executed in the effect control microcomputer 200). When the absence condition corresponding to the absence of the person is not satisfied, the notification effect can be executed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information (in this example, for effect control). The microcomputer 200 executes S5003 when it is Y in step S5000, Y in S5001, and Y in S5002), and changes the second identification information when the absence condition is satisfied in the normal state. The execution of the notification effect is restricted based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the display (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200 executes S5003 when it is Y in step S5000, Y in S5001, and N in S5002. do not do). As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify that the predetermined condition is satisfied in consideration of the fact that the absence condition is satisfied.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-20287, it is possible to control a state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state, and a predetermined condition (for example, stopping and displaying a big hit symbol indicating a big hit) is satisfied. A game machine that controls an advantageous state (big hit game state) when the game medium passes through a specific area is described, but the game machine appropriately notifies that a predetermined condition is satisfied. There was a risk that it could not be done. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately notify that the predetermined condition is satisfied in consideration of the fact that the absence condition is satisfied.

In addition, "restricting execution" means not executing as in the present embodiment or executing in a mode that is difficult to recognize (for example, executing a notification effect using an image smaller than usual or an image having a low density). It is a concept that includes performing a notification effect that outputs sound at a volume lower than usual.

Further, the specific example of the notification effect is not limited to that described above. Specifically, an effect using an effect member other than the effect display device 9 (for example, a speaker 27, a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED) may be used as a notification effect. Further, as the notification effect, an effect using a plurality of effect members may be performed.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the gaming machine is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is a gaming medium (in this example, a gaming medium). A variable starting device (in this example, a variable starting device) that can be changed into an approach advantageous state (in this example, an open state) in which a game ball can enter and an approach disadvantageous state (in this example, a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. , A variable winning ball device 15) and a predetermined variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 22) provided on the downstream side of the variable starting device and capable of changing between an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state. The variable starting device can be changed and controlled to an approach advantageous state or an approach disadvantageous state (in this example, the portion where step S5103 is executed in the game control microcomputer 560), and the first identification information (in this example, the first special symbol). ) Can be variably displayed, and the second identification information (in this example, the second special symbol) can be variably displayed based on the entry of the game medium into the variable starting device (in this example). , The part that executes steps S26A and S26B in the game control microcomputer 560), the hold storage means that can store the information related to the variable display of the second identification information as the hold storage (in this example, the second hold storage) (this example). The second holding storage buffer) is provided, and the display result of either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is a predetermined display result (in this example, a small hit symbol). Based on this, it is possible to control the predetermined variable device to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) that changes the predetermined variable device to an approach advantageous state (in this example, steps S358 to S360 in the game control microcomputer 560 are executed. Part), it is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is higher than that of the normal state (in this example, steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B in the game control microcomputer 560). , S2210B, S2213B, S2214B) As special states, a first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and a second special state (book) having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state. In the example, it can be controlled to a high probability / second KT state), and when it is controlled to the advantageous state, it is disadvantageous to enter the variable starting device for a specific period longer than when it is controlled to the first special state. It is possible to control the change to the state (in this example, step S26 in the game control microcomputer 560. By executing C, as shown in FIG. 59, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 3.8 seconds in the jackpot game state, and the variable winning ball device 15 is operated for 0.5 seconds in the first KT state. (Part controlled to the closed state), as the first variable display of the second identification information controlled to the first special state, the variable display of the first period is executed regardless of the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means. It is possible (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state, and in the first variation, the variation pattern is set using the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 13 (D) or FIG. 14 (G). By deciding, it is possible to change the second special symbol for 7.0 seconds regardless of the number of reserved memories), and it is controlled to the first special state as the variable display of the second identification information after the second time. , When the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means in the first special state is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, variable display in the second period shorter than the first period can be executed (in this example, for game control). The microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state, and in the second and subsequent fluctuations, the second reserved storage number is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 13 (E) or FIG. 14 (H). If it is 1 or more, the variation of the second special symbol can be executed for 1.0 second (the time is controlled to the first KT state and is shorter than the first variation time of 7.0 seconds). This makes it possible to improve the interest in special situations.

For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952 includes a variable starting device (attacker) capable of changing between an approach advantageous state in which a game medium can enter and an approach disadvantageous state in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. It is a gaming machine that changes a predetermined variable device to an approach advantageous state in a state, can be controlled to a special state in which the frequency of being controlled to a small hit game state is increased, and the predetermined variable device is controlled to an approach disadvantageous state. Described is a game machine in which the game medium is made easier to enter the predetermined variable device in the small hit game state by delaying the game ball flowing down on the predetermined variable device, and the degree of advantage in the special state is enhanced. However, in the game machine, the playability in a special state is monotonous, and the interest is insufficient. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the special state by configuring it as in the present embodiment.

For example, in this embodiment, when the first KT state is controlled, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, the inside of the special variable winning ball device 22 is actually reached. The special winning opening 24 is set so that it rarely wins, but in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22 has a certain amount of prize. There is a possibility that the game balls of the above are accumulated, and if the special variable winning ball device 22 is immediately controlled to the open state, a considerable number of game balls may win the special winning opening 24. .. Therefore, in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 accumulate on the bottom surface member even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 22 to the open state after a sufficient time has passed until all the game balls are dropped, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 24, which is more than expected in the first KT state. It prevents the situation where the prize ball of is obtained.

Further, as a result, when a plurality of special states (first KT state, second KT state) are provided, a game ball to a predetermined variable device (special variable winning ball device 22) in some special states (first KT state). It is possible to suppress the invasion of. Therefore, a part of the special states (first KT state) can be set as a special state having a low degree of advantage, and it is possible to realize that the degrees of advantage of the plurality of special states are different.

Further, according to this embodiment, the first variable display of the second identification information controlled by the first special state is longer than the specific period regardless of the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means. Variable display for one period can be executed (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state, and the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 13 (D) or FIG. 14 (G) is obtained in the first fluctuation. By determining the fluctuation pattern using the table, the second special symbol is used for 7.0 seconds (the closing time of the variable winning ball device 15 in the jackpot game state is longer than 3.8 seconds) regardless of the number of reserved memories. (Fluctuation is feasible), and as a variable display of the second identification information after the second time controlled by the first special state, the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means in the first special state is a predetermined number or more. In the case of, it is possible to execute the variable display of the second period shorter than the specific period (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state, and in the second and subsequent fluctuations, FIG. 13 (E). ) Or the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 14 (H), and if the second reserved memory number is 1 or more, 1.0 second (the variable winning ball device 15 is closed in the jackpot game state). It is possible to change the second special symbol over a time (less than 3.8 seconds)). This makes it possible to improve the interest in special situations.

Further, although the description is omitted in this embodiment, when the control is performed in the second special state, the second identification information is held regardless of the number of times the second identification information is variably displayed after being controlled in the second special state. The variable display of the second identification information may be executed at different fluctuation times based on the number of reserved storages stored in the storage means (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is the second KT state in the second KT state. 2 When changing the special symbol, regardless of the number of fluctuations executed after being controlled to the second KT state, if the second reserved storage number is 1 or more, the second special symbol is changed over 1 second. If the number of second reserved memories is 0, the second special symbol may be changed over 3 seconds.) This makes it possible to improve the interest in special situations.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the identification information (in this example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is variably displayed, which is an advantageous state for the player (this example). Then, it is a game machine that can be controlled to a big hit game state), and has a special area (gate 32 in this example) through which the game medium (game ball in this example) can pass, and an approach advantage in which the game medium can enter. A variable starting device (variable winning ball device 15 in this example) that can change between a state (open state in this example) and a disadvantageous state (closed state in this example) in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. A predetermined variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 22) provided on the downstream side of the variable starting device and capable of changing between an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state, and the game medium has passed through the special area. It is possible to execute the variable display of the ordinary identification information (in this example, the ordinary symbol) based on the ordinary identification information (in this example, the part where steps S5100 to S5102 are executed in the game control microcomputer 560), and the ordinary identification information is variablely displayed. Based on this, it is possible to change the variable starting device to an approach advantageous state (in this example, the part where step S5103 is executed in the game control microcomputer 560), and based on the fact that the game medium has entered the variable starting device. The variable display of the identification information can be executed (in this example, the part where step S26B is executed in the game control microcomputer 560), and the display result of the variable display of the identification information is a predetermined display result (in this example, a small hit). Based on the design), it is possible to control the predetermined variable device to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) in which the predetermined variable device is changed to an approach advantageous state (in this example, a step in the game control microcomputer 560). (Parts in which S358 to S360 are executed), and can be controlled to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is increased (in this example, steps S2208A and S2211A in the game control microcomputer 560). , S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B) As special states, the first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and the second special state having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state. (In this example, it can be controlled to high probability / second KT state), and in the first special state, the game medium that has passed through the special area when the variable display of the normal identification information is not performed becomes the variable starting device. The variable starting device is controlled so that it can enter (in this example, a game ball). The minimum required time from passing through the gate 32 to reaching the variable winning ball device 15 is 0.6 seconds, and in the first KT state, variable winning is performed 0.5 seconds after the game ball passes through the gate 32. By controlling the ball device 15 in the open state, when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the first KT state and the winning ball device 15 is controlled in the open state, the one game ball is variable as it is. It is possible to win a prize in the winning ball device 15). This makes it possible to improve the interest in special situations.

For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952 includes a variable starting device (attacker) capable of changing between an approach advantageous state in which a game medium can enter and an approach disadvantageous state in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. It is a gaming machine that changes a predetermined variable device to an approach advantageous state in a state, can be controlled to a special state in which the frequency of being controlled to a small hit game state is increased, and the predetermined variable device is controlled to an approach disadvantageous state. Described is a game machine in which the game medium is made easier to enter the predetermined variable device in the small hit game state by delaying the game ball flowing down on the predetermined variable device, and the degree of advantage in the special state is enhanced. However, in the game machine, the playability in a special state is monotonous, and the interest is insufficient. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the special state by configuring it as in the present embodiment.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, in the first KT state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 15 is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the gate 32 The variable winning ball device 15 does not open by the time the game ball that has passed through the above reaches the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special winning opening 24 can be won.) On the other hand, in this embodiment, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened after the game ball passes through the gate 32 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 15. Since it is set to start, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

Further, as a result, when a plurality of special states (first KT state, second KT state) are provided, a game ball to a predetermined variable device (special variable winning ball device 22) in some special states (first KT state). It is possible to suppress the invasion of. Therefore, a part of the special states (first KT state) can be set as a special state having a low degree of advantage, and it is possible to realize that the degrees of advantage of the plurality of special states are different.

Further, according to this embodiment, in the second special state, the variable starting device is controlled in an approach disadvantageous state for a longer period than in the first special state (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 controls the game control device. As shown in FIG. 15 (1), the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, and the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled in the second KT state as shown in FIG. 15 (2). (Controlled in a closed state for 3.8 seconds), the variable starting device is controlled so that the game medium that has passed through the special area cannot easily enter the variable starting device when the variable display of the identification information is not normally performed. (In this example, the minimum required time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when it reaches the variable winning ball device 15 is 0.6 seconds, and the time when the game ball flows down on the variable winning ball device 15. Is 0.5 seconds, and in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 3.8 seconds. Therefore, when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the second KT state, a variable winning ball is won. When the ball device 15 is controlled in the open state, it is difficult for the one game ball to win the variable winning ball device 15 as it is). As a result, it is possible to easily give a profit to the player in the second special state.

In the present embodiment, the second KT state has a longer fluctuation time of the normal symbol than the first KT state, so that the second KT state has a variable prize over a longer period than the first KT state. It was decided to control the ball device 15 to the closed state, but the variable winning ball device 15 should be controlled to the closed state in the second KT state for a longer period than in the first KT state by other controls. May be realized.

For example, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed in the second KT state for a longer period than in the first KT state by configuring the symbol determination time of the normal symbol in the second KT state longer than in the first KT state. It may be realized to control the state.

Further, for example, as shown in the present embodiment, in the second KT state than in the first KT state, the waiting time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit ( By making the configuration (the time before opening of the ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. 38) longer, it is realized that the variable winning ball device 15 can be controlled to the closed state in the second KT state for a longer period than in the first KT state. You may.

In addition, the above-mentioned fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbol, and the adjustment of a plurality of times of the waiting time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit are combined. By doing so, it may be realized that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the closed state in the second KT state for a longer period than in the first KT state.

Further, according to this embodiment, in the normal state, the variable starting device is controlled in an approach disadvantageous state for a longer period than in the first special state (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is shown in FIG. As shown in (1), in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 0.5 seconds, and in the normal state, the variable winning ball device 15 is operated for 3.8 seconds in the same manner as in the second KT state. The variable starter is controlled so that the game medium that has passed through the special area cannot easily enter the variable starter when the variable display of the identification information is not normally performed (in this example, the game is controlled). The minimum time required for the ball to reach the variable winning ball device 15 after passing through the gate 32 is 0.6 seconds, and the time for the game ball to flow down on the variable winning ball device 15 is 0.5 seconds. Since the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 3.8 seconds in the normal state, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be open when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the normal state. If so, it is difficult for the one game ball to win the variable winning ball device 15 as it is). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being launched (right-handed) aiming at the special area in the normal state.

In the present embodiment, the normal symbol has a longer fluctuation time than the first KT state, so that the normal state has a longer variable winning ball device than the first KT state. Although it was decided to control the 15 to the closed state, it was realized that the variable winning ball device 15 could be controlled to the closed state in the normal state for a longer period than in the first KT state by other controls. You may.

For example, by configuring the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbol to be longer in the normal state than in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed in the normal state for a longer period than in the first KT state. It may be realized to control.

Further, for example, as shown in the present embodiment, in the normal state than in the first KT state, the waiting time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit (FIG. By making the configuration (the time before opening the ordinary electric accessory shown in 38) longer, it is possible to control the variable winning ball device 15 to the closed state in the normal state for a longer period than in the first KT state. May be good.

In addition, the above-mentioned fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbol, and the adjustment of a plurality of times of the waiting time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit are combined. By doing so, it may be realized that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the closed state in the normal state for a longer period than in the first KT state.

In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the small hit game state cannot be controlled based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed by the small hit symbol. Based on this, the configuration may be such that the small hit game state can be controlled. In that case, when the change of the second special symbol is started while the small hit variation of the first special symbol is being performed, the second special symbol may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the change of the second special symbol is executed, it is configured to be a big hit or a small hit (it does not become a normal loss) except when it is a forced loss. The present invention is not limited to the above, and even when the second special symbol is changed, it may be a normal deviation. For example, by setting the small hit ratio to 1/2, it is possible to make a loss, and when the small hits are continuous (the second small hit fluctuation without the big hit fluctuation or the missed fluctuation after the first small hit fluctuation). (When) is not executed when the small hits are not continuous (when the next fluctuation of the small hits is a big hit or a miss), a special effect (for example, an effect to notify that the small hits are continuous) May be executed.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the approach advantageous state (in this example, the open state) in which the game medium (in this example, the game ball) can enter and the game medium cannot enter or are difficult to enter. A variable starting device (variable winning ball device 15 in this example) that can be changed to an approach disadvantageous state (closed state in this example) and an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state provided on the downstream side of the variable starting device. A predetermined variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 22) that can be changed to and is provided, and the variable starting device can be controlled by any one of a plurality of open patterns (see FIG. 15). .. Further, the variable display can be executed based on the entry of the game medium into the variable starting device, and the variable display is predetermined based on the predetermined display result (in this example, the small hit symbol). It is possible to control the variable device to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) that changes the variable device to an approach advantageous state, and it is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to the predetermined state is increased. Is. Further, as the special state, the first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and the second special state (high probability / second KT state in this example) having different degrees of advantage from the first special state. ) And can be controlled. Then, the variable starting device can be controlled by the specific opening pattern at different ratios depending on whether the control is performed in the first special state or the second special state (in this example, in the first KT state). , As shown in FIG. 15 (1), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for only 0.2 seconds. Open). Therefore, the monotonousness of the game playability in the special state can be eliminated, and the interest of the game when the game is controlled in the special state can be improved.

In this embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 is always opened for 5.5 seconds in the first KT state, and the variable winning ball device 15 is always opened for 0.2 seconds in the second KT state. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variable winning ball device 15 may be opened for 0.2 seconds with a low probability even in the first KT state, or the variable winning ball device 15 may be opened with a low probability even in the second KT state. It may be configured to be open for 5 seconds. At least in the case of the second KT state, the rate of short-opening the variable winning ball device 15 may be higher.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states (in this example, 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R normal jackpot), and a second special state. Has a higher advantage than the first special state (in this example, in the first KT state, it is rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening 24 in a small hit game, whereas in the second KT state. Then, a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24 in a small hit game). In addition, it is possible to control the second special state according to the type of advantageous state (in this example, the high probability / second KT state is shifted to after the end of the big hit game based on the 16R probability variation big hit). Therefore, by associating the type of the advantageous state with the type of the special state, it is possible to pay attention to which type of the advantageous state is obtained.

Further, it may be configured to execute different effects during the jackpot game depending on the type of jackpot. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which effect is executed during the jackpot game.

Further, according to this embodiment, at least a part of the effects is taken over during the period controlled in the advantageous state (in this example, the jackpot game state) and the period controlled in the second special state. (In this example, the sound output of the music for the second KT is started at the start of the jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot, and the sound output of the music for the second KT is continued until the end of the second KT state. ). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by giving the player a stronger impression that the player is controlled in the second special state.

In this embodiment, the case where the sound output of the music is inherited from the jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot that triggers the second KT state to the subsequent second KT state is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the moving image may be inherited and displayed, the round number display may be inherited and displayed, or the prize ball number display may be inherited and displayed.

Further, according to this embodiment, a specific variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 20) provided on the upstream side of the variable starting device and capable of changing between an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state is provided. It is possible to control the specific variable device to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) that changes the approach advantageous state. In addition, it is determined whether or not the variable starting device is controlled to the approach advantageous state (in this example, whether or not it is a hit in the normal drawing), and the variable starting device is controlled to the approach advantageous state at the same ratio regardless of the state. Whether or not it is determined (in this example, in the normal symbol process process (step S26C), whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state). Regardless of which one is the jackpot game state or not, the same probability is used to determine whether or not the game is a hit. Therefore, regarding the entry of the game medium into the specific variable device, it is possible to prevent the influence of the variable starting device that can control the approach advantageous state even during the advantageous state, so that the digestion period of the advantageous state can be shortened. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control to a special state (probability change state in this example) after controlling to an advantageous state, which is the same as the first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example). It is possible to control to the third special state (low probability / first KT state in this example) in which the open pattern is selected by the ratio and the variable starter is controlled and the variable display pattern is selected by a different ratio and the variable display is executed. Is. Then, when it is controlled to the advantageous state and then not controlled to the special state, it can be controlled to the third special state (in this example, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit is completed, the low probability / 1st KT Transition to state). Therefore, when it is controlled to the advantageous state and then not controlled to the special state, it is possible to give an opportunity to discourage the player from ending the game.

Further, according to this embodiment, the variable starting device and the predetermined variable device are provided with delay means (regulation piece 118 in this example) for delaying the flow of the game medium. Therefore, by providing the delay means, the flow speed of the game medium is delayed, the rate of entry of the game medium into the variable starting device can be further increased in the first special state, and the predetermined variable device in the second special state. The rate of entry of game media into the game can be further increased.

Further, according to this embodiment, variable display of the first identification information (first special symbol in this example) and variable display of the second identification information (second special symbol in this example) can be executed. At the same time, while the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is being executed, the other variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information can be executed (in this example, the first special symbol). The variable display of and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to determine whether or not to control to a predetermined state (in this example, the small hit game state), and it is also possible to determine the variable display time (variable time in this example), and the second identification information is variable. When the display is executed, it can be determined that the predetermined state is controlled at a higher rate than the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed (in this example, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is possible to decide to make a small hit only in some cases). Then, when the control is performed in the special state, a shorter time can be determined as the variable display time of the variable display of the second identification information as compared with the case where the control is performed in the non-special state (in this example). As shown in FIGS. 13 (C), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 15 minutes or 5 minutes in the non-KT state, whereas as shown in FIGS. 13 (D) to 14 (I). , In the KT state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 1.5 seconds to 2 minutes and 20 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game in the game machine controlled to the special state.

In this embodiment, the case where the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may not be executed at the same time. In this case, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in the order of winning the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. The variable display of any of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) may be configured to be preferentially executed. In addition, when the variation display of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the second special symbol may be out of order. , It is desirable not to be too gambling than necessary.

Further, according to this embodiment, a predetermined area (in this example, the operating gate 17) through which the game medium (in this example, the game ball) can pass is provided, and the player is in an advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state). It is controllable. Then, after the specific display result (in this example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the advantageous state based on the passage of the game medium through the predetermined area. Therefore, when the player takes a break from the game after the end of the special state, it is possible to limit the control to the advantageous state from progressing during the break of the player. In particular, in this embodiment, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is as long as 15 minutes or 5 minutes in the non-KT state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed immediately after the low probability / first KT state is completed. If the player has entered a break due to the long-term variable display, even if the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit, the big hit game will proceed during the break. It can be limited and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the interests of the player are impaired.

In this embodiment, the case where the operating gate 17 is provided separately from the gate 32 is shown, but the gate 32 and the operating gate 17 may be configured as a common gate.

Further, it is not always necessary to provide the operation gate 17, and when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the game may be configured to shift to the big hit game as it is after the symbol confirmation display time elapses.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to externally output an advantageous state signal (in this example, a big hit signal 1 and a big hit signal 2) that can be specified to be controlled in an advantageous state. Further, when the specific display result (in this example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the variable display display result, the advantageous state signal can be output externally. Therefore, it is possible to notify the game clerk that the unmanned game machine without a player has become advantageous, and it is possible to promote the initialization of the game machine.

The external output of the advantageous state signal (in this example, the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2) is not always indispensable, and the advantageous state signal may be configured not to be output externally.

Further, according to this embodiment, based on the fact that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (big hit symbol in this example), the game medium is set in the first area (big winning opening in this example). It is possible to control the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state) in which the (game ball in this example) can enter, and the display result of the variable display becomes the predetermined display result (in this example, the small hit symbol). Based on this, it is possible to control a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) in which the game medium can enter the second region (in this example, the special winning opening 24). It is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is increased, and as the special state, the first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and the first It is possible to control to a second special state (high probability / second KT state in this example), which has a higher advantage than the first special state. Then, a special signal (in this example, a special winning opening winning signal) can be externally output in response to the entry of the game medium into the second region. Therefore, the entry status of the game medium into the second region can be notified to the outside, and the game machine can be appropriately managed outside the game machine.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 32, when the jackpot signal 1 is not output, the prize ball rate (the number of prize balls obtained per 100 shots of game balls, BA) is BA> 100. There is a possibility that an act of illegally obtaining a prize ball was performed even though the jackpot game was not in progress, and the hall management computer can determine that it is abnormal. However, even in such a case, if the big hit signal 2 is output and the special winning opening winning signal is output, a prize ball may be obtained in the small hit game in the KT state. , BA> 100 is not determined to be abnormal, and appropriate management from outside the game machine can be performed.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to externally output a special signal common to the case where the first special state is controlled and the case where the second special state is controlled (in this example, FIG. 32). As shown in the above, a common special winning opening winning signal is output externally regardless of whether it is in the first KT state or the second KT state). Therefore, it is possible to simplify the external output processing on the game machine side.

As a modification shown in FIG. 33, as special signals, a first special signal (in this example, the special winning opening winning signal 1) and a second special signal different from the first special signal (in this example). , Special winning opening winning signal 2) can be output externally, the first special signal can be output externally when controlled to the first special state, and the second special signal can be output when controlled to the second special state. 2 The special signal can be output externally (as shown in FIG. 33, the special winning opening winning signal 1 is output externally during the first KT state, and the special winning opening winning signal 2 is output externally during the second KT state). It may be configured as. With such a configuration, the state of the game machine can be appropriately managed outside the game machine.

For example, in the modified example shown in FIG. 33, when the big hit signal 1 is not output and the big hit signal 2 is output, if the special winning opening winning signal 1 is output, the prize ball rate in the first KT state. It may be calculated as (BA1), and if the special winning opening winning signal 2 is output, it may be calculated as the winning ball rate (BA2) in the second KT state. Then, in the second KT state, a corresponding prize ball may be obtained in the small hit game. Therefore, even if BA2> 100, it is not judged as abnormal, and the prize ball is likely to be a small hit in the first KT state. Is rarely obtained. Therefore, if BA1> 100, it may be determined as abnormal. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform appropriate management from the outside of the game machine.

Further, for example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, although the jackpot signal 2 is not output (that is, even though it is not in the KT state), the special winning opening winning signal (special winning opening winning signal 1). And the special winning opening winning signal 2) may be output as well, and the game clerk may be notified of the abnormality. Further, even when the output frequency of the special winning opening winning signal is abnormally high, it may be determined to be abnormal and notified to a game clerk or the like.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, since the number of terminals provided on the external output terminal slope is limited (10 terminals in this example), the special winning opening 24 is awarded. It is configured so that only the special winning opening winning signal indicating that it has been detected can be output, and the external output signal is not particularly output when a winning is detected in the large winning opening. Even with such a configuration, the abnormal state of the game machine 1 can be detected to some extent by notifying an external device such as a hall management computer of the winning status of the special winning opening 24.

The external output of the special signal (in this example, the special winning opening winning signal) is not always indispensable, and the special signal may be configured not to be output externally.

Further, according to this embodiment, the variable display display result is different from the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state) based on the predetermined display result (in this example, the small hit symbol). It is possible to control to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state), and to control to a special state (in this example, a KT state) in which the frequency of being controlled to the predetermined state is increased. It is provided with a specific area (special winning opening 24 in this example) into which a game medium (game ball in this example) can enter in a special state, and as a special state, a first special state (high probability / first in this example). It is possible to control a 1KT state) and a second special state (high probability / second KT state in this example), which has a higher advantage than the first special state. In addition, it is possible to execute an entry effect (in this example, display of prize ball addition display, output of prize sound, lighting display of special prize opening lamp 24a) based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area in the second special state. Therefore, when the game medium enters the specific area in the first special state, the entry effect is not executed (in this example, even if the game ball wins in the special winning opening 24 when it is not in the second KT state, the prize ball The addition display, the output of the winning sound, and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a are not executed). Therefore, by preventing the entry effect from being executed depending on the entry of the irregular game medium in the first special state (in this example, the special winning opening 24 is rarely won in the first KT state), the game state is set. In addition to being able to achieve consistency in the production of the above, it is possible to emphasize the entry of the game medium into the specific area in the second special state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect when controlling to a special state.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit gaming state), and the advantageous states are the first advantageous state (in this example, the 6R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation jackpot) and the first. It can be controlled to 2 advantageous states (in this example, 16R probability variation jackpot). Further, it is possible to control to the first special state after being controlled to the first advantageous state, and to control to the second special state after being controlled to the second advantageous state (in this example, 6R probability variation jackpot or 2R). After the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot ends, it shifts to the high probability / 1st KT state, and after the jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot ends, it shifts to the high probability / second KT state), from the period controlled to the second advantageous state. 2 It is possible to execute a special effect (in this example, the sound output of the music for the second KT) during the period controlled by the special state. Therefore, the effect of the effect in the second special state can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to this embodiment, as the approach effect, an addition effect corresponding to the addition of the game value (in this example, the display of the prize ball addition display) and an effect by sound output corresponding to the entry of the game medium. (In this example, the output of the winning sound) and the effect of the light emitted from the light emitting body (in this example, the lighting display of the special winning port lamp 24a) are executed. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the entry of the game medium into the specific area in the second special state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, execution of the entry effect (in this example, the display of the prize ball addition display, the output of the winning sound, the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a), and the special effect (in this example, the sound output of the music for the second KT). Is not always required, and may be configured so as not to perform one or both of these effects.

In this embodiment, on the effect control microcomputer 200 side, the variation display of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second variation display corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol The case where the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the background symbol are executed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variable display of the small symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the small symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be feasible. May be good. In this case, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be configured to be displayed in the display screen of the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device), or may be configured by a lamp or LED other than the effect display device 9. May be good.

[Modification Example] A modification of the above-described embodiment will be described below. In this modification, an example of a display screen (screen layout) displayed on the effect display device 9 mainly in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and the KT state (particularly low probability / first KT state), and An example of display control of the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage when shifting from the low probability / first KT state to the normal state will be described. In the following, the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage may be referred to as the first hold display, and the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage may be referred to as the second hold display.

The details will be clarified by the following description, but in this modified example, unlike the above-described embodiment, the effect display device 9 has a background symbol (first background shown in FIG. 63) according to the variable display of the special symbol. The symbol display unit 91a and the background symbol displayed on the second background symbol display unit 92a are displayed in a variable manner, and the small symbols smaller than the background symbol (first small symbol display unit 91b and second small symbol display shown in FIG. 63) are displayed in a variable manner. The small symbol displayed in the unit 92b) is displayed in a variable manner, and the first hold display (first hold display in the first hold display unit 61 shown in FIG. 63) or the second hold display (FIG. 6) is displayed according to the game state. The second hold display in the second hold display unit 62 shown in 63) is displayed (that is, the first and second hold displays are not displayed in total as in the above embodiment), depending on the gaming state. , The first specific display (first specific display in the first specific display unit 61a shown in FIG. 63) or the second specific display (second specific display in the second specific display unit 62a shown in FIG. 63) is displayed, and the first The hold number display (first hold storage number display 71 shown in FIG. 63) corresponding to the hold storage number is displayed. Further, in this modification, a part different from the above-described embodiment will be mainly described, and the other parts will be described as having the same configuration and processing as the above-described embodiment unless otherwise specified. Omit.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the hold storage display control process (step S707) in the modified example. In this hold storage display control process, display control of the first hold display, the second hold display, and the hold number display corresponding to the first hold storage number displayed on the effect display device 9 is performed.

In the hold storage display control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first effective start winning command has been received (step S7071). Whether or not the first effective start winning command has been received depends on whether or not a flag corresponding to the type of the received command (effect control command) is set in the process of step S670 shown in FIG. 45, for example. It is recognizable.

When the effect control CPU 201 receives the first effective start winning command (Y in step S7071), the effect control CPU 201 updates the hold number display corresponding to the first hold storage number (step S7072). Specifically, when the effect control CPU 201 receives the first effective start winning command, the first reserved storage number is added by 1, and when the first variation pattern command is received, the first reserved storage number is subtracted by 1. 1 Hold storage number is stored in, for example, the first hold number storage buffer. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 201 receives the first effective start winning command, it updates and displays the hold number display (first hold storage number display 71) indicating the first hold storage number added by 1. The effect control CPU 201 has a hold number indicating the first hold storage number subtracted by 1 when the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the first hold storage is started (when the first change pattern command is received). The display (first hold storage number display 71) is updated and displayed.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the non-KT state (step S7073), and if it is not in the non-KT state (N in step S7073), it ends the process and is in the non-KT state. In (Y in step S7073), the hold notice determination process is executed (S7074). Whether or not it is in the non-KT state (or KT state) can be recognized by, for example, the type of background image currently displayed by the processing of steps S631, S634, S638, and S642 shown in FIG. 44.

In the hold notice determination process of step S7074, the display mode of the first hold display is any of a plurality of special modes (for example, “blue”, “green”, “red”) different from the normal mode (for example, “white”). Decide whether to give a hold notice to change to, and if so, what special mode and how to change (that is, the content of the change). Specifically, when the effect control CPU 201 receives the first effective start winning command from the game control microcomputer 560, it also receives the first winning determination result command. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 560 has a big hit determination random number (random 1) and a big hit, which are extracted based on a valid start winning prize and stored in the first hold storage buffer in the first start port switch passing process. Based on the type judgment random number (random 2) and the fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 5), it is judged whether or not it is a big hit and the fluctuation pattern is judged, and as a command indicating this judgment result, the judgment result at the time of the first prize is won. Send a command. Therefore, the effect control CPU 201 determines the hold notice based on the first winning determination result command received together with the first valid start winning command. For example, the effect control CPU 201 has a special mode (for example, “red”) that suggests that the jackpot expectation is high at a high rate when the fluctuation pattern indicated by the first winning determination result command is the jackpot fluctuation pattern. Decide to change to. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 201 determines that when the fluctuation pattern indicated by the first winning determination result command is an out-of-order fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern is not changed to the special mode (leaves the normal mode) at a high rate. .. Not limited to this, for example, in the effect control CPU 201, the fluctuation pattern indicated by the first winning determination result command has a high expectation of a big hit (that is, it is easy to be selected at the time of a big hit, and it is selected at the time of a loss. When it is a variation pattern that is difficult to be performed), it is decided to change it to a special mode (for example, “red”) that suggests that the jackpot expectation is high at a high rate, and the variation pattern indicated by the first winning judgment result command. However, when the jackpot expectation is low (that is, a fluctuation pattern that is difficult to be selected at the time of jackpot and easy to be selected at the time of loss), a high percentage is used to determine the normal mode that does not suggest the jackpot expectation. May be good. Further, instead of changing the display mode of the first hold display to a special mode at the time of starting prize (that is, when receiving the first valid start winning command), another timing (for example, the first hold display is shifted and displayed). It may be decided to change the command at a certain timing or a predetermined timing during the variable display of the special symbol. Further, in the hold notice determination process, the first specific display (first specific), which will be described later, is displayed when the first hold display is deleted and the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first hold display is started. The display mode of the first specific display) on the display unit 61a may be determined in advance.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 increases the first hold display in the first hold display unit 61 by 1 in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S7074 (step S7075).

On the other hand, when the first effective start winning command has not been received (N in step S7071), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second effective start winning command has been received (step S7076). When the effect control CPU 201 receives the second effective start winning command (Y in step S7076), it determines whether or not it is in the KT state (step S7077), and receives the second effective start winning command. If not (N in step S7076), the process proceeds to step S7083.

If the effect control CPU 201 is not in the KT state (N in step S7077), the process is completed, and if it is in the KT state (Y in step S7077), is the remaining 9 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time? Whether or not it is determined (step S7078). Here, the chance time is a low probability / first KT that is controlled until the special symbol is changed 100 times (that is, up to 100 rotations after the big hit game) after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. It refers to the state. The remaining number of fluctuations until the end of the chance time is, for example, the fluctuation after the effect control CPU 201 receives the low accuracy / first KT background designation command for the first time by the process of step S633 shown in FIG. 44 after the jackpot game ends. It can be recognized by storing the number of times and subtracting it from the specified number of times (100 times) of the chance time.

If the remaining 9 fluctuations or less (N in step S7078) until the end of the chance time, the effect control CPU 201 executes the hold notice determination process (step S7079). The hold notice determination process in step S7079 is the same as the hold notice decision process described in the process of step S7074, and can be explained by replacing "first" in the hold notice decision process in step S7074 with "second". .. After that, the effect control CPU 201 increases the second hold display in the second hold display unit 62 by 1 in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S7079 (step S7080).

When the remaining 9 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (Y in step S7088), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (step S7081). When the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (Y in step S7081), the effect control CPU 201 ends the process. At this time, if there is a second hold display that has already been displayed, the effect control CPU 201 may control all the second hold displays to be hidden. If the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (that is, the remaining 9 fluctuations to 6 fluctuations; N in step S7081), the effect control CPU 201 normally performs the second hold on the second hold display unit 62. The display is incremented by 1 (step S7082).

When neither the first effective start winning command nor the second starting winning command is received, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not a predetermined state change has occurred (step S7083). Specifically, the effect control CPU 201 changes from the jackpot game state to the KT state as a predetermined state change based on the background designation command and the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560. It is determined whether or not there has been a change from the KT state to the non-KT state. When there is no predetermined state change (N in step S7083), the effect control CPU 201 ends the process, and when there is a predetermined state change (Y in step S7083), the effect control CPU 201 ends the process. The displayed first hold display or second hold display is hidden (step S7084). Specifically, when the game state changes from the jackpot game state to the KT state, the effect control CPU 201 hides the first hold display, and the game state changes from the KT state (to be exact, the first KT state) to the non-KT state. When the state changes, the second hold display is hidden. If the effect control CPU 201 has a second hold memory when the game state changes from the jackpot game state to the KT state, the effect control CPU 201 displays the second hold display corresponding to the second hold memory. , If the game state has the first hold memory when the game state changes from the KT state (to be exact, the first KT state) to the non-KT state, the first hold display corresponding to the first hold memory is displayed. To do.

Here, characteristic points in the above-described hold storage display control process will be described below.

When the first valid start winning command is received (Y in step S7071), the hold number display update (step S7072) is executed, whereas when the second valid start winning command is received (step S7076). In Y), the hold number display update is not executed. From this, it can be seen that the hold number corresponding to the first hold storage number is updated and displayed, while the hold number corresponding to the second hold storage number is not displayed. Further, the number of holds corresponding to the number of first hold storage is updated and displayed regardless of the gaming state (whether it is in the KT state or the non-KT state), whereas the number of hold corresponding to the second number of hold storage is displayed. It can also be seen that is not displayed regardless of the game status.

Further, when the first valid start winning command is received (Y in step S7071), the first hold display is not increased (N in step S7073) unless it is in the non-KT state (the process in step S7075 is not executed). ), When the second valid start winning command is received (Y in step S7076), the second hold display is not increased unless it is in the KT state (N in step S7077) (the processing in steps S7080 and S7082 is not executed). .. Further, when the state shifts to the KT state after the big hit, the first hold display is hidden, and when the state shifts from the KT state to the non-KT state, the second hold display is hidden (steps S7083 and S7084). From this, the first hold display is not displayed in the KT state and is displayed in the non-KT state (normal state), and the second hold display is not displayed in the non-KT state and is displayed in the KT state. You can see that.

Further, when the second valid start winning command is received (Y in step S7076), the hold notice is not executed if the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 times or less (S7079 is not executed by Y in step S7078). .. Further, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, the second hold display is not increased (S7082 is not executed by Y in step S7081). From this, in the second hold display, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time reaches 9 to 6 times, the execution of the hold notice is restricted (displayed in the normal mode), and the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5. It can be seen that when the number of times is less than that, the execution of the hold notice is restricted and the addition of the second hold display is restricted (hidden) even in the KT state. As described above, regarding the second hold display, different display controls are performed according to the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time even in the same gaming state, and the reason for this will be described later with reference to FIG. 64.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the background symbol change start processing (step S901) in the modified example. In this background symbol variation start process, the same reference reference numerals are given to the same processes as those described with reference to FIG. 51, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 201 executes the specific display control process (step S920A). Here, the specific display control process will be described with reference to FIG. 62.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a specific display control process (step S920A) in the modified example. In this specific display control process, the first specific display (first specific display in the first specific display unit 61a shown in FIG. 63) and the second specific display (second specific display shown in FIG. 63) displayed on the effect display device 9 are displayed. The second specific display in the unit 62a) and the display control of the shielding effect are performed. Here, the first specific display is different from the first hold display unit 61 from the start to the end of the variation display in response to the variation display during the variation display of the first special symbol. 1 It is a display displayed on the specific display unit 61a to specify the execution of the variable display. Further, the second specific display is different from the second hold display unit 62 from the start to the end of the variation display corresponding to the variation display during the variation display of the second special symbol. It is displayed on the specific display unit 62a and is a display for specifying the execution of the variable display. Further, the first specific display (or the second specific display) has the same shape and size as the first hold display (or the second hold display) displayed on the first hold display unit 61 (or the second hold display unit 62). It is displayed by. However, the first specific display and the first hold display (or the second specific display and the second hold display) may have different shapes or different sizes, and are displayed in completely different modes. You may. For example, it is desirable that the first specific display and the first hold display (or the second specific display and the second hold display) are displayed in a manner in which a part of the shape and color is similar. Further, the shielding effect refers to an effect of shielding the second hold display and the second specific display from being difficult to see.

In the specific display control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the received variation pattern command is the first variation pattern (that is, the variation pattern command for the first special symbol) (step S9301). In the case of the first fluctuation pattern (Y in step S9301), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the non-KT state (step S9302), and when it is not in the non-KT state (N in step S9302). In the case of the non-KT state (Y in step S9302), the specific notice determination process is executed (S9303). Whether or not it is in the non-KT state (or KT state) can be recognized by, for example, the type of background image currently displayed by the processing of steps S631, S634, S638, and S642 shown in FIG. 44.

In the specific notice determination process of step S9303, the display mode of the first specific display is any of a plurality of special modes (for example, "blue", "green", "red") different from the normal mode (for example, "white"). It is decided whether to give a specific notice to change the color, and if so, how to change it to which special mode (that is, the content of the change). Specifically, the effect control CPU 201 determines the specific advance notice based on the received first fluctuation pattern command. For example, the effect control CPU 201 determines that when the first fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern, it is changed to a special mode (for example, "red") suggesting that the jackpot expectation is high at a high rate. .. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 201 determines that when the first fluctuation pattern is an out-of-order fluctuation pattern, the first fluctuation pattern is not changed to a special mode (leaves the normal mode) at a high rate. Not limited to this, for example, in the effect control CPU 201, the first fluctuation pattern has a high expectation of a big hit (that is, a fluctuation pattern that is easy to be selected at the time of a big hit and difficult to be selected at the time of a miss). Occasionally, at a high rate, it is decided to change to a special mode (eg, "red") that suggests a high jackpot expectation, and the first variation pattern is one with a low jackpot expectation (ie, a jackpot). When it is a fluctuation pattern that is difficult to be selected and is easy to be selected at the time of deviation), it may be determined in a normal mode that does not suggest a jackpot expectation at a high rate. Further, instead of changing the display mode of the first specific display to a special mode at the start of fluctuation (that is, when the first fluctuation pattern command is received), another timing (for example, a predetermined timing during the fluctuation display of the special symbol) is performed. ) May be decided to change. Further, in the above-mentioned hold notice determination process (step S7074), if the display mode of the first specific display is determined in advance at the time of starting winning (that is, based on the look-ahead), the first specific display is determined based on the look-ahead. 1 The display mode of the first specific display in the specific notice determination process may be determined based on the display mode of the specific display. Specifically, for example, when the display mode of the first specific display is determined to be "green" based on pre-reading, a special mode suggesting that the jackpot expectation is higher than that of "green" (for example,). While it is possible to determine (“red”), it is prohibited to determine in a mode that suggests that the jackpot expectation is lower than “green” (for example, “green”) (that is, it is prohibited to lower the jackpot expectation. It may be). Further, for example, when the display mode of the first specific display is determined based on the look-ahead, the first specific display mode is displayed in the display mode determined based on the look-ahead, and in the specific notice determination process. The display mode may not be determined.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 sets the display of the first specific display in the first specific display unit 61a in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S9303 (step S9304).

On the other hand, when it is not the first fluctuation pattern (that is, when it is the fluctuation pattern command for the second special symbol; N in step S9301), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the KT state (that is, whether or not it is in the KT state). In step S9305), if it is not in the KT state (N in step S9305), the process is completed, and if it is in the KT state (Y in step S7077), whether or not there are 9 fluctuations or less remaining until the end of the chance time. Is determined (step S9306).

When the remaining 9 fluctuations or less (N in step S9306) are not reached until the end of the chance time, the effect control CPU 201 executes the specific advance notice determination process (step S9307). The specific notice determination process in step S9307 is the same as the specific notice determination process described in the process in step S9303, and can be explained by replacing "first" in the specific notice determination process in step S9303 with "second". .. After that, the effect control CPU 201 sets the display of the second specific display in the second specific display unit 62a in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S9307 (step S9308).

When the remaining 9 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (Y in step S9306), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (step S9309). When the remaining 5 fluctuations or less (that is, the remaining 9 fluctuations to 6 fluctuations; N in step S9309) until the end of the chance time, the effect control CPU 201 is in the normal mode the second specific display unit 62a. The display of the display is set (step S9310).

When the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (Y in step S9309), the effect control CPU 201 sets the display of the shielding effect (step S9311). Here, the shielding effect is an effect that makes visibility of the second hold display and the second specific display difficult, and for example, the transparency of the screen displayed on the layer in front of the second hold display and the second specific display. Is a blackout effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the second hold display and the second specific display by gradually lowering the number of times remaining until the end of the chance time. The background symbol on the second background symbol display unit 92a, the small symbol on the second small symbol display unit 92b, and the first reserved storage number display 71 are displayed in a layer in front of the blackout effect. Even if the blackout effect is executed, it should be visible.

Although not described in the specific display control process described above, during the chance time, the display setting of the remaining number display 81 (see FIG. 63) indicating the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is performed. Specifically, when the jackpot game is controlled to the low probability / first KT state (that is, the chance time is entered), the initial number of times (low probability / first KT state) is controlled as the number of times indicated by the remaining number display 81. The remaining number display 81 is controlled to the low probability / first KT state by displaying and setting the number of times that the special symbol is deducted by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is started. Indicates the number of remaining times (of chance time).

Here, characteristic points in the above-mentioned specific display control process will be described below.

When the first fluctuation pattern is received (Y in step S9301), the display of the first specific display is not set (N in step S9302) unless it is in the non-KT state (the process in step S9304 is not executed). When the second variation pattern is received (N in step S9301), the display of the second specific display is not set unless it is in the KT state (N in step S9305) (the processes in steps S9308 and S9310 are not executed). From this, the first specific display is not displayed in the KT state and is displayed in the non-KT state (normal state), and the second specific display is not displayed in the non-KT state and is displayed in the KT state. You can see that.

Further, when the second fluctuation pattern is received (N in step S9301), the specific notice is not executed if the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 times or less (S9307 is not executed by Y in step S9306). Further, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, the second specific display is not set to be displayed (S9310 is not executed by Y in step S9309). From this, in the second specific display, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time reaches 9 to 6 times, the execution of the specific notice is restricted (displayed in the normal mode), and the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5. It can be seen that when the number of times or less is reduced, the execution of the specific notice is restricted and the display of the second specific display is restricted (hidden) even in the KT state. As described above, regarding the second specific display, different display controls are performed according to the remaining number of chance times even in the same gaming state, and the reason for this will be described later with reference to FIG. 64.

The description returns to FIG. 61, and in the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the received variation pattern command is the first variation pattern (step S920B). In the case of the first fluctuation pattern (Y in step S920B), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the non-KT state (step S920C), and when it is not in the non-KT state (N in step S920C). Is set as the first non-display effect as the background symbol variation pattern (step S920F). On the other hand, in the non-KT state (Y in step S920C), the effect control CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the background symbol and the small symbol (step S920D), and one of the first variable effects as the background symbol pattern. Is set (step S920E). Here, the background symbol variation pattern is set according to the variation pattern, and the variation mode of the background symbol or the small symbol (for example, the reach symbol is temporarily stopped during the fluctuation, or the pseudo-ream symbol suggesting the pseudo-ream is temporarily stopped. It is an effect pattern that defines (variable modes such as letting). The first variation effect is set according to the first variation pattern, and is a plurality of effect patterns corresponding to the variation mode of the background symbol in the first background symbol display unit 91a and the small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b. The first non-display effect is set according to the first variable pattern, and is an effect pattern in which the background symbol in the first background symbol display unit 91a and the small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b are not variablely displayed (hidden). is there.

On the other hand, when it is not the first fluctuation pattern (that is, when it is the fluctuation pattern command for the second special symbol; N in step S920B), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the KT state ( In step S920G), if it is not in the KT state (N in step S920G), the second non-display effect is set as the background symbol variation pattern (step S920J). On the other hand, in the KT state (Y in step S920G), the effect control CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the background symbol and the small symbol (step S920H), and uses one of the second variable effects as the background symbol pattern. Set (step S920I). Here, the second variation effect is set according to the second variation pattern, and a plurality of effect patterns corresponding to the variation mode of the background symbol in the second background symbol display unit 92a and the small symbol in the second small symbol display unit 92b. The second non-display effect is set according to the second variation pattern, and the background symbol in the second background symbol display unit 92a and the small symbol in the second small symbol display unit 92b are not variablely displayed (non-display). It is a production pattern.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 uses the set background symbol variation pattern (see steps S920E, S920F, S920I, 920J), the set specific display (see steps S9304, S9308, S9310), and the set shielding effect (see steps S9304, S9308, S9310). Select the process table according to (see step S9311) and the like (step S920K). As a result, in the subsequent processing, various effects of the set contents are output from the effect device (effect display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) along with the variable display of the special symbol.

Here, characteristic points in the background symbol change start processing described above will be described below.

When the first variation pattern is received (Y in step S920B), the first non-display effect is set as the background symbol variation pattern unless it is in the non-KT state (N in step S920C), so that the first background symbol is set. The background symbol is not displayed on the display unit 91a, and the small symbol is not displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b (step S920F). On the other hand, when the second variation pattern is received (N in step S920B), the second background is set as the background symbol variation pattern unless it is in the KT state (N in step S920G). The background symbol is not displayed on the symbol display unit 92a, and the small symbol is not displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b (step S920F). From this, in the non-KT state (normal state), when the first special symbol is variablely displayed, the background symbol and the small symbol are variablely displayed according to the variable display, but the second special symbol is variablely displayed. It can be seen that the background symbol and the small symbol are not displayed according to the variable display even if it is performed. Further, in the KT state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, the background symbol and the small symbol are variablely displayed according to the variation display, but even if the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, the variation is displayed. It can be seen that the background symbol and the small symbol are not displayed depending on the display.

Further, the background symbol and the small symbol are not variablely displayed corresponding to the variable display of different special symbols (for example, the background symbol corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the small symbol is the first. 2 It is not a separate variable display corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol). For this reason, the background symbol and the small symbol are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with each other, so that a natural effect is realized, and the target of the variable display of the small symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) depends on the game state. It turns out that it is specified.

[Screen Layout] Next, the screen layout (display screen) in the effect display device 9 displayed by the processes shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 60 to 62 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 (1) shows an example of the screen layout in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), and FIG. 63 (2) shows an example of the screen layout in the chance time (low probability / first KT state).

As shown in FIG. 63 (1), in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) has the first hold display unit 61 at the lower left of the display screen. The hold display is displayed. Specifically, in the first hold display unit 61, a number of first hold displays corresponding to the maximum number of first hold storages (4 in this case) are arranged on the left and right. Further, the first specific display is displayed on the first specific display unit 61a provided adjacent to the right side of the first hold display unit 61 at the lower center of the display screen. Then, when the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first hold storage is started, the hold display corresponding to the started variation display among the first hold displays displayed on the first hold display unit 61 (1). The rightmost hold display) is erased and shifted (moved) to the first specific display unit 61a to be displayed as the first specific display, and the remaining first hold display is shifted to the right one by one (hold display). Will be moved). The first hold display unit 61 and the first specific display unit 61a may be arranged at any position on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the first hold display and the first specific display may be shifted. Instead, the display may be erased once and then redisplayed at another position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (1), in the normal state, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) displays the number of holds corresponding to the first number of holds stored in the left center portion of the display screen. 1 Hold storage number display 71 is displayed. In addition, as the mode of the first reserved storage number display, the number itself indicating the first reserved storage number may be used, or the display lamp of the number corresponding to the first reserved storage number is lit and displayed. May be good.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (1), in the normal state, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) has a variation of the first special symbol in the first background symbol display unit 91a in the central portion of the display screen. The background symbol corresponding to the display is variablely displayed, and the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is variablely displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b at the upper right of the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 63 (2), in the chance time (low probability / first KT state), the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) has a second hold display unit 62 at the lower left of the display screen. The hold display is displayed. Specifically, in the second hold display unit 62, a number of second hold displays corresponding to the maximum number of second hold storages (4 in this case) are arranged on the left and right. Further, the second specific display is displayed on the second specific display unit 62a provided at the lower center of the display screen and adjacent to the right side of the second hold display unit 62. Then, when the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold storage is started, the hold display corresponding to the start variation display among the second hold displays displayed on the second hold display unit 62 (1). The rightmost hold display) is erased and shifted (moved) to the second specific display unit 62a to be displayed as the second specific display, and the remaining second hold display is shifted to the right one by one (hold display). Will be moved). The second hold display unit 62 and the second specific display unit 62a may be arranged at any position on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the second hold display and the second specific display may be shifted. Instead, the display may be erased once and then redisplayed at another position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), even in the chance time, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) displays the number of holds corresponding to the first number of holds stored in the left center portion of the display screen. 1 Hold storage number display 71 is displayed. On the other hand, the hold number display corresponding to the second hold storage number is not displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), during the chance time, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) changes the second special symbol in the second background symbol display unit 92a in the center of the display screen. The background symbol corresponding to the display is variablely displayed, and the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is variablely displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b at the upper right of the display screen.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), in the chance time, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) displays the remaining number display 81 indicating the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time in the lower right corner of the display screen. Is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen to indicate that the chance time is currently in progress (for example, a character display such as "during chance time") is displayed, and in the upper part of the display screen, during chance time (in KT state). A right-handed display is performed to instruct the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed) aimed at the right side of the game area 7.

Here, although not shown, the screen layout in the high probability / first KT state and the high probability / second KT state will be briefly described. In the high probability / first KT state, the same screen layout as in the low probability / first KT state shown in FIG. 63 (2) is displayed, but the remaining number display 81 is not displayed and in the upper left corner of the display screen. The difference is that a display indicating that the state is in the high probability / first KT state (for example, a character display such as “during normal rush”) is performed. In the high probability / second KT state, the same screen layout as in the low probability / first KT state shown in FIG. 63 (2) is displayed, but the remaining number display 81 is not displayed and in the upper left corner of the display screen. The difference is that a display indicating that the state is in the high probability / second KT state (for example, a character display such as “during special rush”) is performed.

As described above, in the normal state, the effect display device 9 can display the first hold display and the first specific display, and the background symbol corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol. And small symbols are displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, in the normal state, the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed on the effect display device 9, and even if the second special symbol is variablely displayed, the background corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. No symbols or small symbols are displayed. Further, during the chance time (or KT state), the effect display device 9 can display the second hold display and the second specific display, and corresponds to the variable display of the second special symbol. The background symbol and the small symbol are displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, during the chance time (or KT state), the first hold display and the first specific display are not displayed on the effect display device 9, and even if the first special symbol is variablely displayed, the first special symbol is displayed. Background symbols and small symbols corresponding to the variable display are not displayed. As described above, in the normal state, the background symbol and the small symbol corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol are not displayed in variation, and the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed. Therefore, the variation time in the normal state. Even if the variation display of the second special symbol is performed for a very long time (for example, 5 minutes or 15 minutes), the degree of recognition of the player for the variation display of the second special symbol can be lowered, which is appropriate. It is possible to perform production control. Further, in the KT state such as during the chance time, as a result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol whose fluctuation time is shorter than that in the normal state, the frequency of small hits per unit time is increased, so that the player is small. Pay attention to the variable display of the second special symbol that triggers the hit. Therefore, in the KT state, even if the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, the variation display of the background symbol or the small symbol corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol is not performed, and the first hold display or the first hold display is performed. By not performing the first specific display, the recognition degree of the variable display of the first special symbol can be lowered, and the variable display of the second special symbol can be paid more attention.

Further, as can be seen from FIGS. 63 (1) and 63 (2), in the normal state, the small symbol is variablely displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b according to the variable display of the first special symbol, and during the chance time ( Alternatively, in the KT state), the small symbol is variablely displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b according to the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, the background symbol on the first background symbol display unit 91a in the normal state and the variable display of the background symbol on the second background symbol display unit 92a during the chance time (or KT state) are displayed as a predetermined effect (for example, reach effect, etc.). ), Even if it is hidden (or difficult to see), the player can recognize the appropriate variable display of the special symbol according to the game state by checking the small symbol.

Further, as can be seen from FIGS. 63 (1) and 63 (2), the display indicating the number of the second reserved storage is not displayed regardless of the gaming state. This is due to the following reasons. That is, even though the second hold display is not displayed in the normal state, there is a risk that the effect will be inconsistent if the display indicating the number of second hold storages is displayed. Further, during the chance time, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, the display of the second hold display is restricted (shielded by the shielding effect or controlled to be hidden). ). Therefore, for example, even though the display of the second hold display is restricted during the chance time, if the number of the second hold storages is displayed, there is a possibility that the effect may be inconsistent. Therefore, during the chance time, by not displaying the number of the second hold storage from the beginning, the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time becomes 5 times or less, and the display of the second hold display is restricted. I am trying to realize a natural production. For the above reasons, it is assumed that the number of second reserved memories is not displayed regardless of the game state, but for example, a KT state different from the chance time (a state in which the KT state is guaranteed until the next big hit). Then, since the second hold display is not limited, the number of second hold storages may be displayed.

Further, as can be seen from FIGS. 63 (1) and 63 (2), the first reserved memory number display 71 indicating the number of the first reserved memory is displayed regardless of the gaming state. This is due to the following reasons. That is, in the non-KT state (normal state), the display of the first hold display is not restricted. Therefore, in the normal state, the player's recognizability is ensured by displaying the first hold storage number display 71. There is. Further, even in the KT state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is not long (for example, 10 seconds or less), so even if the first reserved memory remains when the KT state is started, it is immediately digested and the KT state is reached. In, the first hold memory is rarely newly generated because the right-handed hit is performed. Therefore, even if the first reserved memory number display 71 is displayed in the KT state, the number is almost always "0", and it is unlikely that the player feels uncomfortable. Further, rather, by making the player recognize that the first reserved memory number display 71 indicates "0", it is made to recognize that it is a right-handed game (that is, a game in which the second special symbol is variablely displayed). , It becomes possible to concentrate more on right-handed games. For the above reasons, the first reserved memory number display 71 is displayed regardless of the game state, but it may be hidden in the KT state.

In the normal state, the fourth symbol is variablely displayed in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, and in the KT state such as during the chance time, the variable display of the first special symbol is supported. The fourth symbol may be displayed in a variable manner. Here, the variable display of the fourth symbol is a predetermined display in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and smaller than the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b. This is achieved by continuing to turn on and off the color (for example, blue) at regular time intervals. The area where the fourth symbol is variably displayed (fourth symbol display area) may be an area different from the display screen of the effect display device 9, and for example, a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED may be used to display the fourth symbol. 4 The symbol display area may be realized. In this way, by performing the variable display of the fourth symbol, the background symbol or the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is not displayed in the normal state, or the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the KT state. Even when the corresponding background symbol or small symbol is not displayed, the fluctuation state of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be confirmed by the fourth symbol. Further, since the fourth symbol has lower visibility than the background symbol and the small symbol, the player can reduce the degree of recognition of the variation display of the second special symbol to the player under the normal state, and the KT. In the state, the player can reduce the degree of recognition of the variation display of the first special symbol.

Further, a hold display lamp (not shown) corresponding to the first hold display and the second hold display may be provided outside the frame of the effect display device 9, and the hold display lamp may be lit and displayed regardless of the gaming state. .. The display control of the hold display lamp may be controlled by the game control microcomputer 560, or may be controlled by the effect control microcomputer 200. In addition, a hold indicator lamp whose display is controlled by both of them may be provided separately. By separately providing the hold display lamp in this way, even if the second hold display is not displayed in the normal state or the first hold display is not displayed in the KT state, the hold display lamp sets the first hold storage number and the second hold. You can check the number of memories. Further, since the hold display lamp is provided outside the frame of the effect display device 9, the visibility is lower than that of the hold display on the first hold display unit 61 and the second hold display unit 62, so that the player can see the hold display lamp in the normal state. On the other hand, the recognition degree of the second hold display can be lowered, and in the KT state, the recognition degree of the first hold display can be lowered for the player.

Further, in the above-described modification, the first hold display or the second hold display is displayed according to the game state, and the first specific display or the second specific display is displayed according to the game state, so that the first hold is displayed. It is assumed that the display positions of the display unit 61 and the second reserved display unit 62 are the same (lower left of the display screen), and the display positions of the first specific display unit 61a and the second specific display unit 62a are the same (lower center of the display screen). ), But these may be in different positions. Similarly, in the above, it is assumed that the display positions of the first background symbol display unit 91a and the second background symbol display unit 92a are the same (center portion of the display screen), and the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 91b. Although the display positions of 92b are the same (upper right part of the display screen), they may be different from each other. Further, for example, even if the display positions of the first background symbol display unit 91a and the second background symbol display unit 92a (or the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b) are the same, they are displayed separately. By making the display mode of the background symbol (or small symbol) to be displayed different, it is possible to distinguish between the one corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the one corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. May be good. Further, for example, when the display positions of the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b are set to different positions (particularly positions that do not overlap each other), the small symbols can be displayed at the respective display positions. Will be. In this case, in the normal state, the small symbol may be variablely displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b according to the variable display of the second special symbol. However, in this case, it is preferable that the small symbol in the second small symbol display unit 92b has lower visibility than the small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b. Similarly, in the KT state such as during the chance time, the small symbol may be variablely displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b according to the variable display of the first special symbol. However, in this case, it is preferable that the small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b has lower visibility than the small symbol in the second small symbol display unit 92b.

[Example of display control of the second hold display during the chance time] Next, the display control of the second hold display and the second specific display during the chance time displayed by the processing of the flowcharts of FIGS. 60 to 62 described above. An example will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 64 (1) shows an example of the display effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 10 times or more during the chance time. As shown in FIG. 64 (1), at this time, the second hold display unit 62 displays the second hold display and the second specific display unit 62a displays the second specific display. Further, since the hold notice and the specific notice can be executed, the second hold display can be changed to a special mode, and the specific display can also be changed to a special mode. During the chance time, a right-handed display is performed so that the player can make a right-handed hit.

FIG. 64 (2) shows an example of the display effect on the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 to 6 times during the chance time. As shown in FIG. 64 (2), at this time, the second hold display unit 62 displays the second hold display and the second specific display unit 62a displays the second specific display. However, since the execution of the hold notice and the specific notice is prohibited, the second hold display is displayed in the normal mode, and the second specific display is also displayed in the normal mode.

FIG. 64 (3) shows an example of the display effect on the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less during the chance time. As shown in FIG. 64 (3), at this time, a shielding effect (blackout effect) that shields the display areas of the second reserved display unit 62 and the second specific display unit 62a from being difficult to see is executed. As a result, the second hold display on the second hold display unit 62 becomes difficult to see, and the second specific display on the second specific display unit 62a becomes difficult to see. In addition, this blackout effect gradually blacks out (the transparency decreases) as the number of remaining times until the end of the chance time decreases. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the second hold display and the second specific display, and it is possible to impressively suggest that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is reduced.

By the way, as can be seen from the flowcharts of FIGS. 60 to 62, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, the additional display and the second specific display of the second hold display are controlled to be hidden. Therefore, even if the shielding effect (blackout effect) is not executed, the additional display of the second hold display on the second hold display unit 62 is difficult to see (non-display), and the second specific display unit 62a is second. The specific display can be made difficult to see (non-display). Further, when the shielding effect (blackout effect) is executed, the additional display and the second specific display of the second hold display are not controlled to be hidden, but are displayed and controlled in the same manner as in FIG. 64 (2). May be good. Even in this way, since the second hold display and the second specific display are shielded by the blackout effect displayed on the upper layer thereof, the second hold display and the second specific display are made difficult to see and are also difficult to see. The flow of display control of the second hold display and the second specific display can be simplified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 64 (3), since the second hold display and the second specific display are restricted to be difficult to see due to the shielding effect, the second hold display is shifted and displayed (second hold display). The effect of shifting the display to the right and the effect of shifting the second hold display to the second specific display) are also restricted (difficult to see). Even if the shielding effect is not executed, if the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less and there is a second hold display that has already been displayed, all the second hold displays are not displayed. The display may be controlled, and the effect of shifting the second hold display may be limited to non-display.

Further, in the above, it is assumed that the second hold display and the second specific display are blocked by the shielding effect (blackout effect) that shields the entire screen, which makes it difficult to see (or hides). By changing the layout of the display screen, the second hold display or the second specific display may be made difficult to see (or non-display). Here, "changing the layout of the display screen" is a concept including changing the display position and display size of various display items displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the display item is a concept. It is a concept including all the displays displayed as effects on the effect display device 9, such as background symbols and hold displays. As a change in the layout of the display screen, for example, the display area of the remaining number display 81 may be expanded. Specifically, by expanding the display area of the remaining number display 81 to the left, the second hold display unit 62 in which the second hold display is displayed and the second specific display unit 62a in which the second specific display is displayed are displayed. The display area may be shielded. Further, as a change in the layout of the display screen, for example, the second background symbol display unit 92a may be expanded downward to shield the second hold display and the second specific display. Further, the shielding effect is not limited to the blackout effect, and may be an effect of shielding the second hold display and the second specific display by using another display effect or a movable body (movable effect character). .. Further, the second hold display and the second specific display are not completely shielded, and may be difficult to see due to a decrease in their visibility. For example, in the effect display device 9, the display positions of the second hold display and the second specific display are changed (for example, changed to the upper right corner), or the display size is changed (for example, reduced display). It may be the one that reduces the sex.

Further, the above-mentioned blackout effect is started on the condition that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, and the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be difficult to see. However, the blackout effect is started on the condition that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is, for example, 10 times or less, and the transparency decreases as the remaining number of times decreases, and the remaining number of times is 10 times or more. At the time of 6 times, the 2nd hold display and the 2nd specific display can be visually recognized, while when the remaining number of times reaches 5 times, the 2nd hold display and the 2nd specific display may become difficult to see. By doing so, it is possible to make the display control that makes the second hold display and the second specific display difficult to see more comfortable. Further, the same effect can be applied when an effect other than the blackout effect is used as the shielding effect.

FIG. 64 (4) shows an example of the display effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the variation display of the final variation of the chance time (100th rotation after the start of the chance time) is completed. As shown in FIG. 64 (4), when the final fluctuation of the chance time is completed, the background symbol (for example, the stop symbol indicating the loss (or small hit)) corresponding to the result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (for example,) "3", "9", "4") are stopped, and similarly, the small symbols (for example, "3", "9", "4") corresponding to the result of the variation display of the second special symbol are stopped. The background symbol and the small symbol may be different from each other. Then, with the end of the chance time, the right-handed display ends (becomes hidden), and instead, a left-handed notification for urging the player to left-handed is executed. Although not shown, the end display (for example, the character display of "chance time end!") Notifying that the chance time is over is displayed and the first one is displayed during the fluctuation of the final fluctuation. Based on the value of the prize ball counter, the prize ball number display is displayed during the consecutive villas. As a result, it is notified that the consecutive villas have ended and the total number of prize balls acquired during that period (total number of prize balls won). Further, at this time, the number of big hits (number of consecutive villas) in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the chance time may also be notified.

FIG. 64 (5) shows an example of the display effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) in the normal state immediately after the chance time ends (that is, the 101st rotation after the chance time starts). As shown in FIG. 64 (5), when the gaming state is switched from the first KT state to the normal state, the second hold display in the second hold display unit 62 and the second specific display in the second specific display unit 62a are hidden. Even if it is controlled and a new second effective start winning command is generated (that is, even if a new valid start winning entry 14 is generated), the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed. On the other hand, when a new first start winning command is generated by the player making a left strike based on the left-handed notification shown in FIG. 64 (4) (that is, a new effective prize is generated for the first starting winning opening). The first specific display is displayed on the first specific display unit 61a, the background symbol is variablely displayed on the first background symbol display unit 91a according to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first small symbol is displayed. Small symbols are displayed in a variable manner in unit 91b. As a result, the player recognizes the start of the variation display of the 101st rotation after the end of the chance time. When the first start winning command is newly generated during the variable display of the first special symbol, the first reserved memory number is updated, so that the first reserved memory number display 71 is updated and displayed, and the first The first hold display in the hold display unit 61 is additionally displayed.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 64, the reason why the display control of the second hold display and the second specific display differs depending on the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time will be described. As described with reference to FIG. 63, in this modified example, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is very long (for example, 5 minutes or 15 minutes) in the normal state (non-KT state), and the normal state. Since left-handed is recommended, the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be hidden so as not to recognize that the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, if the control is performed in the normal state after the end of the chance time, the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed as described above with reference to FIG. 64 (5). Therefore, if the second hold display is displayed when the change display of the final change of the chance time (100th rotation after the start of the chance time) ends, this second hold display is displayed when the normal state is switched to. Is suddenly controlled to be hidden, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. Also, for example, if there is a second hold display that has changed to a special mode at the end of the final change in chance time, the player will be discouraged by hiding this, or there will be a second hold display. Nevertheless, in the normal state, the effect (background pattern, etc.) is not displayed, which may cause inconsistency in the effect. However, as described above, in this modification, the second hold display and the second specific display are displayed before the final fluctuation of the chance time ends (that is, after the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time reaches 5 times). Since the display is controlled so that it is difficult to see, the player's recognition level for the second hold display and the second specific display is lowered, and the second hold display and the second specific display are hidden when the normal gaming state is entered. Even if it is controlled, it can be prevented from giving a sense of discomfort. In addition, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be difficult to see, but the background symbol and the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are visually recognized. Since the display is controlled as much as possible, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the second special symbol is variablely displayed during the chance time.

By the way, in the above-described modification, the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be difficult to see on condition that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, but the remaining number of times is The reason why it is required to be 5 times or less is as follows. That is, in the above-described modification, since the maximum number of second hold storages is 4, a maximum of four second hold displays can be displayed, and the second specific display is also displayed during the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, by displaying the second hold display and the second specific display, it is possible for the player to recognize information for a maximum of 5 fluctuations. Therefore, by controlling the display of the second hold display and the second specific display to be difficult to see when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time reaches 5, the display was visually recognized during the chance time after the end of the chance time. It is possible to prevent the situation where the second specific display and the second hold display are hidden. The second hold display and the second specific display are displayed on the condition that the remaining number of times is 5 times or less, and the remaining number of times is more than 5 times (for example, 10 times) or less. The display may be controlled so that it is difficult to see. Further, after the chance time ends (after the transition to the normal state), the second hold display and the second specific display may be difficult to visually control until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times, that is, the KT state. The second hold display and the second specific display may be displayed and controlled so as to be difficult to see for a period before and after the timing including the end of.

Further, in the above-described modification, the hold notice of the second hold display and the specific notice of the second specific display are restricted (not executed) on the condition that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 times or less. However, the reason why the remaining number of times is 9 times or less is as follows. That is, as described above, when the remaining number of times is 5 times or less, the second hold display and the second specific display are visually controlled to be difficult to see. Therefore, if the mode of the second hold display or the second specific display, which is controlled to be difficult to see, is changed to a special mode, the display becomes difficult to see while giving the player a sense of expectation. As a result, the player's expectation may be impaired, or the production may be inconsistent. For this reason, by limiting the hold notice of the second hold display on the condition that the remaining number of times is 9 times or less, the fourth second hold display, which is the maximum number of holds, shifts as the second specific display after 4 fluctuations. It is displayed, and even if it is controlled to be difficult to see because the remaining number of times is 5 times or less, the second specific display in the normal mode is only controlled to be difficult to see. It becomes possible to avoid it. Regarding the second hold display, it is necessary to limit the hold notice of the second hold display on the condition that the remaining number of times is 9 times or less in consideration of the possibility that the shift display is displayed by a maximum of 4 fluctuations. However, this does not apply to the second specific display. Therefore, regarding the second specific display, the specific notice may be restricted on condition that the remaining number of times that the display becomes difficult to see is 5 times or less. Further, without the condition that the remaining number of times is 9 times or less, the hold notice of the second hold display and the second hold condition that the remaining number of times is more than 9 times (for example, 20 times) or less. The specific notice of the specific display may be restricted.

By the way, in a gaming machine that can be controlled in a special state such as the KT state in which the frequency of small hits per unit time is increased, the player remains when the KT state ends and shifts to the normal state. In order to confirm the result of whether or not to make a big hit based on the second hold memory, the game machine may be intentionally occupied without firing the game ball after the end of the KT state. In such a case, it is not appropriate for the game store because the operation of the game machine is reduced. Further, if the player can recognize the second hold display regarding the second hold memory remaining after the end of the KT state, all of them are hidden for a long time (for example, if there are four hold of 15-minute long fluctuations). 60 minutes until it becomes) The KT state ends in an unnatural display state in which the second hold display is displayed. Furthermore, although it is not always a big hit based on the remaining second reserved memory, until the variation display based on the second reserved memory is completed and the pass / fail result is displayed (pending digestion). Since it takes a certain amount of time (for example, 15 minutes), the player may miss the opportunity to finish the game, and if the player continues the game, the player may be disadvantaged. However, as described above, according to this modification, the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed after the end of the KT state, and the second hold display is displayed during the chance time (before the end 5 change). And by controlling the second specific display to be difficult to see, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively recognizing that there is a remaining second reserved memory. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from intentionally occupying the game machine, thereby preventing a decrease in the operation of the game machine, and it is possible to realize a display that does not give a sense of discomfort at the end of the KT state. It is possible to prevent the player from missing the opportunity to end the game.

In the above-described modification, the second hold display and the second specific display are displayed in the KT state, but the second hold display and the second specific display are not always displayed (or are not displayed regardless of the game state). It may be difficult to see). This is suitable, for example, in the case of a gaming machine having the following KT hits and non-KT hits in a predetermined ratio. Here, the KT hit is a big hit that can be determined when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and is a big hit that is controlled in the KT state until the next big hit after the big hit game is completed. Further, the non-KT hit is a big hit that can be determined when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and is a big hit that is controlled in the normal gaming state immediately after the big hit ends. In such a gaming machine having a KT hit and a non-KT hit, it is conceivable to display a second hold display in order to improve the interest of the game in the KT state after winning the KT hit. Then, if a non-KT hit is won in such a gaming state, when the second special symbol indicating a non-KT hit stops (that is, when a big hit is confirmed), a right-handed hit is performed in the KT state. Therefore, it is highly possible that a maximum of four second hold displays are displayed. However, if a non-KT hit is won, the second hold display that was displayed before the jackpot is confirmed is controlled to be hidden by being controlled to the normal state after the jackpot game. Then, before the jackpot is confirmed, for example, the second hold display, which has changed to a special mode, is hidden, which discourages the player, or even though there is a second hold display, the effect (in the normal state). Background patterns, etc.) may not be displayed, which may cause inconsistencies in the production. Therefore, in order to avoid such inconsistency in the effect, it is difficult to visually recognize the second hold display related to the second hold memory stored after the second hold memory indicating the non-KT hit in the KT state. It is preferable to control the display (for example, hide). Therefore, for example, based on the look-ahead at the time of the start winning (second prize determination result command), at the timing when the start winning indicating a non-KT hit occurs, the second hold display regarding the subsequent start prize (second hold memory) is displayed. It is conceivable to control the display so that it is difficult to see. However, if the display control based on such look-ahead is performed, it is confirmed in advance that it is a big hit, so that there is a risk of reducing the interest of the game. Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a non-KT hit, the second hold display may not always be displayed (or is difficult to see) even in the KT state (regardless of the gaming state). By doing so, even if a non-KT hit is won, the second hold display is not displayed without suggesting that a big hit is confirmed in advance in the KT state, so that the effect of the transition to the normal gaming state is not achieved. Consistency can also be avoided.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine having a non-KT hit, for example, at the timing when a start prize indicating a non-KT hit occurs based on the look-ahead at the time of the start prize, the second start prize (second hold memory) is related to the subsequent start prize. In addition to controlling the display of the hold display so that it is difficult to see, at the timing when the start prize that shows a deviation (or small hit) at a predetermined rate occurs based on the look-ahead at the start prize, the subsequent start prize (second) The second hold display related to the hold memory) may be displayed and controlled so as to be difficult to see for a predetermined period (predetermined number of fluctuations). In this way, the second hold display may be difficult to see for a predetermined period even when it is not a big hit (there is a so-called ghost), so that the big hit is not confirmed and suggested in advance in the KT state. Since the second hold display is not displayed even if the player wins the KT, it is possible to avoid inconsistency in the effect when the game shifts to the normal game state.

Further, as described above, in the gaming machine having a KT hit and a non-KT hit, the display control that makes the second hold display difficult to see regardless of the game state, and the non-KT hit based on the look-ahead are added. By performing display control that makes the second hold display difficult to see for a predetermined period when there is a deviation (or a small hit) at a predetermined ratio, inconsistency in the effect can be avoided. These display controls (hereinafter referred to as specific display controls) are not limited to game machines having KT hits and non-KT hits, and are large hits according to KT hits and non-KT hits (hereinafter referred to as quasi-non-KT hits). It can also be applied to a game machine having a predetermined ratio. Here, the quasi-non-KT hit is a jackpot that can be determined when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and is from a predetermined number of times (for example, four times, which is the maximum number of the second reserved memory) after the jackpot ends. It is a big hit that shifts to the normal gaming state after controlling the KT state only a small number of times (for example, once). In a gaming machine having such a quasi-non-KT hit at a predetermined ratio, when a quasi-non-KT hit is won while being controlled in the KT state, the number of times controlled in the KT state after the big hit game is the second reserved memory number. Less than the maximum number of. Therefore, if the second hold display is displayed while being controlled in the KT state, the KT state after hitting the quasi-non-KT ends and is controlled to the normal game state, and the second hold display is hidden. When the second special symbol indicating a quasi-non-KT hit is stopped (that is, when the jackpot is confirmed), a part of a maximum of four second hold displays (remembered later) that may have been displayed. There is a risk that the second hold display) related to the hold memory will be hidden. Therefore, even in a gaming machine having a quasi-non-KT hit in place of (or in addition to) a non-KT hit at a predetermined ratio, it is possible to avoid inconsistency in the effect by performing the above-mentioned specific display control.

In the above, the KT hit is a big hit that is controlled in the KT state until the next big hit after the big hit game ends, but after the big hit ends, a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times, which is the maximum number of the second hold memory). It may be a jackpot controlled to the KT state more times (for example, 100 times). Even in this way, since there is a possibility of winning a non-KT hit or a quasi-non-KT hit in the KT state, the above-mentioned specific display control can be applied in the same manner.

In addition, the above-mentioned modification is applied to a game machine (so-called loop machine) that is controlled with a high probability until the next big hit at a predetermined ratio (65%), but any big hit is won. It may also be applied to a game machine (so-called ST machine) that is controlled in a high probability state until a predetermined number of fluctuation displays are completed after the big hit game. Further, in this case, when the control is performed in the high probability state, the KT state is controlled at the same time, and when the control is performed in the KT state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set shorter than the normal state. As a result, the frequency of small hits per unit time may be increased. In this case as well, the second hold display and the second specific display are displayed and controlled so as to be difficult to see from 5 changes before the final change controlled in a high probability state, and the second hold display is held before 9 changes of the final change. The notice and the specific notice of the second specific display may be restricted.

In addition, when controlled in a high probability state, a game machine (so-called fall lottery type game machine) that draws a lottery (fall lottery) to determine whether to shift to a low probability state for each fluctuation, or a predetermined number of fluctuation displays In a game machine controlled in a high probability state (so-called ST type game machine) in a predetermined period (ST period) until the end, when controlled in a high probability state, it is controlled in the second KT state and in a low probability state. When it is controlled, it may be controlled in a non-KT state. In such a game machine, when transitioning from the high probability state / second KT state to the low probability state / non-KT state (normal state), the final fluctuation controlled by the KT state (second KT state) (that is, fall). In the lottery type, the change in which the fall lottery is won, and in the ST type, the final change in the ST period), the second hold display may be controlled to be difficult to see, and the second specific display may be controlled to be difficult to see.

Further, in the above-described modification, as described above, even if the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 is detected in the normal state (non-KT state), the second hold display and the second specific display are displayed. It is not displayed, and the background symbol and the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are not displayed (that is, the display effect is restricted). However, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 is detected in the normal state, not only the display effect is limited, but also the right-handed hit aiming at winning the second starting winning opening 14 is not performed. A notification effect (for example, left-handed notification) may be performed. By doing so, the degree of recognition of the player that the second special symbol is changed and displayed in response to the event of winning the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 in the normal state is lowered. , It is possible to relatively increase the degree of recognition of the player that it is an opportunity for left-handed notification (right-handedness is prohibited). Therefore, it is possible to reduce right-handed hits aimed at illegal small hits.

Further, in the above-described modification, when the display positions of the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b are set to different positions (particularly positions that do not overlap each other), in the case of forced disconnection, in the normal state. Even if there is, the small symbol may be stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display unit 62b, and the small symbol may be stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b even in the KT state. For example, in the normal state, the small symbol is variablely displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b according to the variable display of the first special symbol, but since the variable display of the first special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation, at the same time. When the variable display of the second special symbol that has been variablely displayed is forcibly removed, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol indicating forced loss is stopped on the second small symbol display unit 92b. It may be displayed. Similarly, in the KT state, the small symbol is variablely displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b according to the variable display of the second special symbol, but the variable display of the second special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation. When the variable display of the first special symbol, which was displayed in a variable manner at the same time, is forcibly removed, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol indicating the forced loss is displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b. It may be stopped and displayed.

Further, in the above-described modification, when the display positions of the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b are set to different positions (particularly positions that do not overlap each other), the normal state is obtained at the time of a big hit. However, the small symbol may be stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b. For example, in the normal state, the small symbol is variablely displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b according to the variable display of the first special symbol, but the variable display of the second special symbol, which is simultaneously variablely displayed, is a big hit variation. In some cases, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol indicating the big hit may be stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b. Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started while the variation display of the second special symbol indicating the jackpot is being performed, the small symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b. Later, the first normal instruction notification 56A or the second normal instruction notification 56B may be performed to positively notify that the jackpot is a big hit. Further, at this time, even if the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, the effect related to the fluctuation of the first special symbol is restricted (for example, the variation display of the background symbol or the small symbol according to the fluctuation of the first special symbol is displayed. (Not executed), instead, an effect (a special effect indicating a big hit) may be performed according to the variable display of the second special symbol. On the other hand, when the variation display (big hit variation) of the second special symbol is completed without performing the variation display of the first special symbol, after the small symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b, When the first reduction instruction notification 56C is performed or the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed, it may be assumed that a negative big hit is notified. If the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is a deviation (or small hit) fluctuation in the normal state, the small symbol is not displayed on the second small symbol display 92b (that is, the deviation or small hit) as described above. In the case of a small hit, it may not be notified depending on the display effect).

Further, in the above-described modification, when the display positions of the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b are set to different positions (particularly positions that do not overlap each other), the KT state is obtained at the time of a big hit. However, the small symbol may be stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display unit 61b. For example, in the KT state, the small symbol is fluctuated and displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b according to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, but the fluctuating display of the first special symbol that is fluctuated at the same time is a jackpot fluctuation. In some cases, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol indicating the big hit may be stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b. In the KT state, since the player usually hits right, the variation display of the second special symbol may be started when the variation display of the first special symbol indicating the big hit is performed. Mostly. In such a case, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed or the second normal instruction notification 56B is performed after the small symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b. It suffices to be notified that it is a big hit. Further, at this time, even if the variation of the second special symbol is started, the effect related to the variation of the second special symbol is restricted (for example, the variation display of the background symbol or the small symbol according to the variation of the second special symbol is displayed. (Not executed), instead, an effect (a special effect indicating a big hit) may be performed according to the variable display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, although it is rare, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, for example, when the game ball is accidentally won in the first start winning opening 13 and the player leaves the seat when the KT state is controlled. When the variation display (big hit variation) of the first special symbol is completed, the first reduction instruction notification 56C is performed or the second reduction instruction notification 56C is performed after the small symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b. When the reduction instruction notification 56D is performed, it may be notified that the jackpot is a passive hit. Alternatively, in the KT state, since the player usually strikes right, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed or the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed when the game ball passes through, for example, the operating gate 17 by right strike. 2 It may be possible to positively notify that a big hit is performed by performing the normal instruction notification 56B. If the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is out of alignment in the KT state, the small symbol is not displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b (that is, it is displayed in the case of out of alignment) as described above. It may not be notified depending on the production).

Further, in the above-described modification, the hold notice determination process in step S7079 did not mention the difference between the KT states (first KT state or second KT state), but whether it is the first KT state or the second KT state. The hold notice determination process may be executed accordingly. Specifically, in the hold notice determination process, the display mode of the second hold display is more likely to be changed to a special mode (that is, the hold notice is more likely to be performed) in the first KT state than in the second KT state. Good. This is due to the following reasons. That is, in the first KT state of the KT state, although small hits are likely to occur, there are very few cases where the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 22 (that is, it is difficult to obtain a prize ball due to the small hit). On the other hand, in the second KT state of the KT state, a small hit is likely to occur, and a game ball is likely to win a prize in the special variable winning ball device 22 (that is, a prize ball is easily obtained by a small hit). It becomes easy to give a profit to. Therefore, in the second KT state, the player expects a small hit (that is, a miss), but does not expect to win a big hit that may end the second KT state (rather, do not make a big hit for a long period of time). expect). On the other hand, in the first KT state, it is difficult for the player to obtain a prize ball even if a small hit occurs, so he expects a big hit instead of a small hit. For this reason, by making it easier for the hold notice to be given in the first KT state than in the second KT state, the expectation of the player who expects a big hit in the first KT state is raised, and a small hit is expected in the second KT state. It is possible not to impair the expectation of the player. For the same reason, in the specific notice determination process of step S9307, the display mode of the second specific display is more likely to be changed to a special mode in the first KT state than in the second KT state (that is, the specific notice is performed). (Easy) may be used. In addition, as a result of displaying the variation of the second special symbol, if there is a non-small hit (normal miss) other than the big hit at a predetermined ratio, the second hold display or the second specific display is a small hit. A hold notice or a specific notice that changes to a mode (for example, the character display of "small") that is expected to exist may be given.

Further, in the above-described modification, as described with reference to FIG. 60, the effect control microcomputer 200 grasps the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time, and the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 times or less. In that case, the execution of the hold notice was restricted. However, whether or not to limit the hold notice may be determined by the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 560 counts the number of fluctuations after controlling to the low probability / first KT state after the big hit game, grasps the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time, and ends the chance time. When the remaining number of times up to 9 times or less is reached, a command for prohibiting the hold notice may be transmitted as the second winning determination result command to be transmitted when the second valid start winning is generated. In this way, the effect control microcomputer 200 that receives the second winning judgment result command gives a hold notice based on the second winning judgment result command without grasping the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time. You can decide whether to execute or prohibit. Further, it is assumed that the effect control microcomputer 200 can execute the hold notice only when a predetermined hold notice command is received from the game control microcomputer 560, and the game control microcomputer 560 may execute the hold notice. When the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 times or less, the hold notice command may not be transmitted even if the second effective start prize is generated. Even in this way, the effect control microcomputer 200 can determine whether to execute or prohibit the hold notice based on the hold notice command without grasping the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time. Similarly, whether or not to limit the specific advance notice may be determined not by the effect control microcomputer 200 but by the game control microcomputer 560.

As described above, according to this modification, the game machine is capable of variablely displaying the identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit state) that is advantageous to the player, and is the first identification. Variable display execution means (in this example, game control) capable of executing variable display of information (first special symbol in this example) and variable display of second identification information (second special symbol in this example) in parallel. A predetermined state control means (this example) that can be controlled to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state (the portion that executes steps S26A and S26B) in the computer 560. Then, the execution time of the variable display of the second identification information is higher than that of the normal state (in this example, the non-KT state) and the normal state (the part where steps S358 to S360 are executed in the game control microcomputer 560). A state control means (this example) that can be controlled to a special state (KT state in this example) that is frequently controlled to a predetermined state by selecting a short fluctuation time in proportion (see FIG. 13 in this example). In the example, the part that executes steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, and S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560) and the first hold that can store the information related to the variable display of the first identification information as the first hold storage. A storage means (in this example, a first hold storage buffer) and a second hold storage means (in this example, a second hold storage buffer) that can store information related to the variable display of the second identification information as a second hold storage. , The first hold display corresponding to the first hold storage (in this example, the first hold display in the first hold display unit 61) and the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage (in this example, the second hold display). The hold display means (in this example, the part that executes step S707 in the effect control computer 200) that can display the hold display means (the second hold display on the display unit 62) is provided, and the hold display means ends in a special state. It is possible to make the second hold display difficult to see in a specific period including the timing (in this example, the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time) (see FIG. 64 in this example). And said. As a result, in a gaming machine that can be controlled in a special state, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display. More specifically, when the special state ends, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display. The specific period may be a period including the timing at which the special state (KT state in this example) ends, and is not limited to the period from before the end of the special state to the end (for example, 5 fluctuations before the end). It may include a predetermined period (for example, 5 fluctuations after the end) after the end of the special state (after the transition to the normal state).

Further, according to this modification, when the second identification information (in this example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed, the specific display corresponding to the second identification information (in this example, the second specific display) is performed. A specific display means (in this example, a portion for executing steps S9308 and S9310 in the effect control microcomputer 200) capable of displaying the second specific display in the unit 62a is further provided, and the specific period (in this example, the chance time) is further provided. In the period other than the period (the period in which the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end), the hold display means can display the second hold display and the specific display means can display the specific display, and in the specific period, the hold display means is the first. 2 It is possible to make the hold display difficult to see (in this example, step S7082 is not executed when it is Y in step S7081), and the specific display means makes the specific display difficult to see (in this example, step). If it is Y in S9309, step S9310 is not executed). As a result, when the special state ends, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the specific display corresponding to the second identification information.

Further, according to this modification, the predetermining means for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state based on the establishment of the start condition (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S65A and S65B). Part) and the specific determination means (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an advantageous state is obtained based on the second reserved memory before the determination of the advance determination means) in steps S312, S215, and S216. , S322), and the hold display means sets the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage that is the judgment target of the specific judgment means according to the judgment result of the specific judgment means. 1 It is possible to execute the first aspect change effect (in this example, a hold notice) that changes to a special aspect, and the specific display means is a determination target of the advance determination means according to the determination result of the advance determination means. It is possible to execute the second mode change effect (specific notice in this example) that changes the specific display corresponding to the second identification information to the second special mode, and the predetermined period including the specific period (in this example, the chance time ends). In the remaining period of 9 fluctuations or less), the hold display means restricts the execution of the first mode change effect (in this example, step S7079 is not executed when Y in step S7078), and the specific display means is the first. It was decided to limit the execution of the two-mode change effect (in this example, step S9307 is not executed when it is Y in step S9306). As a result, it is possible to avoid inconsistency in the production during a specific period in which the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage and the specific display corresponding to the second identification information are difficult to see.

Further, according to this modification, as a special state, the state control means has a first special state (in this example, the first KT state) and a second special state (this example) having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state. Then, it was decided that it could be controlled to the second KT state). As a result, the monotonousness of the game playability in the special state can be eliminated, and the interest of the game when the game is controlled in the special state can be improved.

Further, according to this modification, the effect symbol (in this example, the background symbol in the first background symbol display unit 91a and the second background symbol display unit 92a) is variably displayed in response to the variable display of the identification information. An effect control means (in this example, effect control) capable of variably displaying a reduced symbol smaller than the effect symbol (in this example, a small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b). The microcomputer 200 is provided with S920D, S920E, S920H, S920I, and S920K), and the effect control means corresponds to the variable display of the first identification information in the normal state (non-KT state in this example). Variable display of the effect symbol (in this example, the background symbol in the first background symbol display unit 91a) is executed, and the effect symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (in this example, the second background symbol display unit 92a) is displayed. The variable display of the background symbol) is not executed (in this example, step S920E is executed when it is Y in step S920C, and step S920J is executed when it is N in step S920G), and a special state (in this example, is executed). , KT state), the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is not executed (in this example, the step). Step S920I is executed when it is Y of S920G, and step S920F is executed when it is N of step S920C), the first identification information and the first identification information and the first identification information depending on whether it is controlled in a normal state or a special state. 2 Variable display of the reduced symbol corresponding to the variable display of any of the identification information (in this example, the small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b or the second small symbol display unit 92b) is executed (not in this example). Either step S920D or S920H is executed depending on whether it is in the KT state or the KT state). As a result, it is possible to realize appropriate display control corresponding to the state of the reduced symbol, and it is possible to reduce the degree of recognition of the second identification information to the variable display by the player in the normal state.

Further, according to this modification, the hold display means can display the first hold display in the normal state (non-KT state in this example), but cannot display the second hold display (this example). Then, step S7075 is executed when it is Y in step S7073, and steps S7080 and S7082 are not executed when it is N in step S7077). As a result, the visibility of the player with respect to the second hold display corresponding to the second hold memory in the normal state can be reduced, and appropriate display control for the second hold display can be realized.

Further, according to this modification, the hold display means displays the first hold storage number corresponding to the number of the first hold storage regardless of whether it is controlled in the normal state or the special state (in this example, the hold display means). The first reserved memory number display 71) is displayed, and the second reserved number display corresponding to the number of the second reserved memory is not displayed (in this example, step S7072 is executed when Y in step S7071 is executed, and step S7076 is executed. Even in the case of Y, the process corresponding to step S7072 is not executed). As a result, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the player with respect to the number of second reserved memories while ensuring the player's recognizability with respect to the number of first reserved memories, and each of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory can be reduced. Appropriate display control can be realized for the number of reserved storages.

Further, according to this modification, the game medium (in this example, the game ball) is provided on a predetermined path (in this example, the right side of the game area 7) among the flow paths in which the game medium (game ball) flows down, and the game medium can pass through. After the specific area (operating gate 17 in this example) and the predetermined condition (in this example, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) are satisfied, an advantageous state is obtained based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area (this example). Then, the advantageous state control means (in this example, the portion where steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 are executed in the case of Y in step S2501 in the game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled to the big hit game state). A predetermined promotion notification (in this example, the first instruction notification) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the predetermined route is executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and a predetermined period (in this example) from the execution of the predetermined promotion notification. After 10 seconds) has elapsed, the promotion notification means (in this example, the microcomputer 200 for effect control) capable of executing the specific promotion notification (in this example, the second instruction notification) for promoting the launch of the game medium into the specific area. Steps S4404, S4405, S4604, and S4605 in the above) are further provided. As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the production.

Further, in this embodiment and the modified example, the case where the low probability / first KT state is configured to end based on the execution of the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) is shown. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the second KT state (high probability / second KT state in this example) may be configured to end based on the execution of the variation display a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). Further, for example, it may be configured to shift from the first KT state to the second KT state based on the execution of the variation display a predetermined number of times, and conversely, the second KT may be configured based on the execution of the variation display a predetermined number of times. It may be configured to shift from the state to the first KT state.

Further, in this embodiment and the modified example, the case where a plurality of big hit types are provided only for the big hit is shown, but the small hit may also be configured to be provided with a plurality of small hit types. In this case, for example, the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 may be configured to be different depending on the small hit type, or the variable winning ball device to be released may be configured to be different depending on the small hit type. Therefore, the advantage may be different depending on the small hit type. When the variable winning ball device to be opened is configured to be different, for example, the special variable winning ball device 20 may be opened or the special variable winning ball device 22 may be opened depending on the small hit type. Alternatively, a plurality of special variable winning ball devices for small hits may be provided, and which special variable winning ball device may be opened may be configured differently depending on the small hit type.

Further, in this embodiment and the modified example, it mainly shifts to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state) in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot, and shifts to the high probability / first KT state in the case of 6R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot. The case of shifting to the low probability / first KT state in the case of a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot has been shown, but the mode is not limited to such a mode. For example, even if the jackpot type is the same, it may be configured so that there are both a case of shifting to the first KT state and a case of shifting to the second KT state. In this case, for example, even if the same 6R probability variation jackpot or 6R normal jackpot is used, it may be configured so that there are both a case of shifting to the first KT state and a case of shifting to the second KT state.

In this embodiment and modification, it is internally configured to control to the KT state, but when it is controlled to the first KT state, a small hit is likely to occur. Rarely, the special winning opening 24 is not won, and from the player's point of view, it looks as if it is controlled to a so-called high base state. Therefore, it is possible to realize the same playability as a game machine controlled to a so-called high base state, to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and to realize a plurality of types of KT states having different advantages. , The game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modification, "different ratios" are limited to those having different ratios due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. Not limited to this, the concept includes those having different ratios due to the relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one having 100% allocation and the other having 0% allocation).

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modification, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols "1" to "9", a background symbol (directing symbol), and a normal symbol are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed is shown. However, the variable display is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variably displayed symbol and the derived symbol do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol is derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modification, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted, but the effect device is controlled. The circuit to be used may be mounted on one board. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27, etc.) are mounted. Two boards may be provided with the effect control board of 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modification, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 200, but the game control microcomputer 560 is used on another substrate (for example,). , The sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, etc. shown in FIG. 4 or the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35. ), The effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 on the effect control board 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. A microcomputer 200 for effect control that controls the effect display device 9 by executing control related to voice control or lamp control in response to the operation, and further changing the received command to the command as it is or, for example, a simplified command. It may be sent to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment, and similarly, the sound output board 70 and the lamp driver. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modification, the pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine, but in the present invention, a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and the player operates the operation lever. A slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when a combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when a plurality of types of symbols are rotated and the symbols are stopped in response to an operation of a stop button by the player. It is also possible to apply to.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modification, the game machine using the game medium as the game machine is taken as an example, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to the game machine that pays out the game medium as a predetermined number of prizes. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses a game medium such as a game ball and gives a score when the conditions for giving a prize are satisfied.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modification, the jackpot type includes a probabilistic jackpot and a normal jackpot, and based on the determination that the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot, a gaming machine controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game ends. Although shown, it is not limited to such game machines. For example, a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability variation region inside (a probability variation region may be provided in only one special variable winning ball device, or a plurality of special variable winning balls provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the jackpot game, and the jackpot game It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in the above embodiment to the gaming machine controlled to the probabilistic state after the end.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above and below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

In addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, (means 1) the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can perform variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot state) that is advantageous to the player. A variable display executing means (for example, a game) capable of executing variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) in parallel. A part for executing steps S26A and S26B in the control computer 560) and a hold storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes the start winning process shown in FIG. 87) that can store a plurality of information related to the variable display as hold storage. A predetermined state control means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 560 that executes steps S358 to S360) that is advantageous to the player and can be controlled to a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state). , A short fluctuation time is selected at a higher rate as the execution time of the variable display of the second identification information than the normal state (for example, the non-KT state) (see, for example, FIG. 13) to bring the second identification information into a predetermined state. State control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, KT state) that is frequently controlled (for example, a part that executes steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560). And, a plurality of hold displays corresponding to each of the plurality of hold storages stored in the hold storage means are displayed at a plurality of corresponding positions corresponding to the number of hold storages (for example, hold 1 display in the first hold storage display area 905D). It is possible to display at each of the positions (position to hold 4 display positions), and it corresponds to the hold memory other than the erased hold memory based on the fact that the hold memory corresponding to the variable display is erased by executing a new variable display. With the hold display means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes the hold effect process shown in FIG. 89), the hold display can be displayed at the corresponding position corresponding to the new number of hold storages after the hold storage is erased. The holding storage means includes, a first holding storage means (for example, a first holding storage buffer) capable of storing information related to variable display of the first identification information as a first holding storage, and a variable second identification information. The hold display means includes a second hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) capable of storing information related to the display as a second hold storage, and the hold display means corresponds to the first hold storage (for example, a first hold display (for example). , No. 1 The first hold display in the hold display unit 61) and the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage (for example, the second hold display in the second hold display unit 62) can be displayed, and the usual In a state (for example, a non-KT state), the first hold display can be displayed, but the second hold display cannot be displayed (for example, if it is Y in step S7073, step S7075 is executed, and the step S7075 is executed. In the case of N of S7077, steps S7080 and S7082 are not executed), and the character image C displayed at a predetermined appearance position (for example, the upper left portion of the effect display device 905) based on the newly stored hold memory. ) Can execute the appearance display of the hold display to the corresponding position corresponding to the hold memory number (for example, the first start winning effect), and the hold memory number changes by executing a new variable display during the execution of the appearance display. Based on the above, it is possible to set the corresponding position regarding the appearance display during execution to the corresponding position corresponding to the new reserved memory number (for example, as shown in FIG. 91, during the execution of the first start winning effect. When the number of reserved storages is reduced, the destination of the holding display is redetermined), the holding storage means is not stored in the holding storage means and the variable display is not executed. When a new hold memory is stored in, at least a part of the appearance display is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 93 as a modification 1, the hold memory number is 0 and the variable display is not executed. When a new start winning prize is generated, a game machine (a portion in which the hold display is displayed as an active display in the active display area 905F without executing the second starting prize effect) can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the player with respect to the second hold display corresponding to the second hold memory in the normal state, and it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display. .. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption of the appearance display during execution and to reduce the effect of the appearance display.

Further, as an example of the form of the gaming machine capable of displaying the optimum information while improving the interest, the variable display can be executed, and it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) which is advantageous for the player. A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1), which has a hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the start winning process shown in FIG. 87) capable of storing a plurality of information related to variable display as hold storage, and the above. A plurality of hold displays corresponding to each of the plurality of hold storages stored in the hold storage means are displayed at a plurality of corresponding positions corresponding to the number of hold storages (for example, hold 1 display position to hold in the first hold storage display area 905D). It is possible to display at each of the four display positions), and the hold display corresponding to the hold memory other than the erased hold memory is based on the fact that the hold memory corresponding to the variable display is erased by executing a new variable display. Is provided with a hold display means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes the hold effect process shown in FIG. 89), which can be displayed at a corresponding position corresponding to the new number of hold memories after the hold memory is erased. , The hold display means corresponds to the number of hold storages from a predetermined appearance position (for example, the character image C displayed in the upper left portion of the effect display device 905) based on the newly stored hold memory. It is possible to execute the appearance display of the hold display to the position (for example, the first start winning effect), and it is being executed based on the change in the number of hold memories due to the execution of the new variable display during the execution of the appearance display. It is possible to set the corresponding position regarding the appearance display to the corresponding position corresponding to the new reserved memory number (for example, as shown in FIG. 91, when the reserved memory number decreases during the execution of the first start winning effect. Is a part that redetermines the destination of the hold display), and when the hold storage is not stored in the hold storage means and the variable display is not executed, a new hold storage is stored in the hold storage means. In this case, at least a part of the appearance display is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 93 as a modification 1, when the number of reserved memories is 0 and a new start prize is generated while the variable display is not executed). , A part in which the hold display is displayed as the active display in the active display area 905F without executing the second start winning effect). An example of the form of this game machine will be described below as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, other form examples will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 65 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 901 is roughly divided into a game machine that supports and fixes an outer frame 901a formed in a vertically long square frame shape, a game board (gauge board) 902 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game board 902. It is composed of a frame (underframe) 903. The game board 902 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. A game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device into this game area and is driven into the game area. The front surface of the game board 902 is covered with a glass door frame 903a provided on the game machine frame (underframe) 903 so as to be openable and closable. The game machine frame 903 and the glass door frame 903a are provided so as to be openable and closable around the left side of the outer frame 901a, and a staff member of the game hall inserts the release key into the release lock K to unlock the key. By doing so, it becomes possible to open it, and a general player or the like cannot open the frame 903 for the game machine and the glass door frame 903a.

A first special symbol display 904A and a second special symbol display 904B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 65, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B is composed of, for example, a segment or a dot matrix LED (light emitting diode), and is composed of a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) capable of identifying each. A special symbol (also called a "special symbol") is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B each variablely display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns having different combinations of those to be turned on and those to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be preset as a plurality of types of special symbols.

A symbol number corresponding to each of the plurality of types of special symbols is assigned. As an example, each of the numbers indicating "0" to "9" is assigned a symbol number of "0" to "9", and the symbol indicating "-" is assigned a symbol number of "10". Just do it. In the following, a special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 904A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and a special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display 904B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". ..

Both the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B are formed in a square shape, for example. The type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, both numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-"), and the types may be It may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B may be configured to variablely display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating, for example, "00" to "99", respectively. .. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B are illustrated in a rectangular shape, but the invention of this embodiment is not limited to this, and these first Each segment constituting the 1 special symbol display 904A and the 2nd special symbol display 904B may be arranged irregularly.

An effect display device 905 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 902. The effect display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 905, for example, there are three corresponding to each of the variation display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display 904A and the variation display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display 904B. In the effect symbol display area, which is a plurality of variable display units, display of the effect symbols (also referred to as decorative symbols), which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can identify each of them, is displayed in a variable manner.

As an example, in the display area of the effect display device 905, "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged. Then, in the special symbol game, one of the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 904A and the fluctuation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 904B is started. In each of the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the effect symbol variation (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. After that, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the effect display device 905. , The final stop symbol (final stop symbol), which is the variable display result of the effect symbol, is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in the display area of the effect display device 905, the variable display using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 904A or the variable display using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 904B. In synchronization with the above, a plurality of types of effect symbols that can be identified by each are displayed in a variable manner, and a definite effect symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “deriving”). In addition, for example, to derive and display various display symbols such as a special symbol and an effect symbol means to display the identification information such as the effect symbol as a stop display (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and end the variable display. .. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol to the derivation display of the final effect symbol that is the variable display result, the variable speed of the effect symbol becomes "0", and the effect is produced. The design may be stagnant and displayed, and may be in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction, for example. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not definitively displayed, the player can recognize that the change of the effect symbol due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the effect symbol completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

There are nine types of symbols (alphanumeric characters "1" to "9" or Chinese characters) that are variablely displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. It may be a number, an English character, nine character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and a character image, and the character image may be, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, or an object other than these. , Characters and other symbols, or decorative images showing any other figure). Each of the production symbols is given a corresponding symbol number. For example, the symbol numbers "1" to "9" are assigned to each of the alphanumeric characters indicating "1" to "9". The effect symbols are not limited to 9 types, and may be any number (for example, 8 types, 10 types, etc.) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as jackpot combinations and outlier combinations can be configured.

After the variable display of the effect symbol is started, until the final effect symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, each effect symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R of "left", "middle", and "right" In, for example, a scroll display is performed in which the symbol numbers flow from the upper to the lower in order from the smaller one to the larger one, and when the effect symbol having the maximum symbol number (for example, "9") is displayed, the process continues. The effect symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, the "left" effect symbol display area 905L, etc.), scroll display is performed from the one with the larger symbol number to the one with the smaller symbol number, and the symbol is displayed. When the effect symbol having the smallest number is displayed, the effect symbol having the largest symbol number may be displayed subsequently.

A first hold storage display area 905D and a second hold storage display area 905U are arranged in the display area of the effect display device 905, and a hold during variable display is held in the center of the lower part of the effect display device 905 in the left-right direction. The active display area 905F for displaying the hold display corresponding to the memory as the active display is displayed. Here, the holding of the variable display corresponding to each special symbol is such that the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B. It occurs based on the starting prize by (entering). That is, although the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display of the special symbol or the effect symbol is satisfied, the variable display based on the previously established start condition is being executed and the pachinko gaming machine. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display is not satisfied because the 901 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is held. The hold display in the first hold storage display area 905D is a hold display generated based on the start prize caused by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, and the hold display in the second hold storage display area 905U. Is a hold display generated based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) through the second starting winning opening.

In particular, the first hold storage display area 905D of this embodiment displays the hold 1 display position for displaying the first first special figure hold display from the bottom to the top, and displays the second first special figure hold display. Hold 2 display position to display the third 1st special figure hold display Hold 3 display position to display the 4th 1st special figure hold display Hold 4 display position to display each hold display Can be displayed.

Further, the character image C is displayed at a position above the first hold storage display area 905D in the effect display device 905 (see FIG. 90). In the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment, the details will be described later, but when a new start prize is generated, the hold display moves from the character image C toward the first hold storage display area 905D or the active display area 905F. It is possible to execute a winning production.

In this embodiment, the hold display generated based on the start prize caused by the game ball passing (entering) the first start prize opening is displayed in a round white shape (hold memory displayed in the first hold storage display area 905D). (Display), and the hold display generated based on the start prize caused by the game ball passing (entering) the second start prize opening is displayed in a round white color (hold memory display displayed in the second hold storage display area 905U). ). In addition, based on the hold display generated based on the start prize caused by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, and the starting prize caused by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening. The display mode of the generated hold display may be different from the display mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 65, the number of special symbol reserved storages is specified at the upper part of the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B together with the first reserved storage display area 905D and the second reserved storage display area 905U. A first hold indicator 9025A and a second hold indicator 9025B are provided for possible display. The first hold display 9025A displays the number of hold storages of the first special figure in a identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the number of second special figure hold storage identifiable. The first special figure reservation number is the number of memories in which the execution of the variable display using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure reserved memory number is the number of stored figures in which the execution of the variable display using the second special figure is suspended. The number of reserved memories of the variable display obtained by adding the number of reserved memories of the first special figure and the number of reserved memories of the second special figure is also referred to as the total number of reserved memories. The term "special figure reserved memory" usually refers to a concept that includes all of the first special figure reserved memory, the second special figure reserved memory, and the total reserved memory, but in particular, some of these (for example, the number of reserved memory). It may also refer to the concept of including the number of reserved memories of the first special figure and the number of reserved memories of the second special figure, but excluding the total number of reserved memories).

General winning openings 9050A and 9050D are provided on the left and right sides of the effect display device 905, and general winning openings 9050B and 9050C are provided in the area below the general winning opening 9050A. Further, below the effect display device 905, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The ordinary winning ball device 906A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The normal variable winning ball device 906B has a normal open state (see the solid line position in FIG. 65) and a tilting position (see the dotted line position in FIG. It is provided with a normal electric accessory having a movable wing piece that changes to an expanded and open state, and forms a second start winning opening.

As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state. It becomes a normally open state that is difficult to do. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 9081 for the normal electric accessory is on. It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter. Although the normally variable winning ball device 906B allows the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening even when it is normally open, there is a possibility that the game ball will enter more than when it is in the expanded open state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 906B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. In this way, the second start winning opening as the second start area has an expanded open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and a normally open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). Changes to.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. 66. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. 66. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "" 4 ”) If it is less than or equal to, the first starting condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "" 4 ”) If it is less than or equal to, the second starting condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 9022A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B. May be the same number or different numbers from each other.

The game balls that have passed (entered) the general winning openings 9050A, 50B, 9050C, and 9050D are the first general winning opening switch 9026A, the second general winning opening switch 9026B, and the third general winning opening switch 9026C, as shown in FIG. It is detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 9026D, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection.

On the right side of the ordinary winning ball device 906A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, a special variable winning ball unit 907 in which the first special variable winning ball device 907A and the second special variable winning ball device 907B are integrated is provided. There is.

Here, the configuration of the special variable winning ball unit 907 will be described. In the following description, the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described with reference to the vertical and horizontal directions when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the special variable winning ball unit 907, the left side constitutes the first special variable winning ball device 907A, and the right side constitutes the second special variable winning ball device 907B. Further, a cover body (not shown) made of a translucent synthetic resin material is attached to the front side of the special variable winning ball unit 907, and the player can use the special variable winning ball unit via the cover body. The game ball flowing down in the 907, particularly in the second special variable winning ball device 907B, can be visually recognized.

The first special variable winning ball device 907A includes a first winning opening door 90701 that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 (see FIG. 66), and is changed to an open state and a closed state by the first winning opening door 90701. Form the first prize opening. The first large winning opening is formed so as to open upward at the left portion of the special variable winning ball unit 907. The first prize-winning door 90701 can be slid back and forth between a closed position where the first prize-winning door is closed by driving a solenoid 9082 and an open position where the first prize-winning door is opened. ing.

In the first special variable winning ball device 907A, when the solenoid 9082 is in the ON state, the first large winning opening door 90701 opens the first large winning opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the first large winning opening. Make it easier. On the other hand, when the solenoid 9082 is in the off state, the first large winning opening door 90701 closes the first large winning opening, and the game ball cannot pass (enter) the first large winning opening. In this way, the first prize opening changes into an open state that is advantageous for the player who can easily pass (enter) the game ball, and a closed state that is disadvantageous for the player because the game ball cannot pass (enter). In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the first prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state is provided in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) the first prize opening. You may.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first prize opening is detected by the first count switch 9023 by passing through the first count switch 9023 (see FIG. 66) provided in the first prize opening. .. The game ball that has passed through the first count switch 9023 is guided to the back side of the game board 902 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 902. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the first large winning opening opened in the first special variable winning ball device 907A, other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are opened. More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, when the first special winning opening is opened in the first special variable winning ball device 907A, the game ball can enter the first large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the first large winning opening is closed in the first special variable winning ball device 907A, it is impossible or difficult to pass (enter) the game ball through the first large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. This is a second state that is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, most of the game balls that flowed down without entering the first large winning opening are guided to the normal variable winning ball device 906B by an obstacle nail or the like (not shown), and if the normal variable winning ball device 906B is in the expanded open state, the first 2 The starting prize opening is designed to win a prize.

The second special variable winning ball device 907B shown in FIG. 77 is formed so as to project upward from the first special variable winning ball device 907A, and is opened and closed by a solenoid 9083 (see FIG. 66). A winning opening door 90711 is provided, and the second major winning opening door 90711 forms a second major winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state. The second large winning opening is formed so as to open upward at the upper end portion of the second special variable winning ball device 907B. The second prize opening door 90711 is between a first state (open state) in which the second prize opening is opened by driving a solenoid 9083 and a second state (closed state) in which the second prize opening is closed. It is provided so that it can slide in the front-back direction.

In the second special variable winning ball device 907B, when the solenoid 9083 for the second big winning door 90711 is on, the second big winning door 90711 sets the second big winning door open, and the game ball is second. Make it easier to pass (enter) the two major winning openings. On the other hand, when the solenoid 9083 for the 2nd big winning door 90711 is off, the 2nd big winning door 90711 closes the 2nd big winning door and the game ball passes through the 2nd big winning door. Make it impossible to (enter). In this way, the second prize opening changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the second prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state is provided in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) the second prize opening. You may.

The game ball passing (entering) the second special winning opening is detected by the second counting switch 9024A by passing through the second count switch 9024A installed in the second large winning opening shown in FIG. 77. .. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second count switch 9024A, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the second large winning opening opened in the second special variable winning ball device 907B, other ordinary winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are used. More prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) the mouth. Therefore, if the second special winning opening is opened in the second special variable winning ball device 907B, the game ball can enter the second special winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the second special winning opening is closed in the second special variable winning ball device 907B, it is impossible or difficult to pass (enter) the game ball through the second special winning opening to obtain the winning ball. This is a second state that is disadvantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 77, in the second special variable winning ball device 907B, a game ball flow path 90750 through which a game ball passing through the second large winning opening can flow down is formed. The game ball flow path 90750 has a main path 90740 (region along the solid line in FIG. 77) through which the game ball passing through the second major winning opening can pass and a branch path 90741 branching from the main path 90740 (in the middle dotted line in FIG. 77). Area along). A backflow prevention member 90730, which will be described later, is arranged between the main path 90740 and the branch path 90741. Further, a first branch portion 90742 in which the branch path 90741 branches from the main path 90740 is provided on the upstream side of the backflow prevention member 90730 in the main path 90740, and on the downstream side of the backflow prevention member 90730 in the main path 90740. , A second branch portion 90743 is provided at which the branch path 90741 branches from the main path 90740. That is, the game ball flowing down the main path 90740 is movable from the first branch portion 90742 or the second branch portion 90743 to the branch path 90741 side.

A third count switch 9024B through which the game ball can pass is installed in the most downstream portion of the main path 90740, and the game ball passes through the third count switch 9024B and is transmitted by the third count switch 9024B. Detected. The game ball that has passed through the third count switch 9024B is guided to the back side of the game board 902 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 902. Further, the game ball that has reached the most downstream portion of the branch path 90741 is guided to the back side of the game board 902 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 902, and passes through the fourth count switch 9024C. , Detected by the fourth count switch 9024C.

In this embodiment, the game state after the end of the small hit game is controlled to the big hit game state based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the third count switch 9024B during the small hit game described later. .. Therefore, during the period when the second big winning door 90711 is open during the small hit game, the course of the game ball is changed by adding vibration or the like, and the game ball is detected by the third count switch 9024B. As a result, fraud that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player becomes possible. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment, the game is stopped in such a case.

On the downstream side of the first branch portion 90742 in the main path 90740, a regulation member 90721 that regulates and allows the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch 9024B is provided. The regulating member 90721 projects into the main path 90740 by driving the solenoid 9085 (see FIG. 66) to regulate the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch 9024B in the main path 90740. It is provided so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction between a permissible state in which the game ball is allowed to flow down toward the third count switch 9024B in the main path 90740 by retracting from the main path 90740.

The upper portion of the regulating member 90721 is formed on a flat surface, and the flat surface is provided on the main path 90740 so as to be inclined downward by a predetermined angle toward the branch path 90741 side in a front view. .. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the main path 90740 while the regulation member 90721 is in the regulated state, the game ball moves the second branch portion 90743 along the flat surface formed on the upper part of the regulation member 90721. It is guided to flow down toward the branch road 90741 via the route.

A backflow prevention member 90730 is rotatably supported between the main path 90740 and the branch path 90741 by a pivot axis facing in the front-rear direction. The backflow prevention member 90730 is a plate-shaped member whose upper end is pivotally supported by a pivot axis, and when a game ball guided on a flat surface of the regulation member 90721 comes into contact with the main path 90740 side, the branch path from the main path 90740 side. It can be moved (rotated) so that it can pass to the 90741 side. Specifically, it is rotatable between an allowable position that inclines so as to open the space between the main path 90740 and the branch road 90741 and a regulated position that closes the space between the main route 90740 and the branch road 90741. It is provided. A rib 90801 protruding forward is provided above the restricting member 90721, and the backflow prevention member 90730 comes into contact with the rib 90801 in the restricted position from the counterclockwise direction in a front view.

The backflow prevention member 90730 is normally arranged at a regulated position by its own weight. At the regulated position, a game ball guided on a flat surface comes into contact with the main path 90740 side (right side in front view). , Pushed by the game ball and rotates clockwise in the front view with the allowable position as the upper limit.

At this time, the vertical width dimension between the tip portion of the backflow prevention member 90730 and the lower portion of the second branch portion 90743 changes to be shorter than the diameter of the game ball, and the main path provided with the third count switch 9024B. The movement of the game ball from the 90740 side to the branch road 90741 side where the fourth count switch 9024C is provided is allowed. On the other hand, when the backflow prevention member 90730 is in the regulated position, even if the game ball comes into contact with the branch path 90741 side (left side in front view), the backflow prevention member 90730 is in contact with the rib 90801 to prevent backflow. The rotation of the member 90730 in the counterclockwise direction is restricted. At this time, since the width dimension between the tip portion of the backflow prevention member 90730 and the lower portion of the second branch portion 90743 is maintained shorter than the diameter of the game ball, the fourth count switch 9024C is provided. The movement of the game ball from the branch path 90741 side to the main path 90740 side where the third count switch 9024B is provided is surely restricted.

Returning to FIG. 65, a normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 65, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 9020 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like like the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, and has a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol (also called "ordinary diagram" or "ordinary diagram") is variably displayed (variable display).

Above the normal symbol display 9020, the normal symbol hold display 9025C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 9041. The passing gate 9041 is installed between the first special variable winning ball device 907A and the second special variable winning ball device 907B in the special variable winning ball unit 907. A gate switch 9021, which will be described later, is built in the passing gate 9041.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. In addition, a winning opening other than the above-mentioned winning opening may be provided. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 903, and game effect LEDs 909 are provided around the game area. Decorative LEDs may be arranged around each structure (for example, ordinary winning ball device 906A, ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, special variable winning ball unit 907, etc.) in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 901. At the lower right position of the game machine frame 903, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward a game area is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The ball striking operation handle may be provided with a single-shot launch switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the drive of the launch motor included in the ball striking device.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 903 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) An upper plate (ball hitting plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 903, a lower plate is provided to hold (store) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901. A stick controller 9031A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to the lower plate member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, the central portion of the lower plate) on the upper surface of the lower plate body. ing. The upper plate member forming the upper plate has a push button 9031B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing, for example, a predetermined position on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 9031A) on the upper surface of the upper plate body. Is provided.

In this embodiment, the game area is divided into a left game area on the left side and a right game area on the right side of the center decorative frame surrounding the periphery of the effect display device 905 arranged at a substantially central position of the game area. The weakly launched (left-handed) game ball with the hitting operation handle flows down the first path (left game area), and the strongly launched (right-handed) game ball with the hitting operation handle flows down the second path (right). It is designed to flow down the game area).

Further, the game ball that has flowed down the first path can be won by the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B, and the game ball that has flowed down the second path is the normal variable winning ball device 906B and the first special variable. A large number of obstacle nails are arranged so that the winning ball device 907A and the second special variable winning ball device 907B can be won and can pass through the passing gate 9041. That is, in the case of left-handed hitting, the first special variable winning ball device 907A and the second special variable winning ball device 907B cannot be won, and the passing gate 9041 cannot be passed.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the normal symbol display 9020 executes a variable display of the normal symbol, such that a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 9041 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. After the normal symbol start condition is satisfied, the normal symbol display is based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the normal symbol variation display is satisfied, for example, the previous fluctuation display of the normal symbol is completed. The variable display of the pachinko machine by the vessel 9020 is started.

In this fluctuation display of the normal symbol, when a predetermined time, which is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, elapses after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, the confirmed normal symbol, which is the variation display result of the normal symbol, is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific ordinary symbol (symbol per ordinary symbol) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the confirmed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variation display result of the normal symbol is "out of normal symbol". Become. In response to the fact that the variation display result of the normal symbol is "per normal figure", the expansion / opening control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 906B is in the tilt position. However, normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position after a predetermined time elapses.

After the first starting condition is satisfied, for example, after the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the variable display of the special figure by the first special symbol display 904A is started. Further, the second starting condition is satisfied because the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Later, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the change display of the previous special figure or the end of the jackpot game state, the change display of the special figure by the second special symbol display 904B is started.

In the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, when the variable display time as the special symbol variable time elapses after the variable display of the special symbol is started, the special symbol is displayed. A definite special symbol (variation display result) that becomes a fluctuation display result is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If so, it becomes a "small hit" as a predetermined display result. In addition, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it will be "missing".

After the variable display result in the variable display of the special figure becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as a specific game state in which a round (also called "round game") advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times. To. After the variable display result in the variable display of the special figure becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment, as an example, a special symbol showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" is used as a big hit symbol, and a special symbol showing the number "2" is used as a small hit symbol. The special symbol indicating the "-" symbol is regarded as an off symbol. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a missed symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 904A is different from each symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 904B. It may be a symbol, or the common special symbol in the variable display of both special symbols may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or an outlier symbol.

After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the variable display of the special figure and becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, in the big hit game state, the first big winning door of the first special variable winning ball device 907A The 90701 opens the first large winning opening during a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round is executed in which the first special variable winning ball device 907A is set to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

The round, which is the opening cycle of the first prize opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "15", "10", "5", etc.). Even before the number of times the round is executed reaches the upper limit, the execution of the round is completed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball did not win the first prize opening). May be good.

Further, after the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol and becomes a "small hit" as a specific display result, in the small hit game state, the second special variable winning ball device 907B is used. The 2nd big winning door 90711 opens the 2nd big winning door in the period until the predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. To be in a state. As a result, the second special variable winning ball device 907B becomes the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

In this embodiment, the second big winning door 90711 is set to open once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses in the small hit game state. It is not limited, and may be opened a plurality of times in the small hit game state.

In the small hit game state, when the game ball that has won the second big winning opening passes through the third count switch 9024B provided in the second special variable winning ball device 907B, the third count switch 9024B of the game ball passes. It becomes a "big hit" based on (V winning big hit). That is, the CPU 90103 controls the game state to the big hit game state based on the detection of the passage of the third count switch 9024B of the game ball. On the other hand, when the game ball that has won the second big winning opening in the small hit game state passes through the fourth count switch 9024C provided in the second special variable winning ball device 907B, it does not become a "big hit". That is, the CPU 90103 does not control the game state to the jackpot game state based on the detection of the passage of the fourth count switch 9024C of the game ball.

Then, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch 9024B of the game ball, the second big prize opening door 90711 of the second special variable winning ball device 907B opens a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds). ) Elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated, the second major winning opening is opened. As a result, a round game is executed in which the second special variable winning ball device 907B is set to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player. In this embodiment, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch 9024B, the second special variable winning ball device 907B is controlled to the first state. The embodiment is not limited to this, and the first special variable winning ball device 907A may be controlled to the first state.

The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second big winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "15" or "5"). Even before the number of times the round game is executed reaches the upper limit, the round game may end when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball did not win the second prize opening). Good.

After the end of the jackpot game state in this embodiment, the time saving state in which the time saving control (time saving control) is performed within a predetermined range of the number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times or 20 times) and the time saving control are not performed. It is controlled to either the normal state. By performing the time reduction control, the fluctuation display time (special figure fluctuation time) in the fluctuation display of the special figure is shortened as compared with the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, an initialization process after the power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed). The same control as when is executed) is performed. In the time saving control, after the end of the big hit game state, the variation display of the special figure is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times or 20 times), the variation display result becomes "big hit", and in the small hit game state. It may end when any of the conditions that the game ball passes through the third count switch 9024B is satisfied first.

When the time reduction control is performed, the fluctuation time (special symbol fluctuation time) in the fluctuation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol display 904B is shortened as compared with the normal state, or is normal. The control that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the normal map (normal figure fluctuation time) by the symbol display 9020 is shorter than that in the normal state, and the fluctuation display result of each fluctuation display of the normal map is "per normal map". The tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B based on the control to improve the probability of becoming is higher than that in the normal state and the fluctuation display result being "per normal" is set in the normal state. It makes it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control to make it longer than the time and control to increase the number of tilts compared to the normal state, and increase the probability that the second start condition is satisfied. As a result, control that is advantageous to the player is performed. In this way, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening due to the time saving control, which is advantageous for the player, is also called a high opening control. As the high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls (including all of them) may be combined and performed.

By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the expanded open state is increased as compared with the case where the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display 904B is easily satisfied, and the variable display of the special figure can be frequently executed. Then, the time until the variable display result becomes "big hit" or "small hit" is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as the high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed. The gaming state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also called a time saving state or a high base state.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 has various controls such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a voice control board 9013, an LED control board 9014, a terminal board (information output board) 9016, and a power supply board 9017 as shown in FIG. The board is mounted. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 902 of the pachinko game machine 901.

The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG. 67, is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in a state of being housed in the board case 90201 to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. Various circuits for this are installed. The main board 9011 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a function for setting a random number used in a special drawing game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 9011 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The fluctuation display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 9020, etc. It also has a control function.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 78 (A), the main board 9011 is provided with a display monitor 9029 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the display monitor 9029 has various types of prizes. It also has a function to display the winning information of. A display changeover switch 9030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 9029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 9029 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 9030.

Further, as shown in FIG. 66, the main board 9011 detects the opening of the door opening sensor 90 that detects the opening of the glass door frame 903a that covers the front surface of the game board 902 so as to be openable and closable, and the opening of the first prize-winning door 90701. Various sensors such as the first prize-winning door sensor 9091 for the first prize, the second prize-winning door sensor 9092 for detecting the opening of the second prize-winning door 90711, etc. are connected, and from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of various abnormalities (errors) based on the output detection signal.

In addition to the detection signals from the game control microcomputer 90100 and various switches for detecting the game ball, various signals such as a power cutoff signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal are taken into the main board 9011 to capture the game control microcomputer. Information output for outputting various signals such as security signals from the switch circuit 90110 to be transmitted to the 90100, the output circuit 90111 to transmit the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the solenoids 9081 to 9083, and the terminal board 9016. The circuit 90112 is mounted.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 78 (A), the main substrate 9011 shown in FIG. 66 is enclosed in a substrate case 90201 made of a permeable synthetic resin material, and is displayed in the center of the main substrate 9011. A monitor 9029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged, and a display changeover switch 9030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 9029. The display monitor 9029 and the display changeover switch 9030 are arranged in front of the main board 9011 when it is visually recognized. Since the main board 9011 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 903 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 9011 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 902 when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened. This is the front when visually recognized, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 901. However, the front surface when the main board 9011 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be common.

In addition, the main board 9011 (microcomputer for game control 90100) has each winning opening (1st big winning opening, 2nd big winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, 1st starting winning opening, 1st to 4th general winning openings). The number of game balls entering the mouth, hereinafter also referred to as the "entry area") is totaled, and various winning information such as the ratio and the winning ratio based on the total is displayed on the display monitor 9029. By displaying these prize information, various prize information such as the ratio and the role ratio after installation in the amusement park can be confirmed. That is, on the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passing the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 901 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is being made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko gaming machine 901 after installation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, the power supply board 9017 is enclosed in a board case 90202 made of a permeable synthetic resin material, and a setting change state or a setting confirmation state described later is in the upper right side of the back surface of the power supply board 9017. A lock switch 9051 (see FIG. 66) for switching to, and a setting changeover switch 9052 (FIG. 66) that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the setting change state. See).

The lock switch 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 903, which can be opened by a predetermined key operation, is opened. Only the clerk who possesses the predetermined key can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 9051 requires key operation, only the clerk who has the key to operate the lock switch 9051 can be operated among the clerk of the game store. Further, the lock switch 9051 is a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, and is also a switch capable of executing an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation).

As shown in FIG. 67, at the lower part on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, a nozzle for discharging the gaming balls that have won each winning opening and the gaming balls that have entered the out opening to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901 ( A discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 9070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 901 (detecting a launched game ball) is provided in the nozzle. .. As shown in FIG. 66, the outlet switch 9070 is connected to the switch circuit 90110 described above.

The output circuit 90111 is also connected to the controller 9084 for driving the solenoid 9085. The controller 9084 starts the drive control of the solenoid 9085 by receiving a start signal from the game control microcomputer 90100 via the output circuit 90111 when the pachinko game machine 901 is started. When the controller 9084 drives the solenoid 9085, the regulating member 90721 repeats the regulated state and the allowable state every second regardless of the gaming state.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the effect display device 905, a voice control command used to control audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, a game effect LED 909, and the like. It includes LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs and the like.

FIG. 68 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 68A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 68 (A), the command 8001H is a first fluctuation start command for designating the fluctuation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 904A. The command 8002H is a second fluctuation start command for designating the fluctuation start in the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display 904B. The command 81XXH is an effect that is variablely displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R in the effect display device 905 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variation display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variation display result such as a special symbol or an effect symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit" is used. , Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variation display result designation command indicating the predetermined result that the variation display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variation display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variation display result is "small hit A". The command 8C05H is a sixth variation display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variation display result is "small hit B".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the effect symbols in the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right" effects display device 905. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 901. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormal) and the type of the error (abnormal) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 901. In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 9012 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variation display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command during opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening of the big winning opening, different EXT data are set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. , The first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display 904A is satisfied. The command B200H indicates that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B and a starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. Based on this, it is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display 904B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable in the first hold storage display area 905D or the like. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable in the second hold storage display area 905U or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D100 is a V prize notification designation command for notifying that the V prize has been won, that is, that the third count switch 9024B has been turned on because the game ball has passed the third count switch 9024B.

The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes the game control program and performs the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 90103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 90104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 90106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 90101 by the CPU 90103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 90103 writes various variable data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 90102 by the CPU 90103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 9011. As shown in FIG. 69, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 9011, in addition to the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of MR3', the random value MR4'for determining the display result of the general map, and the random value MR5'for determining the initial value of MR4'are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1'to MR5' may be counted by software update using different random counters in CPU 90103, or may be updated by random number circuit 90104. The random number circuit 90104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 90100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 90100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, each random value MR1'to MR5'is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 69, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1'to MR5' may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

FIG. 70 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is "off", the variation display mode corresponds to the case where the variation display mode of the effect symbol is "non-reach" and the case where the variation display mode is "reach". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the result is a "big hit". In addition, 1 fluctuation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the fluctuation display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the effect symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "out of reach" and the variation display mode of the effect symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "big hit" is called a jackpot fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 70, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in this embodiment is set shorter than the super reach α and super reach β which are the super reach fluctuation patterns. .. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is the one. However, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of Super Reach α is executed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the fluctuation display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. Therefore, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and super In the reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, and the like. Therefore, the fluctuation patterns to be executed are not determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, but are determined using only the random value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, this embodiment is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided, and these fluctuation pattern types are provided. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determination, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern is illustrated, but this embodiment is not limited to this. , Even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, the fluctuation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2'-1 that is out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, and if the set value is 2, the pseudo-continuous effect is produced. Is executed twice to obtain a non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern. When the set value is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to obtain a super-reach out-of-reach variation pattern.

In the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101, and by using the RAM 90102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are executed. Further, the CPU 90103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 9011 side by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 90101 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 90101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, which are prepared by the CPU 90103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 90101 includes table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 90103 to output various control signals from the main board 9011, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 90101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 71 (A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 71 (B), and FIG. 71 (C). The display result determination table (set value 3) shown, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 72 (A) (for the first special symbol), the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 72 (B) (for the second special symbol), and the figure. In addition to the small hit type judgment table shown in 72 (C), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), the missed fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), and the normal figure display result judgment A table (not shown), a table for determining a fluctuation pattern of a normal figure (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit and a small hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. It has become. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 having the highest payout rate and increasing the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3 to lower the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2, 3 the advantage decreases stepwise.

FIGS. 71 (A) to 71 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 90101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1'is set. In each display result judgment table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 71 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. If so, the jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/99) than when the set values are "2" and "3", and some of these judgment values correspond to the small hits. By being set as a value, a small hit is won with a higher probability (1/50) than when the set value is "2" or "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, and half of these judgment values are Since it is set as a determination value corresponding to a small hit, the small hit is won with a higher probability (100/200) than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/150), and some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, so that the set value is "1". Also has a low probability (1/99) of winning a small hit. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/150) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, and half of these judgment values are By being set as a judgment value corresponding to a small hit, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and the same probability as when the set value is "1". It is designed to win a small hit at (100/200).

As shown in FIG. 71 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the determination value corresponding to the jackpot is set. However, the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is not set, and therefore, when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, the set value is higher than when the set value is "1" or "2". A big hit is won with a low probability (1/200), but a small hit is not won (winning probability: 0). Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/200) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, and half of these judgment values are By being set as a judgment value corresponding to a small hit, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and the set values are "1" and "2". The small hit is won with the same probability (100/200) as in the case.

That is, the CPU 90103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1'is one of the hits corresponding to the big hits shown in FIGS. 71 (A) to 71 (C). If it matches the determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). Further, when MR1'matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 71 (A) to 71 (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 71 (A) to 71 (C) indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol display 904B It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but stop at the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol display 904B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In this embodiment, in each display result determination table shown in FIGS. 71 (A) to 71 (C), the winning probabilities of small hits when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second are all the same, but they are set. The odds of winning a small hit may be reduced in the order of values 1, 2, and 3. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the winning probability of the small hit is reduced in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3, but it is the same as the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the second. In addition, the same winning probability may be used for all the set values.

Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 90103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 71 (A) to 71 (C) to determine whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit. And a small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the big hit judgment is a common table for the case where the first special symbol is changed and the second special symbol is changed regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. The small hit may be determined by using a separate table depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer is the first or the second.

Further, in this embodiment, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 shown in FIG. 71 (C) is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, a determination value other than the determination value corresponding to the jackpot is used. Is not set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, that is, the small hit is not won, but a part of the judgment values other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is used as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit. It may be set so that a small hit is won. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hit probability differs depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

In this embodiment, a total of three setting values, 1 to 3, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set in 901 may be two or four or more.

72 (A) and 72 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 90101. Of these, FIG. 72 (A) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table of. Further, FIG. 72 (B) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It's a table.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2') for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine the random number.

FIG. 72 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 90101. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variation display result is a small hit symbol, the small hit type is set to small hit A or small hit based on the random number (MR2') for determining the hit type. It is a table referred to for determining B. In this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the third count switch 9024B during the small hit game of the small hit A, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type D is executed. When the game ball passes through the third count switch 9024B during the small hit game of the small hit B, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type E is executed. It has become so. That is, these jackpots D and jackpot E are not the jackpot types determined by the random number value MR2'for determining the hit type extracted at the time of starting winning, but the game during the small hit game of either the small hit A or the small hit B. This is a jackpot type determined by whether or not the ball has passed the third count switch 9024B.

Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 73. In this embodiment, the jackpot type includes jackpot A and jackpot D in which the time saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot B, jackpot C, and jackpot E for which the time saving control is executed after the end of the above are set. That is, among these jackpots A to E, jackpots C and E are regarded as the most advantageous jackpots for the player, and jackpots A and D are regarded as the most disadvantageous jackpots for the player. Further, since the big hit E is a big hit that is more advantageous than the big hit D, the small hit B is a small hit that is more advantageous than the small hit A.

Of these jackpots A to jackpot E, jackpot A is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) in which the first jackpot is changed to a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, the time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit A.

The jackpot B is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) that change the first jackpot into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit B, the time saving control is executed until the special figure game is executed 20 times or until the big hit occurs again by the time when the special figure game is executed 20 times.

The jackpot C is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) that change the first jackpot into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit C, the time saving control is executed until the special figure game is executed 100 times or until the big hit occurs again by the time when the special figure game is executed 100 times.

The jackpot D is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) that change the second big winning opening into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, the time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit D.

The jackpot E is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 14 rounds (so-called 14 rounds) that change the second jackpot into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit E, the time saving control is executed until the special figure game is executed 100 times or until the big hit occurs again by the time when the special figure game is executed 100 times.

In the jackpot D and the jackpot E, the jackpot to be opened is the second jackpot 90712, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and the jackpot D and the jackpot E are the jackpots to be opened. The mouth may be the first prize-winning mouth. That is, for the big hit D and the big hit E, the second big winning opening 90712 is opened for the small hit game, and based on the V winning generated during the small hit game, the second big winning opening 90712 is used as the big hit game. Instead of, the first big prize opening may be opened.

It should be noted that, in the time-saving state, the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" increases, so that a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. For this reason, in the time saving state, a big hit may occur as a result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, or a big hit may occur when the game ball wins a V during the small hit game, so that the big hit game state is normal. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that tends to occur continuously without going through the state.

In the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit B is completed, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 20 times, so that a small hit occurs during the 20 special figure games, and the game The rate at which the ball passes through the third count switch 9024B (the rate at which the game ball wins a V and a big hit occurs during 20 special game games) is set to about 50%. On the other hand, in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit C and the big hit E, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 100 times, so that a small hit occurs during the 100 special figure games. However, the rate at which the game ball passes through the third count switch 9024B (the rate at which the game ball wins a V and a big hit occurs during 100 special figure games) is set to almost 100%.

In this embodiment, five types of jackpots A to E are provided as jackpot types, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and six or more jackpot types may be provided. Moreover, 4 or less types may be provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", 0 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2'. ~ 49 are assigned to jackpot A, 50 to 149 are assigned to jackpot B, and 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2', 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2', 0 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 150 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit B or the big hit C for which the time saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game is lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. I am trying to be.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", it is out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2'. 0 to 29 are assigned to jackpot A, 30 to 99 are assigned to jackpot B, and 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2', 0 to 69 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 70 to 269 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 270-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2', 0 to 199 is assigned to the jackpot A, and 200 to 269 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 270-299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In this way, when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the jackpots B and C for which the time saving control is executed at the end of the jackpot game is the jackpot in the special symbol game of the first special symbol. Is higher than when is generated, and is set lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3.

That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 (A) and 72 (B), when the set value is 1, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to jackpot C is the highest. Next, the ratio of determining the jackpot B is high, and the ratio of determining the jackpot A is the lowest (the jackpot type determination ratio in the set value 1: jackpot C> jackpot B> jackpot A). When the set value is 2, the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot B at the highest rate, followed by jackpot A at the highest rate, and jackpot C is determined at the lowest rate (set value). Big hit type determination ratio in 2: Big hit B> Big hit A> Big hit C). Further, when the set value is 3, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to jackpot A is the highest, then the percentage of determining jackpot B is high, and the percentage of determining jackpot C is the lowest. (Big hit type determination ratio in set value 3: Big hit A> Big hit B> Big hit C).

In this embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined at a different ratio from the jackpot A, the jackpot B, and the jackpot C according to the set value. , This embodiment is not limited to this, and depending on the set value set, there may be one or more undetermined jackpot types among jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or a specific jackpot type is 100%. Included in determining by percentage.

Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), in the small hit type determination table, when the set value is "1", 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2'are small hits. It is assigned to A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2', 0 to 149 are assigned to the small hit A, and 150 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B. ing. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2', 0 to 199 is assigned to the small hit A, and 200 to 299 is assigned to the small hit B. ing.

In this way, when a V-winning jackpot occurs during the small hit game, the ratio of determining the jackpot E, in which the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed after the jackpot game ends is 100, is 20 times. It is higher than the ratio for determining the jackpot D, and is lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3.

That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), when the set value is 1, the small hit B is determined as the small hit type at a higher rate than the small hit A. As a result, the ratio of the jackpot type determined to the jackpot E based on the occurrence of the V prize during the small hit game is higher than the percentage determined to the jackpot D (the jackpot by the V prize at the set value 1). Type determination ratio: jackpot E> jackpot D). Further, when the set value is 2, small hit A and small hit B are determined at the same ratio as the small hit type, so that a V prize is generated during the small hit game. Based on the above, the ratio of the jackpot type determined to be the jackpot D and the proportion determined to the jackpot E are equal (the percentage of the jackpot type determined by the V prize in the set value 2: jackpot E = jackpot D). Further, when the set value is 3, the small hit A is determined at a higher rate than the small hit B as the small hit type, and the V prize is generated during the small hit game. The rate at which the jackpot type is determined as the jackpot D is higher than the rate at which the jackpot E is determined (the percentage of the jackpot type determined by the V prize at the set value 1: jackpot D> jackpot E).

As described above, in this embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot and the determination ratio of the jackpot type when a V prize occurs are different according to the set value. That is, the type of the small hit game state controlled according to the set value may change, and the type of the big hit game state controlled when the V prize occurs may change. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In this embodiment, the determination rate of the small hit type differs depending on the set value, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and depending on the set value set, the determination ratio is different. Of the small hit A and the small hit B, there may be a small hit type that is not determined. That is, if the determination ratio of the small hit type differs depending on the set value, one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit. It also includes determining the type at a rate of 100%. Further, in this embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which the small hit type is determined by using a common small hit type determination table regardless of whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. , This embodiment is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the small hit type may be different depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. When the small hit type is determined at different ratios according to the variable special map, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hit A and the small hit B, depending on the variable special map. That is, in order to determine the small hit type at different ratios according to the fluctuation special chart, one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit type is determined. It also includes determining at a rate of 100%.

In this embodiment, the jackpot type and the small hit type are determined by using MR2'which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and is referred to as the jackpot type. At least one of the small hit types may be determined by using MR1'which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, in this embodiment, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability and the small hit probability increase, the jackpot C as the jackpot type, and the small hit as the small hit type). The form (such as making it easier to determine the hit B) is illustrated, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the more advantageous it is for the player. You may do so.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, but the game playability itself does not change as shown in FIGS. 72 to 74 described later. Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and the playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the jackpot game is based on the game ball passing through the third count switch 9024B during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end to the probability change state, the rate at which the game ball passes through the third count switch 9024B during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure (so-called V probability change type), and the pachinko game When the set value set in the machine 901 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the gaming ball is the third count switch 9024B during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls the jackpot gaming state based on passing through. Further, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are the same as those set in 1 to 3, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 901 is 4) may be provided.

Further, in the case of changing the game playability according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, the third count switch 9024B is set to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the third count switch 9024B, a predetermined effect is executed. When the set value is 2 or 3, the 3rd count switch 9024B is used as a game switch (the game state is changed based on the fact that the game ball has passed the 3rd count switch 9024B). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state).

Further, the ROM 90101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3'for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be stored in the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the fluctuation display result to "big hit" and the fluctuation display result to be "small hit". A fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is pre-determined, and a fluctuation pattern judgment table for misses used when it is pre-determined to make the fluctuation display result "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, each of the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1'-1), the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1'-2), and the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1'-3) A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3'for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 74 (A) and 74 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table includes a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) used when the jackpot type is for jackpot B and jackpot C is prepared in advance, and these jackpot fluctuation pattern determination tables (for jackpot A) and In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1'-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1'-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot For each fluctuation pattern of (PB1'-3), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 74 (A), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", 0 to 300 out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3'. Are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1'-1), 301 to 800 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1'-2), and 801 to 997 are assigned to the super reach. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of β jackpot (PB1'-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3', 0 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1'-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 351 to 825. Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1'-2), and 826 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1'-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3', 0 to 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1'-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 401 to 850. Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1'-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1'-3).

As shown in FIG. 74 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3'is 0 to 997. 0 to 100 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1'-1), and 101 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1'-2), from 351 to 997. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1'-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3', 0 to 150 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1'-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 151 to 450. Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1'-2), and up to 451 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1'-3). Further, when the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3', 0 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1'-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 2001-550. Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1'-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1'-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1'-2) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1'-3). It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1'-3) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1'-2). It is higher than the determined ratio and lowers in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3.

That is, in this embodiment, when these determination values are such that the type of jackpot is "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and the type of jackpot is "big hit A". Is assigned so that the super reach α can be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, it may be a “big hit B” or a “big hit C”. Expectations can be raised.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value is set in the range that the random number value MR3'for small hit determination can take with respect to the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1'-1). It is assigned as a judgment value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, MR3'is determined regardless of whether the set value is "1", "2", or "3". Of the value range 0 to 997, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1'-1). Although only PC1'-1 is provided as the fluctuation pattern of the small hit in this embodiment, this embodiment is not limited to this, and the fluctuation pattern of the small hit is two or more fluctuation patterns. May be provided, and the fluctuation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios with the set values "1", "2", and "3".

Further, the deviation pattern determination table includes the deviation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the deviation variation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for deviation used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the out-of-reach variation pattern determination table A, the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1'-1) without shortening, the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2'-1), and the super reach α out-of-arrival variation pattern (PA2'-2). ), A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3'for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2'-3) out of the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 75 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 1 or less), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR3' Of 0 to 997, 0 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1'-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2'-1). , 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2'-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2'-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3', 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1'-1), and 401 to 401. Up to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-normal fluctuation pattern (PA2'-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2'-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the out-of-order fluctuation pattern (PA2'-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3', 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1'-1), and 451 to 451. Up to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-normal fluctuation pattern (PA2'-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2'-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the out-of-order fluctuation pattern (PA2'-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1'-2) and the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2'-1) corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 2 to 4 are obtained. , A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern (PA2'-2) out of the super reach α and the fluctuation pattern (PA2'-3) out of the super reach β. Is assigned as the judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 75 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 low-base medium total pending storage numbers), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3'is determined. Of the range 0 to 997, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1'-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2'-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2'-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2'-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3', 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1'-1), and 451 to 451. Up to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-normal fluctuation pattern (PA2'-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2'-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the out-of-order fluctuation pattern (PA2'-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3', 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1'-1), and 501 to 501. Up to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-normal fluctuation pattern (PA2'-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2'-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the out-of-order fluctuation pattern (PA2'-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1'-3) and the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2'-1) corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 5 to 8 are obtained. , A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern (PA2'-2) out of the super reach α and the fluctuation pattern (PA2'-3) out of the super reach β. Is assigned as the judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 75 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 5 or more), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR3' Of 0 to 997, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1'-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2'-1). , 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2'-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2'-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3', 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1'-1), and 501 to 501. Up to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-normal fluctuation pattern (PA2'-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2'-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the out-of-order fluctuation pattern (PA2'-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3', 0 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1'-1), and 551 to 551. Up to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-normal fluctuation pattern (PA2'-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2'-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the out-of-order fluctuation pattern (PA2'-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1'-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2'-1), and the super reach α deviation corresponding to the time reduction control. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern (PA2'-2) and the fluctuation pattern (PA2'-3) out of super reach β. ing.

As shown in FIG. 75 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base medium), when the set value is "1", 0 out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3'. ~ 450 is assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1'-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2'-1), and 701 to 900 are super Reach α is assigned to the out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2'-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2'-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3', 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1'-1), and 501 to 501. Up to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-normal fluctuation pattern (PA2'-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2'-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the out-of-order fluctuation pattern (PA2'-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3', 0 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1'-1), and 551 to 551. Up to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-normal fluctuation pattern (PA2'-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2'-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the out-of-order fluctuation pattern (PA2'-3).

In this way, when the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that of determining the super reach variation pattern, and the set values 1, 2, It is designed to be lower in the order of 3. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 900 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. If each variation pattern is assigned, that is, if the variation display result is out of alignment, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a common decision rate regardless of the set value, so the super reach variation pattern It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

The "common decision rate" in this embodiment means that the decision rate is completely the same at different set values (this example) and that the decision rate is the same at different set values (this example). For example, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach differs by about 1% between the set value 1 and the set value 3).

In this embodiment, when the variation display result is out of alignment, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value. Not limited to this, if the variation display result is out of alignment, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. However, only the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

Further, in this embodiment, when the variation display result is out of alignment, both the determination rate of the variation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach α and the determination rate of the variation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach β are set regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment that is the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, this embodiment is not limited to this, and when the variation display result is out of order, the variation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach α is illustrated. The determination ratio of only one of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of Super Reach β and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in this embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is out of alignment, both the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach α and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach β are set regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment that is the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, this embodiment is not limited to this, and the set value is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In this embodiment, when the variation display result is out of alignment, a mode in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach differs depending on the set value is illustrated, but it is set. Depending on the set value, there may be one or a plurality of undetermined fluctuation patterns among the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern. That is, if the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the fluctuation patterns should not be determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or the specific fluctuation pattern is 100%. It is also included to decide by the ratio of.

As shown in FIG. 75, the non-reach non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1'-2) has a shorter fluctuation time than the non-reach non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1'-1) without shortening, and further, the fluctuation pattern The fluctuation time of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1'-3) is shorter than that of (PA1'-2). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long and the non-reach is out of reach. By determining the pattern (PA1'-1), the time for the variable display becomes long, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 75A to 75C, a mode in which a variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs according to the total number of reserved storages, is illustrated. However, this embodiment is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol, the first (2) When executing the variation display of the special symbol, the variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs according to the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol).

Further, in each of the deviation pattern determination tables of this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach deviation (PA2'-) regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The range of random numbers assigned to 2 and PA2'-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the rate at which the fluctuation display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (super reach loss). The appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901. In this embodiment, a mode in which the variation display is executed in the variation pattern out of super reach differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, but this embodiment illustrates the mode. Not limited to this, in consideration of the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the fluctuation display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901. It may be executed at.

The RAM 90102 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 66 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 90102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 90102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

In such a RAM 90102, a game control data holding area 90150 as shown in FIG. 76 is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. There is. The game control data holding area 90150 shown in FIG. 76 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 90151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 90151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 90151C, a game control flag setting unit 90152, and a game. It includes a control timer setting unit 90153, a game control counter setting unit 90154, and a game control buffer setting unit 90155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A and the starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 904A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and sets the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1'for determining the variation display result, the random number value MR2' for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3' for determining the variation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 90104 or the like by the CPU 90103 based on the establishment. As reserved data, it is stored until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 90151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variation display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B is still started although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. Stores the reserved data of no special figure game (special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 904B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1'for determining the variation display result, the random number value MR2' for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3' for determining the variation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 90104 or the like by the CPU 90103 based on the establishment. As reserved data, it is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 90151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variation display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 90151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 9020 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021. For example, the normal map holding storage unit 90151C associates the game ball with the hold number in the order of passing through the passage gate 9041, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 90104 or the like by the CPU 90103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4'for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 90152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control flag setting unit 90152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 90153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control timer setting unit 90153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 90154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control counter setting unit 90154 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 90154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 90103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 90154, numerical data indicating a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 90104, for example, the random number values MR1'to MR4' is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 90103 Therefore, the numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 90103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 90104, or may be extracted from the random count circuit 90104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 90155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 90155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The I / O 90105 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 66 has an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 90100 and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100. It is configured to include an output port for transmission.

As shown in FIG. 66, the effect control board 9012 provides an effect control CPU 90120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 90121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area of the effect control CPU 90120. RAM 90122, a display control unit 90123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the effect display device 905, and a random number that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 90120. The circuit 90124 and the I / O 90125 are mounted.

As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 90121 to execute the process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components. At this time, the effect control CPU 90120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 90121, the effect control CPU 90120 writes various variation data to the RAM 90122 and temporarily stores the variation data, and the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the RAM 90122. Variable data read operation to read various temporarily stored variable data, reception operation in which the effect control CPU 90120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 9012 via the I / O 90125, and the effect control CPU 90120 is I / A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 via O90125 is also performed.

The effect control CPU 90120, ROM 90121, and RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012.

The effect control board 9012 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the effect display device 905 and wiring for transmitting an effect sound signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 9013. Wiring for transmitting an illumination signal as an information signal indicating LED data is connected to the LED control board 9014.

On the side of the effect control board 9012, as in the case of the main board 9011, for example, a random number value (also referred to as an effect random number) for determining the type of various effects such as a notice effect is set.

The ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 66 stores various data tables and the like used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 90121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared by the effect control CPU 90120 for performing various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. There is.

As an example, in the ROM 90121, the effect control CPU 90120 is used to control the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, the effect display device 905, the speakers 908L, 908R, the game effect LED 909 and the decorative LED, the effect model, etc.). An effect control pattern table that stores a plurality of types of effect control patterns to be performed, a display screen displayed in the notification of various errors (abnormalities), a lighting mode of the game effect LED 909, an error notification pattern such as an output sound, and the like are stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents and the like corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the effect control pattern table may store an effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates, a notice effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like.

The effect control pattern at the time of special symbol fluctuation corresponds to a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns, and is in the period from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the derivation display of the definite special symbol which is the special symbol display result. , It is composed of data showing the control contents of various production operations such as the variation display operation of the effect symbol, the reach effect, the effect display operation in the re-lottery effect, or various effect display operations without the variation display of the effect symbol. Has been done. The notice effect control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control content of the effect operation that is the advance notice effect executed in response to the advance notice patterns in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents and the like corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

The special figure variation time effect control pattern may include, for example, a plurality of types of reach effect control patterns in which the effect mode in each reach effect is different for each variation pattern for executing the reach effect.

The RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 66 is provided with an effect control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

There are a plurality of types of effect control flag setting units that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the effect display device 905 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the effect display device 905. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, in the predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit, the first special figure start winning buffer for performing the hold display in the first hold storage display area 905D and the hold display in the second hold storage display area 905U. The second special figure start winning buffer for performing the above is set. The first special figure start winning buffer has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages of the first special figure reserved storage. The second special figure start winning buffer is provided with a storage area (buffer numbers "1" to "4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special figure reserved storage. The area corresponding to "" is provided. The data in these start winning buffers is used for the effect control described later in response to the reception of the first start opening prize designation command and the second start opening prize designation command, and the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command. It is updated in the hold effect process (S9072, see FIG. 89) in the process process, and the hold display in the first hold storage display area 905D and the second hold storage display area 905U is based on the updated start winning buffer data. Is updated.

Specifically, when the first start opening prize designation command is received based on the start winning to the first start winning opening, a round white display is displayed on the hold display in the first hold storage display area 905D. Is newly added, and when the first fluctuation start command is received based on the fact that the fluctuation of the first special figure is newly started, the highest rank among the hold displays in the first hold storage display area 905D ( The hold display is updated so that the round white display of the earliest start-winning hold memory) is erased and the other round white displays shift (move) in a given direction (eg, left). To do. Similarly, when the second start opening prize designation command is received based on the start winning to the second start winning opening, a round white display is newly added to the hold display in the second hold storage display area 905U. On the other hand, when the second fluctuation start command is received based on the fact that the fluctuation of the second special figure is newly started, the highest (first) of the reserved displays in the second reserved storage display area 905U is received. The hold display is updated so that the round white display of the start-winning hold memory) is erased and the other round white display shifts (moves) in a predetermined direction (for example, to the left).

Here, the totalization of the game balls and the display of the accessory ratio and the like on the main board 9011 of this embodiment will be described.

On the main board 9011, information on winning a game, for example, the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), and the first big prize. The number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls by winning the mouth and the second prize ball (attacker) are input, the number of launched balls is totaled, and the display monitor 9029 is the first prize ball and the first prize ball out of the total number of prize balls. The ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the two major prize openings (attackers), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting prize opening (Denchu) and the first of the total number of prize balls. The role ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the large prize opening and the second large prize opening (attacker), and the base (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. It is designed to be displayed. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of consecutive winning balls below) by winning the first prize opening and the second prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the number of prize balls by winning the 2nd starting prize opening (Denchu) and the number of prize balls by winning the 1st big winning opening and the 2nd big winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls ( It is the ratio of the following number of winning balls). The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (total number of balls won below) is based on the number of prize balls by winning the 1st prize opening and the 2nd prize opening (attacker) and the prize by winning the 2nd starting prize opening (Denchu). The number of prize balls and the prize balls by winning the prizes (first start prize, general prize) other than the first prize, the second prize (attacker), and the second start prize (electric chew). The sum of the numbers. The first large winning opening, the second large winning opening (attacker), and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable accessories, and the game ball can be won by changing the passable width of the game ball. It is a character whose assumed ratio fluctuates. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the first major winning opening, the second major winning opening (attacker), and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are fixed characters, and the game The passable width of the ball is fixed, and the expected winning ratio of the game ball is a fixed value.

As for the aggregation and calculation method of the information on the prizes of the game, the number of prize balls by winning the first starting port (Heso) and the general prize opening (Sode) in the number of 6000 prize balls (Number of general prize balls), number of ordinary electric prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls), which is the number of prize balls due to winning in the second starting prize opening (electric chew), first large prize opening and second large winning opening The number of special electric service prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls), which is the number of prize balls for winning a prize in (attacker), is totaled. The total is taken as one set, and the continuous ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60,000 pieces are calculated. In addition, the number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), and the special electric power by winning the first starting port (navel) and the general prize opening (sode) The number of prize balls (number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. There is. That is, a considerable amount (for example, several bytes) of 6000 pieces of 11 sets are stored, and the cumulative ratio (%) and combination ratio (%) of them can be calculated. As for the base, the number of game balls launched for the number of prize balls of 60,000 is totaled. The total is set as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of launched game balls is calculated.

The display monitor 9029 is a base calculated based on the 6000 consecutive ratios (%), the winning combination (%), the cumulative continuous ratio (%), the winning combination (%), and the previous 60000 prize balls ( The base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls can be switched and displayed at predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display all, but the number of prize balls by winning the first starting opening (navel) and the winning to the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls, the number of prize balls by winning the first prize opening and the second prize opening (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying the continuous ratio (%) of 6000 pieces is reflected in the winning ratio (%) of 60,000 pieces displayed thereafter, it is equivalent to 6000 pieces. There is a risk that there will be a discrepancy between the joint ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) for 60,000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (navel), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), winning the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) If the number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls are input and totaled at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, the display timing of the ratio (%) of 6000 pieces), such a discrepancy can be eliminated. Can be prevented.

A storage area for storing information regarding the winning of the game in this embodiment is provided for each set value, and is provided for each set value, such as a general winning ball, a first starting mouth prize ball, an ordinary electric service award ball, and a special electric service prize. The balls, the total prize balls, and the total hits are stored in the storage area (ring buffer) according to the set value. Therefore, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base of this embodiment can be calculated individually for each set value.

Below, as an example of the calculation method, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls by winning the second starting prize opening (Denchu) and the first and second major winning openings (attackers) The calculation method of the bonus ratio (composition ratio (%)) when the number of bonus balls acquired, which is the total number of prize balls by winning the prize, is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls means the total total number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 901. In addition, the number of winning balls for a character means the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of consecutive winning balls is the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the game medium to the attacker. The total number of hits is the cumulative number of game media hit into the pachinko gaming machine 901 before the number of prize balls reaches 60,000. Therefore, the connection ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the combination ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2). The base can be obtained by the following equation (3).

Ream ratio = [Number of consecutive characters acquired / Total number of acquired characters] x 100 ... (1)

Role ratio = [(Number of consecutive winning balls + Number of winning balls) / Total number of acquisitions] x 100 ... (2)

Base = [60,000 (total number of prize balls) / total number of hits] x 100 ... (3)

When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of winning balls is 42,000, the prize ratio is calculated as 0.70 (three digits after the decimal point) by dividing 42000 by 60,000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 901 cannot perform the calculation after the decimal point, the calculation by the following method is required.

First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning balls is multiplied by 100 to obtain 4200000. Then divide this 4200000 by 60000. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by multiplying the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be multiplied by 1000.

Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then divide 42000 by this 600. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, division may be performed by 1000.

In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the accessory ratio for a long period of time. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA60h in the storage area of 3 bytes. Similarly, 00A410h is stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of winning balls.

Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can only perform calculations between values of a maximum of 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

Here, a third calculation method obtained by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is truncated from the total number of prize balls of 00EA60h so that the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 901 becomes easy, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, for 00A410h, which is the number of acquired balls, the lower 1 byte of 10h is rounded down, and the number of acquired balls is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

Then, in the same manner as in the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, this 2 is divided by 156 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 78%.

In the third calculation method, the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 901 becomes easy, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, if the total number of prize balls and the number of winning balls are both 10 times, the error will be + 1%. That is, the error is reduced by lengthening the period for calculating the accessory ratio, and is approximated to the original value.

Further, the substrate case 90201 is made of a material having translucency, so that the main substrate 9011 and the display monitor 9029 can be visually recognized. The board case 90201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 9011 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of an electric component of the main board 9011. The display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 is arranged at a position where the heat dissipation holes are not directly in front of the main board 9011. Therefore, the heat dissipation holes do not block the visibility of the display monitor 9029. The "direct front" here means a direct front with the main board 9011 as a viewpoint, and means between an employee or the like who wants to visually recognize the main board 9011 and the main board 9011.
Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can only perform calculations between values of a maximum of 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the operation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

Here, a third calculation method obtained by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is truncated from the total number of prize balls of 00EA60h so that the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 901 becomes easy, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, for 00A410h, which is the number of acquired balls, the lower 1 byte of 10h is rounded down, and the number of acquired balls is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

Then, in the same manner as in the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, this 2 is divided by 156 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 78%.

In addition, a storage area in which information related to winning a game is stored (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (total information related to winning a game stored in a ring buffer having 10 counters having a maximum of 2 bytes), a prize ball. The total number buffer) is not initialized when the reset button is operated, and may be continuously stored. The ring buffer will be described further later. In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and if an abnormality is detected, it is initialized, or the value of the number of winning balls is larger than the value of the total number of stored prize balls, or the character is Initialization of the storage area where information related to winning a game is stored when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive winning balls is larger than the value of the number of acquired balls. Processing may be performed. Further, an error display or a warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, an error display or a warning display may be performed, or an initialization process may be performed after the error display or the warning display is performed. The error display and warning display will be described further later.

In the calculation of the winning combination (%), for example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning balls is 19876, 34321 is divided as a divisor from 19876 to calculate the ratio. 1976/34321 = 0.57912 ..., And it is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When performing calculations on the game control microcomputer 90100, it is necessary to avoid calculation with a decimal point, so the calculation formula is replaced with the following formula. In the division of 1976/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100 and the decimal point is rounded down so that 1976/343 = 57.9475 ... Since the part after the decimal point is truncated, it is calculated that the role ratio (%) is 57%, and it is displayed on the display monitor 9029. In this example, the value calculated by accurate calculation is an error on the display. There will be no.

The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (0 except for the value of the most significant bit), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 90100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, which is an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point truncated, for example, when the accurate value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display value is 69% → 70%. It is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, but even on the display of an error of 1%, the combination ratio (%) (or the connection ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error.

Further, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, so that the calculation cannot be performed when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100. Further, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. Therefore, the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor until the total number of acquired balls (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits) of a specific number or more is totaled by the counter. , Even if the display is performed, it may be notified that the error may be large by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

Further, the display monitor 9029 displays the combination ratio (%), the continuous ratio (%), and the base (%) on 7 segments, and switches each value every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). To display. In this case, for example, while the combination ratio (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium is awarded to the electric chew or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is continuously compared after 5 seconds ( If it is displayed as a value of%), there is a risk that the value of the combination ratio (%) and the value of the consecutive combination (%) will deviate. Therefore, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed.

Further, when the numerical value that can be displayed in the 7-segment is double-digit (for example, when two 7-segments are provided), 100% cannot be displayed as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. The display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 78 (A) can display a numerical value in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numerical value may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under certain conditions, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits.

In this embodiment, the sensors provided for each of the attacker and the electric chew detect that the game medium has won a prize, and the number of each prize ball is individually totaled based on the detection result. , This embodiment is not limited to this, and the detection result is obtained by using a sensor provided after the discharge passage for discharging the game medium winning the attacker and the game medium winning the electric chew merges. The number of winning balls and the number of consecutive winning balls may be totaled based on.

Hereinafter, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the display of the base will be described more specifically. In this embodiment, the main board 9011 is provided on the back surface side of the game board 902 (see FIG. 65). On the back surface side of the game board 902, in addition to the main board 9011, each peripheral board such as the effect control board 9012 is also provided.

The RAM 90102 in the main board 9011 has a gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, and a fourth. A general prize counter and a large prize counter are provided. In this embodiment, the number of winnings of the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening (attacker) is tabulated by the large winning number counter, but this embodiment is limited to this. Instead, a first large prize counter that totals the number of prizes in the first large prize opening and a second large prize counter that totals the number of prizes in the second large prize opening are individually provided. The number of winnings in the first large winning opening and the number of winnings in the second large winning opening may be totaled individually, and the total number of each of these winnings may be used as the number of winnings in the attacker.

The gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 9021. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 9022A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 9022B. The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 9026A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 9026B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 9026C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 9026D. The large prize number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 9023 and the second count switch 9024A.

A clear switch (not shown) is connected to the main board 9011. The clear switch is arranged on the back surface of the game board 902 at a position where employees and the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch, the data used for the connection ratio and the combination ratio stored in the RAM 90102, which will be described later, is cleared. The clear switch is a switch that is operated when a failure occurs in the calculation of the connection ratio or the combination ratio, or when the calculation of the connection ratio or the combination ratio has to be redone. Therefore, it is a switch that does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal connection ratio or combination ratio. When the clear switch is operated, the clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 9011 in addition to clearing the data.

As described above, the main board 9011 is provided with the RTC90106, and the current time can be detected by the RTC90106. The RTC90106 can measure a predetermined time, an elapsed time, and the like by making initial settings, but in this embodiment, the RTC90106 can measure the business hours of the amusement park.

As shown in FIG. 78 (A), the main board 9011 is housed in the board case 90201. A caulking pin 9011B is attached to the board case 90201. By providing the caulking pin 9011B, the main board 9011 is completely enclosed in the board case 90201, and fraudulent acts on the main board 9011 are prevented. The substrate case 90201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter, also referred to as a “crimped substrate case”).

The display monitor 9029 is provided on the main board 9011. Further, a sealing sticker 9011S is attached to the substrate case 90201 to prove that the main substrate 9011 is sealed. The sealing seal 9011S is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 90201. The sealing sticker 9011S is arranged at a position away from the main board 9011, and is arranged at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 9029 is obstructed, such as directly in front of the display monitor 9029. As described above, the display monitor 9029 is arranged at a position not hidden by the sealing sticker 9011S.

The display monitor 9029 includes a first display unit 9029A, a second display unit 9029B, a third display unit 9029C, a fourth display unit 9029D, and a fifth display unit 9029E. The first display unit 9029A to the fifth display unit 9029E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the shape of "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 9029A to the fifth display unit 9029E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in a very short cycle.

On the display monitor 9029, each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 78 (B) is displayed. The aggregated set values (1 to 3) are displayed on the first display unit 9029A of the first digit, and the aggregation period is displayed on the second display unit 9029B of the second digit and the third display unit 9029C of the third digit. Then, the numerical value is displayed as a percentage on the fourth display unit 9029D of the fourth digit and the fifth display unit 9029E of the fifth digit. In the display No. 1, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed, and in the display No. 2, the short-term combination ratio is displayed. Display No. 3 displays the total cumulative ratio, and display No. 4 displays the total cumulative combination ratio. Further, in the display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls is displayed, and in the display No. 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls is displayed. Will be done.

The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for obtaining the total cumulative total means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the continuous ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning a prize in the big winning opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening in the big hit game state to the total number of prize balls. May be good. Further, the base may be calculated individually for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." Is displayed on the second display unit 9029B and the third display unit 9029C, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. "Y7." Is displayed on the display unit 9029B and the third display unit 9029C. When the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 9029D and the fifth display unit 9029E, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. If so, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 9029D and the fifth display unit 9029E.

When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the second display unit 9029B and the third display unit 9029C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, "A7." Is displayed on the second display unit 9029B and the third display unit 9029C. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the 4th display unit 9029D and the 5th display unit 9029E, and the total cumulative ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 9029D and the fifth display unit 9029E.

When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." Is displayed on the second display unit 9029B and the third display unit 9029C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. "B6." Is displayed on the 9029B and the third display unit 9029C. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 9029D and the fifth display unit 9029E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 9029D and the fifth display unit 9029E.

The main board 9011 has a first large winning opening, a second large winning opening (attacker), a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a first general winning opening in calculating the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. The number of game balls that have entered the 4th general winning opening and the number of game balls that have been discharged from the discharge port are totaled. In the main processing, the CPU 90103 includes a gate switch 9021, a first start port switch 9022A and a second start port switch 9022B, a first count switch 9023, a second count switch 9024A, and a first general winning opening switch 9026A to a fourth general. Switch processing is performed to confirm the status (presence / absence of detection signal) of each switch of the winning port switch 9026D and the discharging port switch 9070.

In this switch processing, it is specified which approach region the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. Then, when the detection signal is output from the gate switch 9021, the value of the gate passing number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B, the detection signal is output. The values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the first count switch 9023 and the second count switch 9024A, the value of the large winning number counter is added. When a detection signal is output from the first general winning opening switch 9026A, the second general winning opening switch 9026B, the third general winning opening switch 9026C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 9026D, the first general winning opening counter, The values of the 2nd general winning number counter, the 3rd general winning number counter, and the 4th general winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the outlet switch 9070, the value of the driving number counter is added. By doing so, the number of game balls entering each entry area (the number of game balls winning into each winning opening) is totaled. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 90102.

In this way, the step for totaling the number of game balls entering each approach area is executed together in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each approach area (switch state confirmation process). By including it in the switch processing), it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without executing a separate counting program, that is, without causing the problem of capacity shortage due to the increase in the number of execution programs. It has become.

The CPU 90103 of the main board 9011 calculates the number of winning balls by winning each winning opening based on the total number of winning balls in each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 90102 for each winning opening. Let me. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize for the winning opening by the number of winnings for the winning opening. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is predetermined for each winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 79, the number of prize balls for each winning opening classified here is the general winning opening prize ball (the winning ball from the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening (sode)). 1st start winning prize ball (prize ball by winning the 1st starting prize opening (heso)), ordinary electric role prize ball (prize ball by winning the electric chew), special electric role prize ball (winning to the attacker) It is the number of prize balls. The RAM 90102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of game balls hit. In the CPU 90103, the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the number of game balls won in the first starting port are individually totaled, but the number of winning balls in the general winning opening and the first starting port are totaled individually. The number of game ball winnings may be aggregated. In addition, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls of the first starting opening prize ball are calculated separately, but the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the first starting opening prize ball The number of prize balls may be calculated together.

The RAM 90102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls and the number of shots. The ring buffer includes ten first storage areas to tenth storage areas including a counter of a maximum of 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer includes a 0th storage area including a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. The number of prize balls for each winning opening, which increases as the game progresses, is added to the 0th storage area. The 11 storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

Further, the RAM 90102 is provided with a storage area of the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area and the total total number for each winning opening. There is. The total storage area for 10 sets and the total storage area are composed of counters of up to 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60,000 data can be stored with a margin. I can remember.

In addition, the RAM 90102 has a ratio storage area for storing 10 sets and the total cumulative combination ratio and ratio, a base for 10 sets (base 2), and a base for the previous 10 sets (base 1). It has a base storage area for storing. In the CPU 90103 of the main board 9011, the winning ratios and reciprocal ratios for 10 sets and the total cumulative total are calculated based on the number of prize balls based on the number of winning balls to each winning opening for 10 sets and the total cumulative total. And the total cumulative combination ratio and connection ratio are stored in the connection ratio combination storage area. The continuous ratio combination storage area for storing the combination ratios and the total totals of 10 sets and the total cumulative ratio is composed of a counter having a maximum of 1 byte. The winning ratios and linkage ratios for 10 sets and the total cumulative total can be stored with a margin at a counter of up to 1 byte, for example, when storing them as integers.

Further, in the CPU 90103 of the main board 9011, the base for 10 sets is calculated based on the number of hits for the number of winnings of the game balls into each winning opening for 10 sets, and the base for 10 sets (base 2) and the previous time are calculated. The base (base 1) calculated by the number of hits for the number of winnings of the game ball into each winning opening for 10 sets of the above is stored in the base storage area. Base 1 and base 2 can be stored with a margin by a counter of up to 1 byte, for example, when storing as an integer.

Here, the memory space of the CPU 90103 of the main board 9011 will be described. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 90103 has a memory space for accessing the above-mentioned built-in registers, ROM 90101, RAM 90102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 80, the address / data signal line of the ROM 90101 is a ROM area of the memory space (in this embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number; the same applies hereinafter)). Of these, 0000H to 2FBFH. 2FC0H to 2FFFH are assigned to the program management area), and the CPU 90103 specifies this ROM area to read data from the ROM 90101. Further, in this embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

Further, the address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to the register area (FE00H to FEBFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 90103 reads data from the built-in register or goes to the register via this register area. Write the data of.

Further, the address / data signal line of the RAM 90102 is assigned to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 90103 specifies this RWM area to read data from the RAM 90102 or to the RAM 90102. Write data. The other areas of the memory space (3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH in this embodiment) are regarded as unused areas.

Further, the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 90102 (in this embodiment, a 16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH) is composed of a RAM control area, an unused area, a RAM data area, and other areas, as shown in FIG. Has been done. In the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to this RAM control area, instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 90103 and supplementary data (operator) required for the CPU 90103 to execute each instruction are used. Data for the configured control program (sometimes simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored, and reference data referred to by the above control program is stored in the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the RAM data area. (For example, the above-mentioned various lottery data) are temporarily stored.

Further, data used for displaying the connection ratio and the combination ratio is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the other area. For example, the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the unused area is provided with a storage area for storing the total number of prize balls for each winning opening and a storage area for the total cumulative total. Further, in the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the other areas, an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having 1st to 10th storage areas, and the number of winning balls for each winning opening (10 sets). A storage area for the sum of minutes) and a storage area for 10 sets of joint ratios are provided. The storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the other area store data having different starting addresses of the subroutines.

In this embodiment, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each of the above-mentioned data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data) can be stored. , Management data) is data with a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored in the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. are doing.

Further, the main board 9011 controls the display monitor 9029 to display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Here, the main board 9011 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 82 (A) is a time chart showing the display time of the items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 82 (A), when the display on the display monitor 9029 is started, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1, as shown in FIG. 82 (B-1), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 9029A, and the character “y” is displayed on the second display unit 9029B. Is displayed, and the characters "6." are displayed on the third display unit 9029C. Further, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 9029D and the 5th display unit 9029E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 9029D, and the character "1." is displayed on the fifth display unit 9029E.

When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 82 (B-2), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 9029A, and the character "y" is displayed on the second display unit 9029B. Is displayed, and the characters "7." are displayed on the third display unit 9029C. Further, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 9029D and the 5th display unit 9029E. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 9029D, and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display unit 9029E.

When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 82 (B-3), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 9029A, and the set value "1" is displayed on the second display unit 9029B. The characters are displayed, and the characters "6." are displayed on the third display unit 9029C. Further, the total cumulative ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 9029D and the 5th display unit 9029E. For example, when the total cumulative ratio is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the fourth display unit 9029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 9029E.

When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative winning combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 82 (B-4), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 9029A, and the set value "1" is displayed on the second display unit 9029B. The characters are displayed, and the characters "7." are displayed on the third display unit 9029C. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 9029D and the 5th display unit 9029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the fourth display unit 9029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 9029E.

When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 82 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of the display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 82 (B-5), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 9029A, and the character "b" is displayed on the second display unit 9029B. It is displayed, and the character "L." is displayed on the third display unit 9029C. Further, the fourth display unit 9029D and the fifth display unit 9029E display the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 9029D, and the character "0." is displayed on the fifth display unit 9029E.

When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 82 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 82 (B-6), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 9029A, and the character "b" is displayed on the second display unit 9029B. It is displayed, and the characters "6." are displayed on the third display unit 9029C. Further, the fourth display unit 9029D and the fifth display unit 9029E display the base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 9029D, and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display unit 9029E.

Then, when the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 82 (B-1). The short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. After that, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 to the display of base 2 of display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. Further, as for the display color, only the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 is red. In this way, the display monitor 9029 switches between the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 every 5 seconds for display.

Further, the display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 82 (A) to 82 (C). Based on the operation of, the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 display when the set value is "1", and when the set value is "2" Short-term ream ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative rendezvous, total cumulative role ratio, display of base 1 and base 2, short-term ream ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative ream ratio, total cumulative total when the set value is "3" It is possible to sequentially change the display of the role ratio, base 1, and base 2. If the display changeover switch 9030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "1", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 9029A is updated to "2", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 9029D and the 5th display unit 9029E. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "2".

In addition, when the display changeover switch 9030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "2", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 9029A is updated to "3", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 9029D and the 5th display unit 9029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "3".

Then, when the display changeover switch 9030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "3", the first The numerical value displayed on the 1 display unit 9029A is updated to "1", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 9029D and the 5th display unit 9029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "1".

In the display monitor 9029 of this embodiment, a mode in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed is illustrated, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and the display monitor is not limited to this. In 9029, among these ratios, combination ratios, and bases, only a numerical value of 1 or only a numerical value of any 2 may be displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, a mode in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of prize balls given, is calculated and the combination ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 9029 is illustrated. However, this embodiment is not limited to this, and the display monitor 9029 may display the history of the number of prize balls given without calculating the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Good.

Further, in this embodiment, on the display monitor 9029, only the short-term continuous ratio is displayed in red, and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed in green. , This embodiment is not limited to this, and the short-term consecutive ratio and short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio and the total cumulative combination ratio are displayed in the same color, and the short-term consecutive ratio for base 1 and base 2, It may be displayed in the same color different from the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio.

Further, in the main board 9011, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Further, the storage area of the total sum and the total total of 10 sets and the storage area of the continuous ratio combination storage area for storing the combination ratio and the connection ratio of the 10 sets and the total total are updated, respectively.

In the update in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 83, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is "27", "81", "120", "36", "225", "87", and "66", respectively. "117" "45" "21". At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 100 millionth area to the 10th storage area is "27", "81", and " Update to 120, "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", and "21". Further, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to "0", and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is erased.

When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be erased once and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new number of prize balls may be stored by overwriting the stored number of prize balls.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 9011, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is started, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. As shown in FIG. 84, when the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 executes the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, and then starts the game control main process after Sa901. To do. In the game control main process, the CPU 90103 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 90103 first sets interrupt prohibition (Sa901). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (Sa902), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (Sa903). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), etc.) (Sa904), the RAM 90102 is made accessible. Set (Sa905). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 90103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

Next, the CPU 90103 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (Sa906). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 90103 executes a normal initialization process (Sa909 to Sa9013, cold start process).

When the clear switch is not on, it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process (see FIG. 86) has been executed based on whether or not the check data is stored in the predetermined backup area (Sa907). ..

When the backup data is stored, the CPU 90103 checks the data in the backup RAM area (Sa908). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in Sa908, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and saved by the same process in the power failure detection process. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 90103 performs a game state recovery process (processes of Sa9041 and Sa9042) for returning the game control microcomputer 90100 to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 90101 is set as a pointer (Sa9041), the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 90102), and the process proceeds to Sa9014. (Sa9042). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of Sa9041 and Sa9042, the saved contents remain as they are for the part of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, regulatory member state specification flag, initialized flag, etc.), output of the output port. The area where the state is saved (output port buffer), the part where the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, and so on.

If the clear switch is on (Sa906; Y), backup data is not stored (Sa907; N), or the parity check result is not normal (Sa908; N), initialization is performed. Execute the process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 90103 first performs a RAM clear process to clear data other than the set values stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 90102 (Sa909). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 90102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 90101 is set in the pointer (Sa9010), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (Sa9011).

By the processing of Sa9010 and Sa9011, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively processing according to the control state are set to initial values. Is set.

Further, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the lock switch 9051 is ON (Sa9012). When the lock switch 9051 is not ON (Sa9012; N), the process proceeds to Sa9014, and when the lock switch 9051 is ON (Sa9012; Y), the setting change process (Sa9013) is executed. The operation of the changeover switch 9052 and the lock switch 9051 is accepted, and the set value can be changed. In the setting change process, it is possible to check the setting status of the set value on the display of the display monitor 9029. Then, after finishing the setting change process (Sa9013), the process proceeds to Sa9014. In this embodiment, a mode in which the setting change process is executed on the condition that the lock switch 9051 is ON is illustrated, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and further, the gaming machine. The setting change process may be executed on condition that the usage frame 903 is open, that is, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be changed. Further, when a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the setting change process, the CPU 90103 may output a command for notifying the effect control board 9012 of the set value. .. In this way, when the CPU 90103 can output a command for notifying the set value set to the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 can recognize the newly set set value. Therefore, at a specific timing of the game (for example, during variable display or at the end of a big hit game), a notification effect of a set value of the pachinko game machine 901 (for example, a definite notification effect of a set value 1) or a pachinko machine It is possible to execute a set value suggestion effect that suggests a set value of the gaming machine 901.

Further, in this embodiment, a mode in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be changed by executing the setting change process by the CPU 90103 is illustrated, but this embodiment is not limited to this. When executing the setting change process, the CPU 90103 may output a command for notifying the effect control board 9012 that the setting change process is being executed. In this way, when the CPU 90103 outputs a command for notifying the effect control board 9012 that the setting change process is being executed, it indicates that the CPU 90103 is executing the setting change process for the effect control. Since the CPU 90120 can be recognized, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is being changed by displaying an image on the effect display device 905, outputting sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, emitting light from the game effect LED 909, and the like. It is possible to notify the surroundings of this.

For example, while the setting change process is being executed, the effect display device 905 displays characters such as "setting is being changed" on a black background, and the speakers 908L and 908R repeatedly output voices such as "setting is being changed". Other displays (for example, the effect symbol, the small symbol, the fourth symbol, the right-handed display, etc.) on the effect display device 905 may not be displayed, but these effect symbols, the small symbols, the fourth symbol, and the right-handed display may be hidden. Etc. may be displayed during the execution of the setting change process. Further, since the variable display of the special symbol or the normal symbol is not executed during the setting change processing of this embodiment, the first special symbol display 904A, the second special symbol display 904B, and the normal symbol display 9020 are executed. However, this embodiment is not limited to this, and the first special symbol display 904A, the second special symbol display 904B, and the normal symbol display are displayed during the execution of the setting change process. In 9020, a symbol indicating that the setting change process is being executed or a symbol indicating a specific display result (for example, off) may be stopped and displayed.

In this embodiment, a symbol indicating that the setting change processing is being executed on the first special symbol display 904A, the second special symbol display 904B, and the normal symbol display 9020 during the execution of the setting change processing, and An example is an example in which a symbol indicating a specific display result (for example, off) is stopped and displayed, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and the first hold indicator is displayed during the execution of the setting change process. The 9025A, the second hold indicator 9025B, and the normal figure hold indicator 9025C may be made to emit light (for example, for repeating blinking) in a manner indicating that the setting change process is being executed. Further, the pachinko game machine 901 is instructed to display the number of rounds during the big hit game (round number display) and to instruct the player to launch the game ball into a specific area of the game area (for example, the game area on the right side). When a display (right-handed display) or the like is provided, these displays may be made to emit light in a manner indicating that the setting change process is being executed.

Further, in this embodiment, when the clear switch is on (Sa906; Y), when the backup data is not stored (Sa907; N), or when the result of the parity check is not normal (Sa908; N). An example of a mode in which a determination of whether or not the lock switch 9051 is ON (Sa9012) and a setting change process (Sa9013) are executed after the RAM 90122 is cleared (Sa909) has been illustrated. When the backup data is not stored (Sa907; N) or the result of the parity check is not normal (Sa908; N), the pachinko gaming machine 901 is disconnected in an abnormal state. This is an event that can occur when the power is turned on in an abnormal state, so only when the RAM 90122 is cleared (Sa909) after it is determined that the clear switch is on (Sa906; Y). The determination of whether or not the lock switch 9051 is ON (Sa9012) and the setting change process (Sa9013) may be executed. That is, when the backup data is not stored (Sa907; N) or the result of the parity check is not normal (Sa908; N), the RAM 90122 is cleared (Sa909) while being set in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The set value itself may be inherited.

Further, in the above embodiment, a mode in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be changed by executing the setting change process by the CPU 90103 is illustrated, but this embodiment is not limited to this. The CPU 90103 may be able to confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 from the display monitor 9029, while being able to execute a process in which the set value cannot be changed (hereinafter, setting confirmation process). When the CPU 90103 can execute the setting confirmation process in this way, the CPU 90103 may output a command for notifying the effect control board 9012 that the setting confirmation process is being executed. In this way, when the CPU 90103 outputs a command for notifying the effect control board 9012 that the setting confirmation process is being executed, it indicates that the CPU 90103 is executing the setting confirmation process for the effect control. Since the CPU 90120 can be recognized, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is being changed by displaying an image on the effect display device 905, outputting sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, emitting light from the game effect LED 909, and the like. It is possible to notify the surroundings of this.

The setting confirmation process may be executed on condition that the lock switch 9051 is turned on after the CPU 90103 executes the processes of Sa901 to Sa9016 of the main process (see FIG. 84). For example, the setting confirmation process may be performed. During the variable display of the special symbol, during the big hit game, during the small hit game, if the variable display of the special symbol is not executed but the hold memory exists, the prize ball is paid out for a predetermined period after the error is detected. Even if the lock switch 9051 is turned on during a predetermined period such as waiting for the game ball to enter the jackpot game start gate (only when the pachinko game machine 901 is provided with the jackpot game start gate). The setting confirmation process may not be executed.

Further, after the CPU 90103 executes the setting confirmation process and displays the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 on the display monitor 9029, the set value is not switched to OFF of the lock switch 9051, that is, the set value on the display monitor 9029. The game may be enabled in the state where is set.

After executing Sa9042 and Sa9013, or when it is determined that the lock switch is not ON (Sa9012; N), in Sa9014, the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 90102 is read, and the read value is read by the pachinko gaming machine. It is set as a setting value of 901.

Next, the CPU 90103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 90104 (Sa9015). The CPU 90103 makes settings for causing the random number circuit 90104 to update the value of the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result, for example, by executing the process according to the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in Sa9016, the CPU 90103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (Sa9016). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 2 ms.

Next, the CPU 90103 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (Sa9018) and the initial value random number update process (Sa9019). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibited state is set (Sa9017), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. (Sa9020). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and is for display. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to do. Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 90100 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number is one lap (normal symbol hit judgment random number taking). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 9029 in the setting change process (Sa9013) will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 85 (A) and 85 (B), the power is turned off by the operation of a pachinko / pachislot clerk when the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, the base, etc. are displayed on the display monitor 9029. When (power is cut off), the supply of electric power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, and the display on the display monitor 9029 ends. If the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening is open during the big hit game or the small hit game at the timing when the power is turned off, the power supply to the solenoids 9082 and 9083 is stopped. As a result, the first prize opening and the second prize opening are closed. Further, when the power is turned off, the supply of electric power to the solenoid 9085 is also stopped, so that the regulating member 90721 changes from the regulated state to the allowable state. That is, when the game ball is retained (stored) on the regulated member 90721 in the regulated state at the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is turned off, the game is played by changing the regulated member 90721 from the regulated state to the allowable state. The ball passes through the third count switch 9024B or the fourth count switch 9024C and is ejected from the second special variable winning ball device 907B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (C), when the clerk of the amusement park or the like turns on the power while operating the clear switch (in the case of Sa906 of the main process and Y), the lock switch 9051 is turned on. The setting change process (Sa9013) is executed by the CPU 90103 on the condition (Y in Sa9012 of the main process), and the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 90102 is set in the display monitor 9029 (more accurately, the first display unit 9029A). Is displayed.

In the state where the set value is displayed on the first display unit 9029A, as shown in FIG. 85 (D), the CPU 90103 detects every time the operation of the setting changeover switch 9052 by a clerk of the amusement park or the like is detected. The numerical values displayed on the first display unit 9029A are sequentially updated (for example, updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → ... Every time the setting changeover switch 9052 is operated).

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (E), the CPU 90103 sets the set value displayed on the first display unit 9029A of the RAM 90102 based on the detection of the pressing operation of the lock switch 9051 by the clerk of the amusement park or the like. Store in the backup area (update storage). At this time, the CPU 90103 blinks the first display unit 9029A to notify the clerk of the amusement park that the new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 90102. When the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 90102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is turned off) in FIG. 85A, the big winning opening is opened again. After that, the CPU 90103 ends the setting change process based on the lock switch 9051 being turned off by the operation of the clerk of the game hall, and the game is possible by executing the process after Sa9014, that is, the fluctuation. The display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the fluctuation pattern, the payout of prize balls, etc. are ready to be executed.

In the setting change process of this embodiment, a mode of displaying the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 90102 is illustrated as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 9029, but this embodiment is limited to this. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 9029 in the setting change process is the setting value most advantageous for the player (“1” in this embodiment) or the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The value (“3” in this embodiment) may be displayed.

When the CPU 90103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 86. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 86 is started, the CPU 90103 first executes the power failure detection process (S9010). Then, by executing a predetermined switch process, the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, the first count switch 9023, the second count switch 9024A, and the third through the switch circuit 90110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the count switch 9023B, the fourth count switch 9023C, and the discharge port switch 9070 is determined (S9011).

Subsequently, when a game ball wins in any of the general winning opening 9050A to the general winning opening 9050D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first major winning opening, and the second major winning opening 90712, That is, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, the first count switch 9023, the second count switch 9024A, the first general winning opening switch 9026A, the second general winning opening switch 9026B, the third general winning opening switch. When a detection signal is input from the 9026C and the fourth general winning opening switch 9026D, the winning ball processing (S9012) for setting the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning by each detection signal is executed.

Next, the CPU 90103 displays the winning information processing (S9013) for calculating the winning information such as the winning combination, the continuous ratio, and the base, and the winning information such as the winning combination, the continuous ratio, and the base calculated by the winning information processing. The winning information display control process (S9014) to be displayed in is performed. After that, by executing a predetermined main side error process (S9015), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability fluctuation information, and payout information supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901 is output. (S9016).

Following the information output processing, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number value MR1'and the random number values MR1'to MR4' used on the main board 9011 side by software is executed. (S9017). After that, the CPU 90103 executes a special symbol process process (S9018). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol are updated. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation on the display 904B and set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball unit 907 according to a predetermined procedure.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (S9019). The CPU 90103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 9020 by executing the normal symbol process processing, and is movable in the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. It enables the tilting motion setting of the wing piece.

After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 90103 executes the command control process to transmit the control command from the main board 9011 to the control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 9012 (S9020). As an example of these, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 90105, corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 9012, set the predetermined control data in the output port of the effect control INT signal and turn on the effect control INT signal for a predetermined time. By turning it off after the state is set, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the settings in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

In the command control process of S9020, a command for notifying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is transmitted, or a command for notifying that the fluctuation pattern or the fluctuation display is completed, etc. The set value may be periodically notified to the effect control board 9012 by including the information of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the existing command of. Further, the effect control board 9012 (effect control CPU 90120) receives these commands from the main board 9011 to execute an effect suggesting a set value at various timings such as during variable display or during a jackpot game. You may.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S9018 shown in FIG. 86 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (S9021). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 90103 selects and executes any of the processes S9022 to S9031 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152.

In the start winning process of S9021, it is determined whether or not there is a first start winning or a second starting winning by the first starting port switch 9022A or the second starting port switch 9022B, and if there is a winning, the variation display result determination is made. Random value MR1'for jackpot type determination, random number value MR2' for jackpot type determination, random number value MR3'for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted, and in the case of the first start winning, the first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A It is stored at the highest level of the empty entry, and in the case of the second start winning, it is stored at the highest level of the empty entry in the second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B. In the start winning process, when a start winning is generated, a setting for transmitting a first starting opening winning designation command and a second starting winning designation command to the effect control board 9012 is also executed. The first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command are output to the effect control board 9012 when the CPU 90103 executes the command control process (S9020).

The special symbol normal processing of S9022 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol are based on the presence or absence of the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 90151A and the second special symbol reservation storage unit 90151B. The display 904B determines whether or not to start the special figure game. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol or the effect symbol is created based on the display result determination table (see FIG. 7) according to the set value and the numerical data indicating the random value MR1'for determining the variable display result. Whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, the definite special symbol (big hit symbol or the big hit symbol) in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B corresponds to the variation display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Either a small hit symbol or a missed symbol) is set. In the special symbol normal processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is determined in advance.

The variation pattern setting process of S9023 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are set using numerical data indicating a random number value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the fluctuation display result is a "big hit". It includes processing to determine one of them. The fluctuation pattern is determined by using any of the fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 74 to 75 according to the set value, the fluctuation display result, and the jackpot type. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2".

By the special symbol normal processing of S9022 and the variation pattern setting process of S9023, the variation pattern including the variation display time of the confirmed special symbol, the special symbol, and the effect symbol, which is the variation display result of the special symbol, is determined. That is, in the special symbol normal processing and the fluctuation pattern setting processing, the random value MR1'for determining the fluctuation display result, the random value MR2'for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern are used. It includes a process of determining a variable display mode of the effect symbol.

The special symbol variation process of S9024 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change process, the process of setting the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. For example, every time the special symbol variation processing of S9024 is executed, the special symbol variation timer value, which is a stored value in the special symbol variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 90153, is subtracted or added by 1, and the first Regardless of whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure on the special symbol display 904A or a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display 904B, it is elapsed by a common timer. Time is measured. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation processing of S9024 includes the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 904B. It suffices if the processing is such that the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game using the above is controlled by a common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop processing of S9025 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, and the confirmed special symbol that is the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derivated). It includes a process to set the settings. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 is on, and if the jackpot flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". Will be done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off, it is further determined whether or not the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 is on, and the small hit flag is on. In this case, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7". If both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The jackpot release preprocessing of S9026 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In this big hit pre-opening process, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", etc., the process of starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the first big winning opening to be in the open state is performed. Etc. are included. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period for keeping the first big winning opening open is set according to whether the big hit type is "big hit A", "big hit B", or "big hit C". May be good. As an example, regardless of the jackpot type, the upper limit of the period for opening the first big winning opening is set to "29 seconds", and the number of opening of the first big winning opening, which is the upper limit of the number of rounds to be executed, is set. By setting "5 times" for "big hit A", "10 times" for "big hit B", and "15 times" for "big hit C", the jackpot state is set. Just do it. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The processing during the jackpot opening of S9027 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the first big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 9023, and the like are used. , It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the first prize opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the first prize-winning door to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is set to "6" after executing a process of stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the first prize-winning door 90701. Is updated to.

The jackpot end processing of S9028 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this jackpot end processing, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by the effect device such as the effect display device 905, the speakers 908L, 908R, and the game effect LED 909. It includes a process of waiting until the elapse of the game, a process of setting various settings (setting of a time reduction flag) for starting a time reduction control in response to the end of the jackpot game state, and the like. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

Specifically, in the jackpot end processing, the type of jackpot executed is specified. Then, when the specified jackpot type is "big hit A", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" without setting the time saving flag. When the specified jackpot type is "big hit B", the time saving flag is set and the initial count value ("20" in this embodiment) corresponding to "big hit B" is set in the time saving number counter and the special figure process. Update the value of the flag to "0". If the specified jackpot type is "big hit C", the time reduction flag is set and the initial count value ("100" in this embodiment) corresponding to "big hit C" is set in the time reduction counter. Figure Update the process flag value to "0".

The small hit release preprocessing of S9029 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this small hit opening pre-processing, based on the fact that the variation display result is "small hit", etc., the execution of the round is started in the small hit game state and the second big winning opening 90712 is opened. It includes processing to make settings. At this time, for example, based on the fact that the variable display result is "small hit", the upper limit of the period for opening the second big winning opening 90712 is set to "1 second", and the upper limit of the number of times to execute the round is set. By setting the number of times the second large winning opening 90712 is opened to "1 time", the small hit state may be set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8".

In this embodiment, the number of times the second large winning opening 90712 is opened in the small hit state is set to "1 time", and the upper limit of the period during which the second large winning opening 90712 is opened is set to "1 second". Although illustrated, this embodiment is not limited to this, and the number of times the second large winning opening 90712 is opened in the small hit state may be two or more times, and the second large number may be opened. The upper limit of the period during which the winning opening 90712 is opened may be a period other than "1 second" as long as the game ball can win a prize in the second large winning opening 90712.

The small hit opening process of S9030 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. In this small hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the second big winning opening 90712 is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the second count switch 9024A, etc. Based on this, a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the second special winning opening 90712 from the open state to the closed state is included. Then, when returning the second prize opening 90712 to the closed state, after executing a process of stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9083 for the second prize opening door 90711, the value of the special figure process flag is set to ". Updated to 9 ”.

The small hit end process of S9031 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit end process, a waiting period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed by the effect device such as the effect display device 905, the speakers 908L, 908R, and the game effect LED 909. It includes processing that waits until the time elapses. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

Next, the operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 starts executing the main process. In the main process, first, an initialization process is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 2 ms) of the effect control (S9051). After that, the effect control CPU 90120 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S9052). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on) in the main process, the effect control CPU 90120 clears the flag (S9053) and executes the following process.

The effect control CPU 90120 first analyzes the received effect control command, and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: S9054). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 9011 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 90122. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIG. 67) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs the effect control process process (S9055). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the effect display device 905 is executed.

Next, an effect random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating an effect random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number is executed (S9056), and then the process proceeds to S9052.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (S9055) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a hold effect process for executing control of the effect related to the hold display and the active display (S9072). In the hold effect processing in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 receives the first start port winning designation command and the second start opening winning designation command, and is based on the fact that the first hold storage display area 905D and the second start opening winning designation command are received. It is possible to display the hold display in the active display area 905F based on the update of the hold display in the hold storage display area 905U and the reception of the first fluctuation start designation command and the second fluctuation start designation command. Further, in the hold effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 can execute the first start winning effect and the second start winning effect.

As shown in FIGS. 90 (A) and 90 (B), the first start winning effect is that the hold display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 905D and the active display is displayed in the active display area 905F. In the variable display, when a start prize is generated at the first start prize opening, the hold display is moved and displayed from the character image C toward the new hold display display position in the first hold storage display area 905D. Is. It should be noted that the moving display of the hold display for the first start winning effect is the position (hold in the first hold storage display area 905D) determined in advance based on the number of stored first special figures at the start of the first start winning effect. It ends by moving to a position (determined according to the number of memories).

Further, the second start winning effect is, as shown in FIGS. 90 (C) and 90 (D), in the state where the number of reserved memories is 0 and the variable display is not executed, the first start winning opening is used. This is an effect of moving and displaying the active display from the character image C to the active display area 905F via the first hold storage display area 905D when a start winning is generated.

After that, the effect control CPU 90120 performs any process of S9073 to S9082 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed.

Fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S9073): It is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 90100. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern specification command is received in the command analysis process. If the variation pattern specification command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (S9074).

Effect symbol variation start process (S9074): Control is performed so that the effect symbol variation is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S9075).

Processing during effect symbol change (S9075): Controls the switching timing of each change state (fluctuation speed) constituting the change pattern, and monitors the end of the change time. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S9076).

Effect symbol fluctuation stop processing (S9076): Control to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol) based on the reception of the effect control command (symbol confirmation command) instructing to stop all symbols. Do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S9077), the small hit display process (S9800), or the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S9073).

Big hit display process (S9077): After the end of the fluctuation time, the effect display device 905 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot game in-game process (S9078).

Process during jackpot game (S9078): Control during jackpot game. For example, when a designated command during the opening of the large winning opening or a designated command after opening the large winning opening is received, the display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 905 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (S9079).

Big hit end effect processing (S9079): The effect display device 905 performs display control to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S9073).

Small hit display process (S9800): After the end of the fluctuation time, the effect display device 905 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of a small hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit in-game process (S9081).

Small hit game in-process (S9081): Control during the small hit game. For example, when a designated command during the opening of the large winning opening or a designated command after opening the large winning opening is received, the display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 905 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect process (S9082).

Small hit end effect processing (S9082): The effect display device 905 performs display control to notify the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S9073) or the jackpot display process (S9077).

In this embodiment, when the above-mentioned first start winning effect is executed, the first hold storage display is performed by ending the variation display and starting a new variation display during the execution of the first start winning effect. The number of pending displays displayed in area 905D may change (decrease). In such a case, as shown in FIGS. 91 (A) to 91 (E), the movement destination (stop position) in the first hold storage display area 905D of the hold display of the first start winning effect target is redetermined. After that, the first start winning effect may be continued.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 91 (A) to 91 (E), the end of the variation display and the start of a new variation display during the execution of the first start winning effect toward the hold 4 display position. When the hold display displayed in the first hold storage display area 905D is shifted based on this (the hold 3 display position of the first hold storage display area 905D based on the fact that the number of hold storages in the first special figure is two). (When the hold display is no longer displayed), after redetermining the move destination in the first hold storage display area 905D of the hold display for the first start prize effect target to the hold 3 display position, the first start prize effect Should be continued.

In addition, during a specific effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a big hit, such as a reach effect during a change in super reach, executing the first start winning effect can draw the player's attention to the reach effect. It will disappear. Therefore, in the hold effect processing in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 (A) and 92 (B), the first start winning opening is set during the execution of a specific effect such as during the reach effect during the fluctuation of the super reach. When a new start prize is generated, the first start prize effect is not executed, and the new hold display is additionally displayed in the first hold storage display area 905D. It is possible to prevent the reach production from becoming less interesting.

In addition, the second invention shown below is also included in the said embodiment. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-2010902 has a problem that it is difficult to grasp the state of the gaming machine. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention to solve the problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901) that can play a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the setting change process of S90a13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to the setting value 3).
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 87) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 9050A to general winning opening 9050D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 90712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes the prize ball processing of S9012) and
An information display means (for example, a display monitor 9029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means, and
With
The information display means can display predetermined information according to a set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 82, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 9029).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the state of the game machine.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the second invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-2010902.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901) that can play a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the setting change process of S90a13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to the setting value 3).
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 87) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 9050A to general winning opening 9050D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 90712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes the prize ball processing of S9012) and
An information display means (for example, a display monitor 9029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means, and
With
The information display means can display predetermined information according to a set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 82, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on a display monitor 9029).
Further, a hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the start winning process shown in FIG. 87) capable of storing a plurality of information related to the variable display as hold storage, and
A plurality of hold displays corresponding to each of the plurality of hold storages stored in the hold storage means are displayed at a plurality of corresponding positions corresponding to the number of hold storages (for example, hold 1 display position in the first hold storage display area 905D). It can be displayed at each of the 4 display positions on hold).
Based on the fact that the hold memory corresponding to the variable display is erased by executing the new variable display, the hold display corresponding to the hold memory other than the erased hold memory is newly held after the hold memory is erased. It is provided with a hold display means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes the hold effect process shown in FIG. 89) that can be displayed at a corresponding position corresponding to the number of stored items.
The hold display means
Appearance of hold display from a predetermined appearance position (for example, character image C displayed in the upper left portion of the effect display device 905) to a corresponding position corresponding to the number of hold storages based on the newly stored hold memory. The display (for example, the first start winning effect) can be executed,
Based on the fact that the number of reserved storages has changed due to the execution of a new variable display during the execution of the appearance display, it is possible to set the corresponding position for the running appearance display to the corresponding position corresponding to the new number of reserved storages. (For example, as shown in FIG. 91, when the number of reserved memories decreases during the execution of the first start winning effect, the destination of the hold display is redetermined),
If a new hold storage is stored in the hold storage means when the hold storage is not stored in the hold storage means and the variable display is not executed, at least a part of the appearance display is not executed (. For example, as shown in FIG. 93 as a modification 1, when a new start prize is generated while the number of reserved memories is 0 and the variable display is not executed, the active display area is not executed without executing the second start prize effect. (Part where the hold display is displayed as the active display on the 905F) The gaming machine can be mentioned.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the state of the game machine. In addition, the hold display can be preferably displayed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The information display means can sequentially display predetermined information of each set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 82, the display monitor 9029 has a short-term continuous ratio, a short-term combination ratio, a total cumulative combination ratio, and a total cumulative combination ratio. , Base 1 and base 2 are displayed sequentially at 5 second intervals)
The gaming machine according to the means 1 characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, predetermined information of each set value can be easily grasped.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
The information display means can display predetermined information of each set value in different display modes (for example, as shown in the modification 4, in the set value 1, the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed in red. In the setting value 2, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed in green, and in the setting value 3, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed in blue).
The gaming machine according to the means 1 or the means 2 is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the predetermined information of each set value.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
Equipped with an operating means (for example, display changeover switch 9030)
The information display means can switch and display predetermined information of each set value according to the operation of the operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 82, the ratio of the set value 1 is linked by the operation of the display changeover switch 9030. , The part that switches the combination ratio and base display to the setting value 2 connection ratio, combination ratio, and base display, and the combination ratio of setting value 2 and combination ratio, and the base display is the combination ratio and combination ratio of setting value 3. The part that switches to the base display)
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 3 is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the predetermined information of each set value.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention,
A calculation means capable of calculating information on the game value given by the game value giving means (for example, a connection ratio (%), a combination ratio (%) for 6000 CPU 90103s, and a cumulative ratio (%), a combination. The part for calculating the ratio (%) and the base calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls (base 1 (%)) and the base calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls (base 2 (%)). )
The calculation means can individually calculate the information for each set value (for example, a general prize ball, a first starting opening prize ball, an ordinary electric prize ball, a special electric prize ball, a total prize ball, etc. The total input value is stored in the storage area (ring buffer) according to the set value, and can be calculated individually for each set value),
The information display means displays only the information corresponding to the specific set value of any one of the set values (for example, as shown in the modification 5, any one of the set value 1 to the set value 3). The part that can display only the ratio, combination ratio, and base according to the set value)
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 4 is described, and according to this feature, the information confirmation work can be easily performed.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
A calculation means capable of calculating information on the game value given by the game value giving means (for example, a connection ratio (%), a combination ratio (%) for 6000 CPU 90103s, and a cumulative ratio (%), a combination. The part for calculating the ratio (%) and the base calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls (base 1 (%)) and the base calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls (base 2 (%)). )
The calculation means can individually calculate individual information which is the information according to each set value, and can also calculate compound information which is the information according to two or more different set values (for example,). The part that calculates the total ratio, combination ratio, and base for two or more set values),
The information display means can display the information and the composite information (for example, as shown in the modification 6, the display monitor 9029 calculates the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in two or more set values. Displayable part)
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 5 is described, and according to this feature, the state of the gaming machine can be grasped in more detail.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the second invention,
The information display means displays predetermined information according to the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in the modification 7, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, according to the set set value, The part where only the base can be displayed)
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 6 is described, and according to this feature, it is easy to confirm the predetermined information of the set value set by the setting means. be able to.

In addition, the third invention shown below is also included in the Examples. That is, conventionally, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, in which the set value can be set, a dedicated set value display means for displaying the set set value is provided. There was a problem that the cost increase of the game machine could not be prevented. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention to solve the problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901) that can play a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the setting change process of S90a13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to the setting value 3).
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 87) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 9050A to general winning opening 9050D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 90712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes the prize ball processing of S9012) and
An information display means (for example, a display monitor 9029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means, and
With
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 82, a portion capable of displaying the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 9029).
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is not necessary to individually provide a display device for displaying the set value, so that the cost increase of the game machine can be prevented. it can.

Further, as a gaming machine of means B of the third invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-2010902.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901) that can play a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the setting change process of S90a13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to the setting value 3).
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 87) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 9050A to general winning opening 9050D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 90712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes the prize ball processing of S9012) and
An information display means (for example, a display monitor 9029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means, and
With
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 82, a portion capable of displaying the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 9029).
Further, a hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the start winning process shown in FIG. 87) capable of storing a plurality of information related to the variable display as hold storage, and
A plurality of hold displays corresponding to each of the plurality of hold storages stored in the hold storage means are displayed at a plurality of corresponding positions corresponding to the number of hold storages (for example, hold 1 display position in the first hold storage display area 905D). It can be displayed at each of the 4 display positions on hold).
Based on the fact that the hold memory corresponding to the variable display is erased by executing the new variable display, the hold display corresponding to the hold memory other than the erased hold memory is newly held after the hold memory is erased. It is provided with a hold display means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes the hold effect process shown in FIG. 89) that can be displayed at a corresponding position corresponding to the number of stored items.
The hold display means
Appearance of hold display from a predetermined appearance position (for example, character image C displayed in the upper left portion of the effect display device 905) to a corresponding position corresponding to the number of hold storages based on the newly stored hold memory. The display (for example, the first start winning effect) can be executed,
Based on the fact that the number of reserved storages has changed due to the execution of a new variable display during the execution of the appearance display, it is possible to set the corresponding position for the running appearance display to the corresponding position corresponding to the new number of reserved storages. (For example, as shown in FIG. 91, when the number of reserved memories decreases during the execution of the first start winning effect, the destination of the hold display is redetermined),
If a new hold storage is stored in the hold storage means when the hold storage is not stored in the hold storage means and the variable display is not executed, at least a part of the appearance display is not executed (. For example, as shown in FIG. 93 as a modification 1, when a new start prize is generated while the number of reserved memories is 0 and the variable display is not executed, the active display area is not executed without executing the second start prize effect. A game machine (a part in which the hold display is displayed as an active display on the 905F) can be mentioned.
According to such a configuration, the set value can be easily grasped. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption of the appearance display during execution and to reduce the effect of the appearance display. In other words, it becomes possible to easily grasp the set value for the playground, and it is possible to prevent the effect of the appearance display from being lowered for the player, which is beneficial to both the playground and the player. Can be given.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
The information display means can display predetermined information according to a set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 82, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 9029).
The gaming machine according to the means 1 characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the state of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
The information display means can sequentially display predetermined information of each set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 82, the display monitor 9029 has a short-term continuous ratio, a short-term combination ratio, a total cumulative combination ratio, and a total cumulative combination ratio. , Base 1 and base 2 are displayed sequentially at 5 second intervals)
The gaming machine described in the means 2 characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, predetermined information of each set value can be easily grasped.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention,
The information display means can display predetermined information of each set value in different display modes (for example, as shown in the modification 4, in the set value 1, the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed in red. In the setting value 2, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed in green, and in the setting value 3, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed in blue).
The gaming machine according to the means 2 or the means 3 is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the predetermined information of each set value.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
Equipped with an operating means (for example, display changeover switch 9030)
The information display means can switch and display predetermined information of each set value according to the operation of the operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 82, the ratio of the set value 1 is linked by the operation of the display changeover switch 9030. , The part that switches the combination ratio and base display to the setting value 2 connection ratio, combination ratio, and base display, and the combination ratio of setting value 2 and combination ratio, and the base display is the combination ratio and combination ratio of setting value 3. The part that switches to the base display)
The gaming machine described in any one of the means 2 to the means 4 characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the predetermined information of each set value.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention,
The information display means displays predetermined information according to the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in the modification 7, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, according to the set set value, The part where only the base can be displayed)
The gaming machine described in any one of the means 2 to the means 5 characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, the work of confirming the predetermined information of the set value set by the setting means can be easily performed. be able to.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the third invention,
A calculation means capable of calculating information on the game value given by the game value giving means (for example, a connection ratio (%), a combination ratio (%) for 6000 CPU 90103s, and a cumulative ratio (%), a combination. The part for calculating the ratio (%) and the base calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls (base 1 (%)) and the base calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls (base 2 (%)). )
The calculation means can individually calculate the information for each set value (for example, a general prize ball, a first starting opening prize ball, an ordinary electric prize ball, a special electric prize ball, a total prize ball, etc. The total input value is stored in the storage area (ring buffer) according to the set value, and can be calculated individually for each set value),
The information display means displays only the information corresponding to the specific set value of any one of the set values (for example, as shown in the modification 5, any one of the set value 1 to the set value 3). The part that can display only the ratio, combination ratio, and base according to the set value)
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 6 is described, and according to this feature, the information confirmation work can be easily performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the third invention,
A calculation means capable of calculating information on the game value given by the game value giving means (for example, a connection ratio (%), a combination ratio (%) for 6000 CPU 90103s, and a cumulative ratio (%), a combination. The part for calculating the ratio (%) and the base calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls (base 1 (%)) and the base calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls (base 2 (%)). )
The calculation means can individually calculate individual information which is the information according to each set value, and can also calculate compound information which is the information according to two or more different set values (for example,). The part that calculates the total ratio, combination ratio, and base for two or more set values),
The information display means can display the information and the composite information (for example, as shown in the modification 6, the display monitor 9029 calculates the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in two or more set values. Displayable part)
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 7 is described, and according to this feature, the state of the gaming machine can be grasped in more detail.

The examples also include the fourth invention shown below. That is, in the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, which can set a set value in the past, only the probability of a big hit changes according to the set value, so that the effect of the variable display pattern is used. There was a problem that the effect could not be enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the setting change process of S90a13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to the setting value 3).
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 87) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the variable pattern setting process of S9023) for determining the variable display pattern in any of a plurality of variable display patterns, and
A variable display executing means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the special symbol variation processing of S9024) that executes the variable display with the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means.
With
The variable display pattern determining means determines which variable display pattern is to be used at different ratios depending on the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, non-reach). , Normal reach, super reach fluctuation patterns are determined at different ratios based on the set values)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the player pays attention to the variable display pattern in an attempt to specify the set value from the determination status of the variable display pattern. , The effect of the variable display pattern can be enhanced.

Further, as a gaming machine of means C of the fourth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-2010902.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the setting change process of S90a13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to the setting value 3).
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 87) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the variable pattern setting process of S9023) for determining the variable display pattern in any of a plurality of variable display patterns, and
A variable display executing means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the special symbol variation processing of S9024) that executes the variable display with the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means.
With
The variable display pattern determining means determines which variable display pattern is to be used at different ratios depending on the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, non-reach). , The part where each fluctuation pattern of normal reach and super reach is determined at different ratios based on the set values),
Further, a hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the start winning process shown in FIG. 87) capable of storing a plurality of information related to the variable display as hold storage, and
A plurality of hold displays corresponding to each of the plurality of hold storages stored in the hold storage means are displayed at a plurality of corresponding positions corresponding to the number of hold storages (for example, hold 1 display position in the first hold storage display area 905D). It can be displayed at each of the 4 display positions on hold).
Based on the fact that the hold memory corresponding to the variable display is erased by executing the new variable display, the hold display corresponding to the hold memory other than the erased hold memory is newly held after the hold memory is erased. It is provided with a hold display means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes the hold effect process shown in FIG. 89) that can be displayed at a corresponding position corresponding to the number of stored items.
The hold display means
Appearance of hold display from a predetermined appearance position (for example, character image C displayed in the upper left portion of the effect display device 905) to a corresponding position corresponding to the number of hold storages based on the newly stored hold memory. The display (for example, the first start winning effect) can be executed,
Based on the fact that the number of reserved storages has changed due to the execution of a new variable display during the execution of the appearance display, it is possible to set the corresponding position for the running appearance display to the corresponding position corresponding to the new number of reserved storages. (For example, as shown in FIG. 91, when the number of reserved memories decreases during the execution of the first start winning effect, the destination of the hold display is redetermined),
If a new hold storage is stored in the hold storage means when the hold storage is not stored in the hold storage means and the variable display is not executed, at least a part of the appearance display is not executed (. For example, as shown in FIG. 93 as a modification 1, when a new start prize is generated while the number of reserved memories is 0 and the variable display is not executed, the active display area is not executed without executing the second start prize effect. (Part where the hold display is displayed as the active display on the 905F) The gaming machine can be mentioned.
According to this feature, the set value can be estimated from the fluctuation pattern, which improves the interest. Furthermore, the player can be noticed over the reach effect that is executed during the fluctuation after the start prize is generated and displayed on hold.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
The variable display pattern determining means can determine a specific variable display pattern by a common determination ratio when the set value set by the setting means is the first set value and when it is the second set value. (For example, as shown in FIG. 75, when the fluctuation display result is out of alignment, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set).
The gaming machine according to the means 1 characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the effect of the specific variable display pattern from being lowered. The "common determination ratio" in the second invention includes not only those with different set values and completely the same ratio, but also those with different set values and substantially the same ratio.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
The variable display pattern determining means can determine the specific variable display pattern by different determination ratios when the set value set by the setting means is the first set value and when it is the second set value. (For example, as shown in the modified example 14, the portion where the determination rate of the super reach fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value set)
The gaming machine according to the means 1 characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, the variable display of the specific variable display pattern is executed at a different ratio according to the set set value. The effect of the variable display pattern can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
The variable display pattern determining means is determination data used for determining a variable display pattern, and is a variable display pattern by switching between first determination data and second determination data in which at least one variable display pattern determination ratio is different. (For example, as shown in the modified example 9, the variation pattern is determined using the special variation pattern determination table under specific conditions such as after the end of the big hit game or in a time saving state, while the specific condition is determined. Other than the following, the part where the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 74 and 75),
The switching condition for switching the determination data used for determining the variable display pattern from the first determination data to the second determination data by the variable display pattern determining means differs depending on the set value (for example, a modification). As shown in 9, when the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the special fluctuation pattern determination table up to the 15th fluctuation display after the jackpot game ends, and after the jackpot game ends. From the 16th time onward, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, and if the set value is 2, the fluctuation display up to the 10th time after the jackpot game ends. The fluctuation pattern is determined using the special variation pattern determination table up to, and the variation pattern is determined and set using the variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 74 and 75 from the 11th time after the end of the big hit game. When the set value is 3, the fluctuation pattern is determined by using the special fluctuation pattern judgment table up to the fifth fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game, and in the sixth and subsequent times after the end of the big hit game, FIGS. 74 and FIG. Part for determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in 75)
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 3 is described, and according to this feature, the change status in which the determination status of the variable display pattern changes differs depending on the set value. Since the player can pay attention to the changing situation, the effect of the variable display pattern can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
The variable display pattern determining means has a different determination ratio depending on whether the set value set by the setting means is the first set value or the second set value in a predetermined period after the power is supplied. (For example, as shown in the modification 10, the execution of the variable display is executed until a predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on to the gaming machine or a predetermined number of times of the variable display is executed. Until, the part that determines the execution of the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach at different determination ratios depending on whether the set value is 1 or 2 or 3.)
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 4 is described, and according to this feature, attention can be paid to a specific variable display pattern in a predetermined period after the power is supplied. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the specific variable display pattern.

In addition, the fifth invention shown below is also included in the said embodiment. That is, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine in which the set value can be set, the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-200902 described above, only the probability of a big hit changes according to the set value. There was a problem that it was not possible to enhance the game interest. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the setting change process of S90a13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to the setting value 3).
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 87) capable of controlling any of a plurality of types of advantageous states based on the set value.
With
When the set value set by the setting means is the first set value and the second set value, the ratio of which of the plurality of types of advantageous states to control is different (for example). , The part where the ratio of determining the jackpot type to jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C is different depending on whether the set value is 1 or 2, or 3. The part where the ratio of determining the jackpot type to either jackpot D or jackpot E is different depending on whether the set value is 1 or 2 or 3.)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the type of advantageous state controlled according to a set value changes, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as a gaming machine of means D of the fifth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-2010902.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the setting change process of S90a13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to the setting value 3).
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 87) capable of controlling any of a plurality of types of advantageous states based on the set value.
With
When the set value set by the setting means is the first set value and the second set value, the ratio of which of the plurality of types of advantageous states to control is different (for example). , The part where the ratio of determining the jackpot type to jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C is different depending on whether the set value is 1 or 2, or 3. The ratio of determining the jackpot type to either jackpot D or jackpot E differs depending on whether the set value is 1 or 2 or 3),
Further, a hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the start winning process shown in FIG. 87) capable of storing a plurality of information related to the variable display as hold storage, and
A plurality of hold displays corresponding to each of the plurality of hold storages stored in the hold storage means are displayed at a plurality of corresponding positions corresponding to the number of hold storages (for example, hold 1 display position in the first hold storage display area 905D). It can be displayed at each of the 4 display positions on hold).
Based on the fact that the hold memory corresponding to the variable display is erased by executing the new variable display, the hold display corresponding to the hold memory other than the erased hold memory is newly held after the hold memory is erased. It is provided with a hold display means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes the hold effect process shown in FIG. 89) that can be displayed at a corresponding position corresponding to the number of stored items.
The hold display means
Appearance of hold display from a predetermined appearance position (for example, character image C displayed in the upper left portion of the effect display device 905) to a corresponding position corresponding to the number of hold storages based on the newly stored hold memory. The display (for example, the first start winning effect) can be executed,
Based on the fact that the number of reserved storages has changed due to the execution of a new variable display during the execution of the appearance display, it is possible to set the corresponding position for the running appearance display to the corresponding position corresponding to the new number of reserved storages. (For example, as shown in FIG. 91, when the number of reserved memories decreases during the execution of the first start winning effect, the destination of the hold display is redetermined),
If a new hold storage is stored in the hold storage means when the hold storage is not stored in the hold storage means and the variable display is not executed, at least a part of the appearance display is not executed (. For example, as shown in FIG. 93 as a modification 1, when a new start prize is generated while the number of reserved memories is 0 and the variable display is not executed, the active display area is not executed without executing the second start prize effect. A game machine (a part in which the hold display is displayed as an active display on the 905F) can be mentioned.
According to this feature, the type of advantageous state to be controlled changes according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. In addition, the player can be noticed from the time when the start prize is generated and the hold display is displayed until the big hit, and the interest can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the first special region (for example, the third count switch 9024B in the modified example 11), the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state rather than the normal state (for example, the low probability low base state) is It can be controlled to a high special state (for example, high accuracy low base state or high accuracy high base state),
The rate at which the game medium enters the first special region differs depending on whether the set value set by the setting means is the first set value or the second set value (for example, in the modified example 11). As shown, the small hit type is different depending on the set value, and the small hit A and the small hit B are different from each other in the opening period and the number of times of opening of the second big winning opening 90712. The part where the rate at which the game ball enters the second prize opening 90712 during the game is different)
The game machine according to the means 1 characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, the ratio of the game medium being controlled to a special state based on the entry of the game medium into the first special area according to the set value is described. Because it is different, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
A game value giving means for giving a game value in the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the game value giving process of S9012) is provided.
The magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means differs depending on whether the set value set by the setting means is the first set value or the second set value (for example, a modified example). As shown in 12, the part in which the number of prize balls when the game balls win each prize opening is made different according to the set value)
The game machine described in the means 1 or the means 2 characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, the magnitude of the game value given in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value. Can be improved.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
It is provided with a second special area (for example, the jackpot type determination gate shown in the modified example 16) into which the game medium can enter.
The game control means can control any one of a plurality of types of advantageous states based on the game medium entering the second special region (for example, the game ball enters the jackpot type determination gate). The part that is controlled to the jackpot game state of 16 round jackpot or 4 round jackpot based on what you have done)
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 3 is described, and according to this feature, the type of advantageous state when the gaming medium enters the second special area is a set value. Since it changes according to the situation, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Variable means (eg, closed state) that can be changed into a first state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium is more difficult to enter or cannot enter than the first state. , 2nd prize opening 90712),
With
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the variable display result is determined as a small hit), the variable means is controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) in which the first state is set, and the player enters. The game medium is controlled to the advantageous state based on the entry into the third special region (for example, the third count switch 9024B).
The special state includes a plurality of types of special states (for example, a small hit gaming state of small hit A and a small hit gaming state of small hit B).
When the set value set by the setting means is the first set value and the second set value, the ratio of which special state is controlled among the plurality of types of special states is different (for example). , The part where the determination rate of the small hit type is different depending on whether the set value is 1 or 2 or 3)
The gaming machine described in any one of the means 1 to the means 4 characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, the type of the special state controlled according to the set value changes, so that the game is enjoyed. Can be improved.

In addition, the sixth invention shown below is also included in the said embodiment. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, which is a pachinko gaming machine in which a set value can be set and a holding memory is stored for a start winning prize for which a holding condition is satisfied. There was a problem that the setting value could not be accurately reflected because the setting value was not considered to be changed when the hold storage was stored. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the setting change process of S90a13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to the setting value 3).
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 87) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
A hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the start winning process shown in FIG. 87) capable of storing information related to the variable display as hold storage, and
With
When a new set value is set by the setting means while the holding storage is stored in the holding storage means, the stored holding storage is deleted (for example, as shown in the modification 3). The part that clears the hold memory based on the new setting value being set)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, since the hold memory is not stored before and after the setting change, the setting change can be accurately reflected.

Further, as a gaming machine of means E of the sixth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-2010902.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the setting change process of S90a13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to the setting value 3).
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 87) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
A hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the start winning process shown in FIG. 87) capable of storing information related to the variable display as hold storage, and
With
When a new set value is set by the setting means while the holding storage is stored in the holding storage means, the stored holding storage is erased (for example, as shown in the modification 3, a new setting value is set. The part that clears the hold memory based on the setting value set),
Further, a hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the start winning process shown in FIG. 87) capable of storing a plurality of information related to the variable display as hold storage, and
A plurality of hold displays corresponding to each of the plurality of hold storages stored in the hold storage means are displayed at a plurality of corresponding positions corresponding to the number of hold storages (for example, hold 1 display position in the first hold storage display area 905D). It can be displayed at each of the 4 display positions on hold).
Based on the fact that the hold memory corresponding to the variable display is erased by executing the new variable display, the hold display corresponding to the hold memory other than the erased hold memory is newly held after the hold memory is erased. It is provided with a hold display means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes the hold effect process shown in FIG. 89) that can be displayed at a corresponding position corresponding to the number of stored items.
The hold display means
Appearance of hold display from a predetermined appearance position (for example, character image C displayed in the upper left portion of the effect display device 905) to a corresponding position corresponding to the number of hold storages based on the newly stored hold memory. The display (for example, the first start winning effect) can be executed,
Based on the fact that the number of reserved storages has changed due to the execution of a new variable display during the execution of the appearance display, it is possible to set the corresponding position for the running appearance display to the corresponding position corresponding to the new number of reserved storages. (For example, as shown in FIG. 91, when the number of reserved memories decreases during the execution of the first start winning effect, the destination of the hold display is redetermined),
If a new hold storage is stored in the hold storage means when the hold storage is not stored in the hold storage means and the variable display is not executed, at least a part of the appearance display is not executed (. For example, as shown in FIG. 93 as a modification 1, when a new start prize is generated while the number of reserved memories is 0 and the variable display is not executed, the active display area is not executed without executing the second start prize effect. A game machine (a part in which the hold display is displayed as an active display on the 905F) can be mentioned.
According to this feature, since the hold memory is not stored before and after the setting change, the setting change can be accurately reflected. Further, the hold display can be preferably executed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage means has a first display mode (for example, a white circle) and a second display mode (for example, a blue circle) different from the first display mode. A hold display means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes the hold effect process shown in FIG. 89) that can be displayed in a red circle, a white triangle, or a white quadrangle).
A determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the special symbol normal processing of S9022) and
Before the determination by the determination means, the determination means for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled (for example, the portion where the CPU 90103 executes the start winning determination process of S9021) and
Based on the determination result by the determination means, the advance notice effect executing means capable of executing the advance notice effect for displaying the hold display in the second display mode (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 holds the hold effect by executing the hold effect process of S9072). The part that executes the change effect) and
With
The advance notice effect executing means executes the advance notice effect at different ratios when the set value set by the setting means is the first set value and when the set value is the second set value (for example, a modification). As shown in 8, the part where the execution rate of the hold change effect differs according to the set value)
The gaming machine described in the means 1 characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, since the execution rate of the advance notice effect differs depending on the set value, the player can pay attention to the advance notice effect. It is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
A door that can be opened and closed (for example, a game machine frame 903) and
An opening notification means for notifying the opening of the door (for example, as shown in the modification 3, the notification means for notifying the opening of the game machine frame 903 by the speakers 908L, 908R and each LED).
With
The setting means can set a new set value when the door is open (for example, after a game hall clerk or the like opens the gaming machine frame 903 as shown in the modification 3). After displaying the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 on the display monitor 9029 by turning on the lock switch 9051, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 9029 by operating the setting changeover switch 9030. The part where the lock switch 9051 is pushed in at the end),
When the hold display of the second display mode is displayed, the open notification means performs notification in a notification mode different from the case where the hold display of the second display mode is not displayed (for example, As shown in the modification 3, when the game machine frame 903 is open, the notification is performed in a notification mode different from the case where the game machine frame 903 is not opened).
The gaming machine according to the means 2 is described, and according to this feature, when the door that is opened when the set value is changed is opened, the hold display of the second display mode is displayed. Since it becomes possible to easily recognize that it is displayed, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being changed inappropriately.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
A door that can be opened and closed (for example, a game machine frame 903) and
An opening notification means for notifying the opening of the door (for example, as shown in the modification 3, the notification means for notifying the opening of the game machine frame 903 by the speakers 908L, 908R and each LED).
With
The setting means can set a new set value when the door is open (for example, after a game hall clerk or the like opens the gaming machine frame 903 as shown in the modification 3). After displaying the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 on the display monitor 9029 by turning on the lock switch 9051, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 9029 by operating the setting changeover switch 9030. The part where the lock switch 9051 is pushed in at the end),
When the hold storage is stored in the hold storage means, the open notification means notifies in a notification mode different from the case where the hold storage is not stored (for example, as shown in the modification 3). , When the hold storage is stored in the game control data holding area 90150, the part that notifies in a different notification mode from the case where the hold storage is not stored in the game control data holding area 90150)
The gaming machine according to the means 2 or the means 3 is described, and according to this feature, the hold memory is stored when the door opened when the set value is changed is opened. Since it becomes possible to easily recognize that the setting value is changed, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being changed inappropriately.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
A determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the special symbol normal processing of S9022) and
Before the determination by the determination means, the determination means for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled (for example, the portion where the CPU 90103 executes the start winning determination process of S9021) and
A door that can be opened and closed (for example, a game machine frame 903) and
An opening notification means for notifying the opening of the door (for example, as shown in the modification 3, the notification means for notifying the opening of the game machine frame 903 by the speakers 908L, 908R and each LED).
With
The setting means can set a new set value when the door is open (for example, after a game hall clerk or the like opens the gaming machine frame 903 as shown in the modification 3). After displaying the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 on the display monitor 9029 by turning on the lock switch 9051, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 9029 by operating the setting changeover switch 9030. The part where the lock switch 9051 is pushed in at the end),
The open notification means notifies in a different notification mode depending on whether or not the hold storage determined to be controlled in an advantageous state by the determination means is stored in the hold storage means (for example, a modification). As shown in 3, when it is determined that there is a hold memory in which the variable display result is a big hit, the notification is performed in a different notification mode from the case where it is determined that there is no hold memory in which the variable display result is a big hit).
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 4 is described, and according to this feature, an advantageous state is obtained when the door opened when the set value is changed is opened. Since it becomes possible to easily recognize the presence / absence of the hold storage controlled by, it is possible to prevent the set value from being changed improperly.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
The setting means includes a key operation means (for example, a lock switch 9051) capable of performing a key operation using a setting key, and a setting change processing means (for example, a setting change processing means) for executing a setting change process based on the key operation in the key operation means. , The portion where the CPU 90103 executes the setting change process of Sa9013 shown in FIG. 84).
The hold storage means erases the hold storage when the setting change process is executed (for example, as shown in the modification 3, a portion that clears the hold memory when the setting change process is executed by the CPU 90103).
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 5 is described, and according to this feature, the set value can be set by erasing the hold memory when the setting change process is executed. It is possible to surely prevent the change from being reflected accurately.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the sixth invention,
The setting means includes a key operation means (for example, a lock switch 9051) capable of performing a key operation using a setting key, and a setting change processing means (for example, CPU 90103) for executing a setting change process by a key operation in the key operation means. Includes the part that executes the setting change process of Sa9013 shown in FIG.
The hold storage means erases the hold storage when the setting change process is executed and a new setting value is set (for example, as shown in the modification 3, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a new setting value. The part that clears the hold memory based on the setting)
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 6 is described, and according to this feature, when the setting change process is interrupted without setting a new setting value, a new setting value is described. It is possible to prevent the hold memory from being erased even though the set value is not set.

The embodiment also includes the seventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. In the game machines described in 2010-201002, it is not considered that the set value is changed when the large winning opening or the variable winning opening is open-controlled, and the setting change is accurately reflected. There was a problem that it could not be made to. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention to solve the problem,
It is a gaming machine that can play games using a game medium and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting value 1 to the setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the setting change process of the Sa9013).
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 87) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
A variable winning means (for example, a closed state) that can be changed into a first state in which the game medium can win a prize (for example, an open state) and a second state in which the game medium is more difficult to win or cannot win than the first state (for example, a closed state). For example, the 1st prize opening and the 2nd prize opening 90712),
A control means for controlling the variable winning means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the processing during the jackpot opening of S9027) and
With
The variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state (for example, as shown in FIG. 85) when a new set value is set by the setting means in the first state. By turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in order to set a new set value for the pachinko gaming machine 901, the first prize opening and the second winning opening 90712 are closed, and the modified example 3 As shown, the part where the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening 90712 are closed based on the new set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and as shown in the modification 3, the pachinko game The part where the first prize opening and the second prize entrance 90712 are closed based on the new setting value set for the machine 901)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the first state in which the game medium can win a prize straddles the change of the set value, and the change of the set value is not accurately reflected. It can be prevented from being lost.

Further, as a gaming machine of means F of the seventh invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-2010902.
It is a gaming machine that can play games using a game medium and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting value 1 to the setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the setting change process of the Sa9013).
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 87) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
A variable winning means (for example, a closed state) that can be changed into a first state in which the game medium can win a prize (for example, an open state) and a second state in which the game medium is more difficult to win or cannot win than the first state (for example, a closed state). For example, the 1st prize opening and the 2nd prize opening 90712),
A control means for controlling the variable winning means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the processing during the jackpot opening of S9027) and
With
The variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state (for example, as shown in FIG. 85) when a new set value is set by the setting means in the first state. By turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in order to set a new set value for the pachinko gaming machine 901, the first prize opening and the second winning opening 90712 are closed, and the modified example 3 As shown, the part where the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening 90712 are closed based on the new set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and as shown in the modification 3, the pachinko game The part where the first prize opening and the second prize entrance 90712 are closed based on the new setting value set for the machine 901),
Further, a hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the start winning process shown in FIG. 87) capable of storing a plurality of information related to the variable display as hold storage, and
A plurality of hold displays corresponding to each of the plurality of hold storages stored in the hold storage means are displayed at a plurality of corresponding positions corresponding to the number of hold storages (for example, hold 1 display position in the first hold storage display area 905D). It can be displayed at each of the 4 display positions on hold).
Based on the fact that the hold memory corresponding to the variable display is erased by executing the new variable display, the hold display corresponding to the hold memory other than the erased hold memory is newly held after the hold memory is erased. It is provided with a hold display means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes the hold effect process shown in FIG. 89) that can be displayed at a corresponding position corresponding to the number of stored items.
The hold display means
Appearance of hold display from a predetermined appearance position (for example, character image C displayed in the upper left portion of the effect display device 905) to a corresponding position corresponding to the number of hold storages based on the newly stored hold memory. The display (for example, the first start winning effect) can be executed,
Based on the fact that the number of reserved storages has changed due to the execution of a new variable display during the execution of the appearance display, it is possible to set the corresponding position for the running appearance display to the corresponding position corresponding to the new number of reserved storages. (For example, as shown in FIG. 91, when the number of reserved memories decreases during the execution of the first start winning effect, the destination of the hold display is redetermined),
If a new hold storage is stored in the hold storage means when the hold storage is not stored in the hold storage means and the variable display is not executed, at least a part of the appearance display is not executed (. For example, as shown in FIG. 93 as a modification 1, when a new start prize is generated while the number of reserved memories is 0 and the variable display is not executed, the active display area is not executed without executing the second start prize effect. (Part where the hold display is displayed as the active display on the 905F) The gaming machine can be mentioned.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the first state in which the game medium can win a prize straddles the change of the set value, and the change of the set value is not accurately reflected. Further, the hold display can be preferably executed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
The variable winning means has a storage area (for example, on the regulating member 90721) capable of storing the winning game medium.
When a new set value is set by the setting means when the game medium is stored in the storage area, the stored game medium is discharged (for example, the new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 901). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is turned off in order to set, if the game ball is retained (stored) on the regulated member 90721 at the timing when the power is turned off, the regulated member 90721 The part where the gaming ball passes through the third count switch 9024B or the fourth count switch 9024C and is discharged from the second special variable winning ball device 907B by changing from the regulated state to the allowable state)
The game machine described in the means 1 characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, the storage of the game medium straddles the change of the set value, and the change of the set value is not accurately reflected. It can be prevented from being lost.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The setting means includes a key operation means (for example, a lock switch 9051) capable of performing a key operation using a setting key, and a setting change processing means (for example, a setting change processing means) for executing a setting change process based on the key operation in the key operation means. , The portion where the CPU 90103 executes the setting change process of Sa9013 shown in FIG. 84).
The variable winning means changes to the second state when the setting change process is executed (for example, as shown in the modification 3, when the setting change process is executed by the CPU 90103, the first large winning opening And the part that closes the 2nd prize opening 90712)
The gaming machine according to the means 1 or the means 2 is described, and according to this feature, the set value can be changed by changing to the second state when the setting change process is executed. It can be surely prevented that it is not reflected accurately.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
The setting means includes a key operation means (for example, a lock switch 9051) capable of performing a key operation using a setting key, and a setting change processing means (for example, CPU 90103) for executing a setting change process by a key operation in the key operation means. Includes the part that executes the setting change process of Sa9013 shown in FIG.
The variable winning means changes to the second state when the setting change process is executed and a new set value is set (for example, a new set value for the pachinko gaming machine 901 as shown in the modification 3). The part where the 1st big prize opening and the 2nd big winning opening 90712 are closed based on the setting)
The gaming machine according to the means 1 or the means 2 is described, and according to this feature, when the setting change process is interrupted without setting a new setting value, a new setting value is described. It is possible to prevent the first state from becoming the second state even though is not set.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
The setting means includes a key operation means (for example, a lock switch 9051) capable of performing a key operation using a setting key, and a setting change processing means (for example, a setting change processing means) for executing a setting change process based on the key operation in the key operation means. , The portion where the CPU 90103 executes the setting change process of Sa9013 shown in FIG. 84).
A movable body for production (for example, the movable body shown in the modification 13) that operates in the production related to the game,
The first initialization control means (for example, the special variable winning ball device initialization control shown in the modified example 13) that performs initialization control regarding the variable winning means, and
A second initialization control means (for example, the movable body initialization control shown in the modified example 13) that controls the initialization of the moving body for production, and
With
The first initialization control means performs initialization control of the variable winning means when the setting change process is executed (for example, as shown in the modification 13, a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 901. When the effect control CPU 90120 executes the special variable winning ball device initialization control),
The second initialization control means performs initialization control of the effect movable body when the setting change process is executed (for example, as shown in the modification 13, a new setting value for the pachinko gaming machine 901). The part where the effect control CPU 90120 executes the movable body initialization control when is set)
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 3 is described, and according to this feature, the initialization control is executed when the setting change process is executed, so that the variable winning prize is obtained. The new set value can be accurately reflected in the movement of the means and the movable body for production.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the seventh invention,
The first initialization control means executes the initialization control of the variable winning means before the initialization control of the second initialization control means is executed (for example, as shown in the modification 13). , The part where the special variable winning ball device initialization control is executed before the movable body initialization control)
The gaming machine according to the means 5 characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, the initialization control of the variable winning means related to the winning of the game medium can be quickly performed.

Although the examples of this embodiment have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and even if there are changes or additions within the range that does not deviate from the gist of this embodiment, this implementation Included in the example.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the first start winning effect and the second start winning effect are executed as the appearance display in this embodiment is illustrated, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and is a modification. As shown in FIGS. 93 (A) and 93 (B) as 1, when a new start prize occurs when the number of reserved memories is 0 and the variable display is not being executed, the second start prize is awarded. The hold display may be displayed in the active display area 905F as the active display without executing the effect, or the hold display may be displayed from the character image C via the first hold storage display area 905D as the second start winning effect. You may move it directly to the active display area 905F without doing so. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the period from the occurrence of a new start prize to the display of the active display in the active display area 905F.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a white round hold display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 905D and the second hold storage display area 905U has been illustrated, but this embodiment is not limited to this. , A plurality of display modes (for example, a blue circle, a red circle, a white triangle, a white quadrangle, etc.) are provided as the display modes of the hold display, and which display mode the hold display is displayed in. It may be possible to execute a hold change effect that suggests the rate at which the change display result becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) in the change display corresponding to each hold display.

In this way, when the jackpot expectation is different depending on the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display of the first start prize effect target may be changed during the first start prize effect. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 94 (A) to 94 (D) as a modification 2, a movable body is provided on the side of the effect display device 905, and the movable body is provided during the execution of the first start winning effect. The hold display is hidden from the player by arranging it on the movement path of the hold display. Then, the display mode of the hold display during the first start winning effect may be changed by changing the display mode of the hold display during the concealment. By doing so, the player can pay attention to which way the display mode of the hold display of the first start winning effect target changes, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the present modification 2, a mode in which the hold display of the first start winning effect target is concealed by a movable body and the display mode of the hold display is changed during the concealment is illustrated, but this embodiment illustrates this. It is not limited, and as shown in FIGS. 95 (A) to 95 (D), the hold display of the first start winning effect target is not a movable body but an image displayed on the effect display device 905. You may hide it.

Further, in the above embodiment, a mode in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be changed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is turned on is illustrated, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 901 is not limited to this. The change of the set value of may be feasible during the game. When changing the set value of the pachinko game machine 901 during the game, for example, as shown in FIGS. 96 (A) to 96 (C) as a modification 3, for example, a clerk at the game hall first moves the game machine. After opening the frame 903, by turning on the lock switch 9051, the display monitor (first display unit 9029A) displays the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and then the clerk of the amusement park, etc. Changes the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 9029A by operating the setting changeover switch 9052. Then, a clerk at the game hall or the like pushes the lock switch 9051 to set the numerical value (set value) displayed on the first display unit 9029A as the set value of the new pachinko game machine 901, and backs up the RAM 90102. It may be stored in the area. After the new set value is set, by clearing the game control data holding area 90150, the special figure holding memory, the normal figure holding memory, the game control flag setting unit 90152, the game control timer setting unit 90153, Various flags and data stored in the game control counter setting unit 90154, the game control buffer setting unit 90155, and the like may be deleted. In this way, by clearing the game control data holding area 90150, a new hold memory in which the variable display result becomes a big hit is generated as the set value is changed, and a new normal variable winning ball device 906B is generated. It is possible to prevent that the data is released (a hit on a normal figure occurs) and that the variable display result during execution becomes an unreasonable big hit. Further, by clearing the game control data holding area 90150, the big winning opening is closed during the big hit game, and the normal variable winning ball device 906B is closed when the normal variable winning ball device 906B is open. By making it possible, it is possible to prevent the player from obtaining inappropriate profits. Further, when the setting change process is interrupted without setting a new setting value, it is possible to prevent the hold memory from being deleted even though the new setting value is not set.

In the present modification 3, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be changed during the game, but the embodiment is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine is described in this way during the game. When the set value of the gaming machine 901 can be changed, the sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R and the light emission of the LED are based on the fact that the opening of the gaming machine frame 903 is detected by the frame opening detection sensor (not shown). For example, an opening notification means capable of notifying that the gaming machine frame 903 is being opened may be provided to prevent the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 from being illegally changed.

Further, when the opening notification means is provided in this way, it is determined whether or not the hold storage is stored in the game control data holding area 90150 while the game machine frame 903 is opened, and the game control data holding area 90150 is further provided. When the hold storage is stored in, the notification may be performed in a notification mode different from the case where the hold storage is not stored in the game control data holding area 90150. By doing so, when the game machine frame 903 is opened to change the set value, it is easy to determine whether or not the hold storage is stored in the game control data holding area 90150 depending on the notification mode of the notification means. Since it can be recognized by a clerk at the amusement park, it is possible to prevent the set value from being changed inappropriately.

Further, in the modification 3, when the opening notification means is provided in this way, whether or not there is a hold memory in the game control data holding area 90150 during the opening of the game machine frame 903, in which the variation display result becomes a big hit. When it is determined that there is a hold memory in which the variable display result is a big hit, the notification may be performed in a notification mode different from the case where it is determined that there is no hold memory in which the variable display result is a big hit. By doing so, when the game machine frame 903 is opened, the clerk of the game hall or the like can easily recognize the presence or absence of the hold memory in which the variable display result becomes a big hit, so it is set inappropriately. It is possible to prevent the value from being changed.

Further, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be changed during the game as in the third modification, and the display mode of the hold display is changed from the white round shape to the white round shape as in the second modification. If it is possible to change to a white triangle or quadrangle with a higher expectation of a big hit, it is determined whether or not there is a hold display displayed by the white triangle or quadrangle while the game machine frame 903 is open. When it is determined that there is a hold display displayed by a white triangle or quadrangle, notification may be performed in a notification mode different from that when there is no hold display displayed by a white triangle or quadrangle. By doing so, when the game machine frame 903 is opened, the clerk at the game hall indicates that the hold display is displayed as a white triangle or quadrangle with a higher expectation of a big hit than the white round shape. Etc. can be easily recognized, so that it is possible to prevent the set value from being changed inappropriately.

In the third modification, the mode of clearing the hold memory based on the setting of a new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is illustrated, but this embodiment is not limited to this. , Even when the set value originally set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is reset, the hold memory may be cleared.

Further, in the present modification 3, a mode in which the hold memory is cleared based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is illustrated, but this embodiment is not limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), the hold memory is cleared when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is displayed on the display monitor 9029, that is, when the setting change process is executed by the CPU 90103. You may. By doing so, it is possible to reliably prevent the pachinko gaming machine 901 from not accurately reflecting the change in the set value.

Further, in the third modification, a mode in which the first special winning opening and the second large winning opening 90712 are closed based on the setting of a new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is illustrated. This embodiment is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 96 (A), the timing at which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is displayed on the display monitor 9029, that is, the setting is changed by the CPU 90103. The first grand prize opening and the second grand prize opening 90712 may be closed when the process is executed. By doing so, it is possible to reliably prevent the pachinko gaming machine 901 from not accurately reflecting the change in the set value.

Further, in the present modification 3, when there is a hold storage in the game control data holding area 90150 while the gaming machine frame 903 is open, a mode in which notification by the notification means is executed is illustrated. The embodiment is not limited to this, and if there is a hold memory in the game control data holding area 90150 while the gaming machine frame 903 is open, a new setting value cannot be set in the pachinko gaming machine 901. Alternatively, it may be difficult to set a new set value by providing a complicated change procedure as compared with the case where there is no hold storage in the game control data holding area 90150 while the game machine frame 903 is open. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the hold memory from being accidentally cleared by setting a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

Further, in the above embodiment, the display monitor 9029 is provided with five display units from the first display unit 9029A to the fifth display unit 9029E, and the first display unit 9029A is provided with the second display unit 9029B to the fifth display unit 9029E. An example is shown in which the set values of the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base being displayed are displayed, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and is displayed as a modified example 4 as shown in FIG. 97 (A). The monitor does not have to be provided with a display unit for displaying the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the set value of the base being displayed. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at the set value 1 are red, the connection ratio at the setting value 2, the combination ratio, and the base are green, and the set value. By displaying the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in 3 in blue, it is easy to grasp which set value the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base being displayed on the display monitor 9029 are. You may.

Further, in the above embodiment and the present modification 4, the display monitor 9029 can display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at the set value 1 by switching every 5 seconds, and each operation of the display changeover switch 9030. In these setting values 1, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base switching display at 5-second intervals are displayed. The connection ratio at the setting value 2, the combination ratio, the base switching display at 5-second intervals, the connection ratio at the setting value 3, and the combination. Although a form in which the ratio and the base can be changed to the switching display at 5-second intervals has been illustrated, this embodiment is not limited to this, and for example, the ratio at the set value 1 and the ratio at the set value 2. Switching display of the connection ratio at the set value 3 at 5 second intervals, the winning ratio at the setting value 1, the winning ratio at the setting value 2, the switching display at the setting value 3 at 5 second intervals, and the setting value 1 The base, the base at the set value 2, and the switching display of the base at the set value 3 at 5-second intervals may be switched for each operation of the display changeover switch 9030.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base for each set value can be displayed on the display monitor 9029 is illustrated, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and as a modification 5, the display monitor 9029 is used. In the display monitor 9029, only the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base corresponding to the set value of any one of the set value 1 to the set value 3 may be displayed. For example, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated for each of the set values 1 to 3, and the highest or lowest value or the longest or shortest measurement time among the calculated comparison ratio, combination ratio, and base is calculated. Only the values and the like may be displayed on the display monitor 9029. Further, among the calculated ratios, combination ratios, and bases, the highest or lowest value and the longest or shortest measurement time value are set as the initial display on the display monitor 9029, and from the initial display by operating the display changeover switch 9030. The display of the display monitor 9029 may be switchable to another value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base for each set value can be displayed on the display monitor 9029 is illustrated, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and as a modification 6, Of the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base at the set value 1, the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base at the setting value 2, and the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base at the setting value 3, the connection ratio at two or more set values. , The combination ratio and the base can be calculated, and in addition to or instead of the connection ratio, the combination ratio and the base for each set value, the combination ratio, the combination ratio and the base in these two or more setting values are displayed on the display monitor 9029. It may be possible. In this way, by making it possible to display the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the set values of two or more on the display monitor 9029, it is possible to grasp the state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in more detail. In this modified example 6, as the composite information in this embodiment, a mode in which the total ratio, the combination ratio, and the base of two or more set values are calculated and displayed on the display monitor 9029 is illustrated. The embodiment is not limited to this, and as the composite information in this embodiment, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the average value of the base at two or more set values may be calculated and displayed on the display monitor 9029. ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display monitor 9029 exemplifies a mode in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and as a modification 7. , The display monitor 9029 may be able to display only the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base according to the set set value. Further, in the display monitor 9029, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base according to the set set value are displayed as the initial display, and other set values from the initial display are displayed according to the operation of the display changeover switch 9030. You may switch to the display of the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in.

Further, in the above embodiment, the display monitor 9029 exemplifies a mode in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base can be displayed as predetermined information according to the set value, but this embodiment is not limited to this. On the display monitor 9029, numerical values other than the continuous ratio, the winning ratio, and the base, such as the number of prize balls per predetermined time (for example, 1 hour), may be displayed as predetermined information according to the set value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a white round hold display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 905D and the second hold storage display area 905U has been illustrated, but this embodiment is not limited to this. Instead, as the modification 8, a plurality of display modes having different colors and shapes may be provided as the display modes of the hold display. In particular, in the present modification 8, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the hold effect process shown in FIG. 89, so that the display mode of the hold display is different from the white circle shape (for example, the blue circle shape or the like). A red circle, a white triangle, a white quadrangle, etc.) may be displayed, and a hold change effect suggesting that the variation display result corresponding to the hold display will be a big hit may be executed.

Further, in the present modification 8, a mode suggesting that the display mode of the hold display is changed by executing the action effect is illustrated, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and the action effect is not limited to this. May be executed at the start timing or end timing of the variable display, or may be executed at a timing other than the start timing or end timing of the variable display. For example, the action effect may be executed on the condition that the number of reserved first special figures reaches a specific value such as an upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In this way, when deciding to execute the action effect based on the fact that the number of reserved memories reaches a specific value such as the upper limit value during the variable display, the action effect is executed in the next variable display and is held. When there is a hold display that is the target of the hold change effect in the display, the display mode of the hold display may be changed at the end timing of the action effect. By doing so, it is possible to promote the game to the player so that the new hold memory is stored.

Further, in the modification 2, the embodiment in which the hold change effect can be executed is illustrated, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and as the modification 8, the hold change effect can be executed in this way. In this case, it is suggested that the effect control CPU 90120 can execute the action effect acting on the hold display by executing the hold effect process shown in FIG. 89, and the display mode of the hold display changes depending on the execution of the action effect. You may. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the display mode of the hold display is changed by the execution of the action effect, so that the game interest can be improved.

In the present modification 8, the action effect is not executed during the shift of the hold display in the first hold storage display area 905D, that is, when the action effect is executed, the hold display in the first hold storage display area 905D is not executed. By executing the action effect after the shift of, the process for the effect control CPU 90120 to execute the action effect may be simplified.

Further, in the modification 2 and the modification 8, a mode in which the hold change effect suggesting that the variation display result corresponding to the hold display becomes a big hit by changing the display mode of the hold display is illustrated. However, this embodiment is not limited to this, and the execution ratio of the hold change effect may be different depending on the set value. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to the hold change effect, and the effect of the hold change effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a variation pattern is determined using each variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 74 and 75 has been illustrated, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and is modified as a modification 9. For example, under specific conditions such as immediately after the end of the big hit game or during the time saving state, by using a variation pattern determination table (hereinafter referred to as a special variation pattern determination table) other than those shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, FIGS. The variation display (for example, shortened non-reach variation pattern (PA1'-4)) in a specific variation pattern may be more easily executed than in the case of determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table shown in 75. ..

In this way, when the fluctuation pattern can be determined using the special variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern is determined using the special variation pattern determination table according to the set value set in FIG. 74 and FIG. The timing of switching to the determination of the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 75 may be different. Specifically, when the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the special fluctuation pattern determination table up to the 15th fluctuation display after the jackpot game ends, and after the jackpot game ends. From the 16th time onward, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, and if the set value is 2, the fluctuation display up to the 10th time after the jackpot game ends. The fluctuation pattern is determined using the special variation pattern determination table, and after the 11th time after the jackpot game is completed, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, and the settings are set. When the value is 3, the fluctuation pattern is determined by using the special fluctuation pattern determination table up to the 5th fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game, and FIGS. 74 and 75 are shown after the 6th time after the end of the big hit game. The fluctuation pattern may be determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in.

Further, in the present modification 9, at the first tenth variation after the RAM clear processing (see Sa909 shown in FIG. 84) is executed or the set value set in the pachinko game machine 901 is changed. When the variation display is executed in a special variation pattern, it is suggested that a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, setting value 1) is set, and the RAM clear processing (see Sa909 shown in FIG. 84) is performed. It is advantageous for the player if the variation display is executed in a special variation pattern at the 30th variation after the execution or after the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is changed (for example,). It may be a game property in which attention is paid to whether or not the fluctuation display is executed in a special fluctuation pattern at a specific timing or a specific number of fluctuation displays, such as when it is confirmed that the set value 1) is set. When the pachinko game machine 901 has such a game property, the RAM clear process (see Sa909 shown in FIG. 84) is executed most when the set value is 1, or the pachinko game. In the first 10 fluctuations after the set value set in the machine 901 is changed, the ratio of fluctuations executed in a special fluctuation pattern is high, and when the set value is 3, the RAM clear processing is the most. The rate at which fluctuations are executed in a special fluctuation pattern in the first 10 fluctuations after (see Sa909 shown in FIG. 84) is executed or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is changed. Is set to be low, and only when the set value is 1, the RAM clear process (see Sa909 shown in FIG. 84) is executed, or the set value set in the pachinko game machine 901 is set. The fluctuation may be executed in a special fluctuation pattern at the first 30th fluctuation after the change.

Further, in the present modification 9, the switching condition (variation for determining the variation pattern) for switching the variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern from the special variation pattern determination table to the variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 74 and 75. An example is shown in which the number of fluctuations until the pattern determination table is switched from the special variation pattern determination table to the variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 74 and 75) is changed according to the set value. The embodiment is not limited to this, and these switching conditions may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value set.

As described above, the switching conditions for switching the variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern according to the set value from the special variation pattern determination table to the variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 74 and 75 are different. , Since the player can be focused on the timing when the determination rate of the specific fluctuation pattern (for example, shortened non-reach (PA1'-4)) is lowered, the effect of the fluctuation pattern can be enhanced.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 74 and 75 has been illustrated, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and is modified as a modification 10. , After the RAM clearing process (see Sa909 shown in FIG. 84) is executed, or until a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is changed, or , The determination ratio of the fluctuation display of a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach) is shown in FIGS. 74 and 75 until the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is executed. It may be increased or decreased as compared with the case where the variation pattern is determined using each variation pattern determination table shown.

In such a case, further, the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is executed at different determination ratios depending on whether the set value is 1 or 2 or 3. By determining the above, a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) is set after the RAM clearing process (see Sa909 shown in FIG. 84) is executed or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is changed. Since the player can pay attention to the fluctuation display number of the super reach fluctuation pattern until the elapse or until the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is executed, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach can be focused on. It is possible to enhance the effect of the variable display of. Further, in the present modification 10, the RAM clearing process (see Sa909 shown in FIG. 84) is executed, or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is changed until a predetermined time elapses. Alternatively, a variation pattern that can be determined only until the execution is executed is provided for each set value, and the pachinko gaming machine 901 is set by executing the variation display according to the variation pattern according to these set values. The set value may be notified to the player.

Further, in the present modification 10, a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) after the RAM clearing process (see Sa909 shown in FIG. 84) is executed or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is changed. ) Elapses or until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of fluctuation display is executed, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901. Although the embodiment is illustrated, this embodiment is not limited to this, and is set after the RAM clearing process (see Sa909 shown in FIG. 84) is executed or set in the pachinko gaming machine 901. Until a predetermined time elapses after the value is changed or until a predetermined number of fluctuation displays are executed, other than super reach such as non-reach or normal reach according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern may be different, and it is determined after the RAM clear processing (see Sa909 shown in FIG. 84) is executed or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is changed. Until the time elapses or until the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times is executed, it differs from the normal fluctuation pattern such as non-reach, normal reach, super reach, etc. according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern (for example, an extremely short fluctuation pattern such as 0.1 or an extremely long fluctuation pattern such as 10 minutes) may be different.

Further, in the present modification 10, a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) after the RAM clearing process (see Sa909 shown in FIG. 84) is executed or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is changed. ) Has elapsed and the variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the variation display is set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 at a rate of being executed in the variation pattern of the super reach. Although the embodiment suggesting the set value is illustrated, this embodiment is not limited to this, and the RAM clearing process (see Sa909 shown in FIG. 84) is executed, or the pachinko machine 901 is used. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is set at a rate at which a specific effect is executed until a predetermined time elapses after the set setting value is changed or a predetermined number of fluctuation displays are executed. The set value may be suggested. For example, a high setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is an advantageous set value for the player can be executed, and the RAM clear process (see Sa909 shown in FIG. 84) is executed. After that, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is changed until a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number of fluctuation displays are executed, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is set. When the set value is 1 (the setting value most advantageous for the player), the high setting value suggestion effect is most likely to be executed, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is 3 (the most disadvantageous setting value for the player). The setting value) is the most difficult to execute the high setting value suggestion effect.

Further, in the present modification 10, a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) after the RAM clearing process (see Sa909 shown in FIG. 84) is executed or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is changed. ) Elapses or until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of fluctuation display is executed, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901. Although the embodiment is illustrated, this embodiment is not limited to this, and is set after the RAM clearing process (see Sa909 shown in FIG. 84) is executed or set in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped for the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 until the predetermined time elapses after the value is changed or until the fluctuation display of the predetermined number of times is executed. The determination rate of at least one of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be different depending on whether or not the change has occurred since the time of the change.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is an example of a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on the entry of a gaming ball into the third count switch 9024B. As a modification 11, the pachinko gaming machine 901 fluctuates the game state after the end of the big hit game, and the display result is higher than the normal state (low probability low base state or low probability high base state). It may be a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to (high accuracy low base state or high accuracy high base state). Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is configured as a pachinko gaming machine capable of controlling the gaming state to a probabilistic state in this way, the jackpot game ends based on the game ball entering the third count switch 9024B during the jackpot game. Later, the gaming state may be configured to be controllable to a probabilistic state.

In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is configured to be able to control the gaming state to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game is completed based on the game ball entering the third count switch 9024B during the jackpot game, the jackpot type As a result, a jackpot type that opens the second jackpot 90712 during the jackpot game, that is, a jackpot type that allows the game ball to pass through the third count switch 9024B during the jackpot game (hereinafter, jackpot X), and during the jackpot game The second big hit opening 90712 is not opened, that is, a big hit type (hereinafter, big hit Y) in which the game ball cannot pass through the third count switch 9024B during the big hit game is provided, and the determination ratio of these big hit X and the big hit Y is set. It may be different depending on the value. By doing so, the rate at which the game state is controlled to the probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game can be changed according to the set value, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit and the determination rate of the big hit type are different according to the set value is illustrated, but this example is limited to this. As a modified example 12, the prize balls when the game ball wins each winning opening in addition to or in place of the rate at which these variable display results become big hits and the determination rate of the big hit type are different. The number and the maximum number of winnings of the game ball to the big winning opening in each round during the big hit game may be made different according to the set value. Further, the opening patterns of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening 90712 during the big hit game may be made different according to the set value. By doing so, the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state can be made different according to the set value, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which an effect such as a reach effect can be executed during a game such as during a variable display is illustrated, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and as a modification 13, a pachinko gaming machine is used. A movable body may be provided in 901, and a movable body effect may be executed in which the movable body is operated during a game such as a variable display or a big hit game. When the pachinko gaming machine 901 is provided with a movable body in this way, the special variable winning ball device initialization control such as confirmation of the advance / retreat operation of the regulating member 90721 in the second special variable winning ball device 907B is performed on the effect control CPU 90120. When the operation of the movable body is confirmed and the movable body initialization control for moving the movable body to the initial position can be executed by the effect control CPU 90120, and a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 () For example, when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 901 or when a new set value is set for the pachinko gaming machine 901), the effect control CPU 90120 performs these special variable winning ball device initialization control and the initial movable body. The conversion control may be executed. By doing so, the new set value can be accurately reflected in the operation of the second special variable winning ball device 907B and the movable body. It should be noted that such special variable winning ball device initialization control and movable body initialization control are executed after the execution of Sa9013 or Sa9014 in the game control main process shown in FIG. 84 (for example, the timing of the first timer interrupt). do it.

Further, when the effect control CPU 90120 can execute the special variable winning ball device initialization control and the movable body initialization control in this way, the special variable winning ball device initialization control is performed before the movable body initialization control. You may start from the timing. Further, the special variable winning ball device initialization control may be started at the same time as the movable body initialization control, and the special variable winning ball device initialization control may be terminated before the movable body initialization control. By doing so, the initialization control of the first special variable winning ball device 907A and the second special variable winning ball device 907B related to the winning of the game ball can be performed quickly.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the super reach fluctuation pattern is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value is illustrated, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and is a modification. 14. The determination ratio of the super reach fluctuation pattern may be different depending on the set value.

In the examples, the modified examples 10, and the modified examples 14, the cases where the first set value in this embodiment is 1 and the second set values in this embodiment are 2 and 3 are illustrated. The first set value and the second set value in the embodiment, the modified example 10, and the modified example 14 may be different set values.

Further, in the example, the modified example 10, and the modified example 14, the specific variable display pattern in this embodiment is used as the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, but the specific variable display pattern in the embodiment, the modified example 10, and the modified example 14 is specified. The variable display pattern may be a different variation pattern.

Further, in the above embodiment, a mode in which the lock switch 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is illustrated, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and these lock switches are not limited thereto. The location of the 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 may be the side of the main board 9011 or the like as shown in FIG. 98 as long as it is on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901. Further, by providing the lock switch 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 on the back side of the pachinko game machine 901, the lock switch 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 are operated unless the clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 903. It exemplifies a mode in which the setting value of the pachinko game machine 901 cannot be changed unless the clerk of the game hall or the like opens the frame 903 for the game machine, but this embodiment is limited to this. As a modification 15, as shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, a security cover 90500A that covers the lock switch 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 when the gaming machine frame 903 is closed is provided. By providing it, it may be possible to prevent an illegal change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 when the gaming machine frame 903 is closed.

The security cover 90500A in the modified example 15 is attached to the lower part of the right side of the outer frame 901a. By doing so, when the gaming machine frame 903 is closed, the security cover 90500A approaches the lock switch 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 from the back side of the pachinko game machine 901, so that the lock switch 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the security cover 90500A separates the lock switch 9051 from the setting changeover switch 9052 to operate the lock switch 9051 and the setting changeover switch. It can be possible. Further, in the present modification 15, the lock switch 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 are covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 by using the security cover 90500A, so that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is closed when the gaming machine frame 903 is closed. An example of a mode for preventing an illegal change of a set value is illustrated, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and the lock switch 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 are covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901. When the gaming machine frame 903 is closed, the cover body is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 by the security cover 90500A (the cover body is covered forward by the security cover 90500A). By pressing toward it), it may be possible to more strongly prevent an illegal change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 when the gaming machine frame 903 is closed.

In the present modification 15, the form in which the security cover 90500A is provided on the outer frame 901a is illustrated, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 903. May be good. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 100A and 100B, the security cover 90500B may be provided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the game machine frame 903. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 903 is closed, the right end portion of the security cover 90500B is sandwiched between the right side of the outer frame 901a and the gaming machine frame 903, and the security cover 90500B is used with the lock switch 9051. The setting changeover switch 9052 may be made immovable from the state of being covered from the back side. Then, when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the lock switch 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 may be operated by sliding the security cover 90500B.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 101 (A) and 101 (B), the left end portion of the security cover 90500C can be rotated with respect to a pivot axis provided on the back side of the gaming machine frame 903 and facing in the vertical direction (not shown). You may support it. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 903 is closed, the right end portion of the security cover 90500C is sandwiched between the right side of the outer frame 901a and the gaming machine frame 903, and the security cover 90500C is combined with the lock switch 9051. The setting changeover switch 9052 may be made immovable from the state of being covered from the back side. Then, when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the lock switch 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 may be operated by rotating the security cover 90500C around a pivot axis (not shown).

In the present modification 15, the lock switch 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 are covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 by the security covers 90500A, 90500B, 90500C, and the lock switch 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9051 are set when the gaming machine frame 903 is closed. A mode for preventing the changeover switch 9052 from being illegally operated is illustrated, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 98 to 101, these security covers 90500A and 90500B are used. When 90500C is provided so as to overlap the main board 9011, these security covers 90500A, 90500B, 90500C are made of a transparent resin material or the like, which hinders the visibility of the mounting surface of the main board 9011 and the sealing seal. You may not have it.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 901 is a game-playing pachinko gaming machine of the above-mentioned one-type and two-kind mixed type is exemplified, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and the pachinko is not limited to this. The gaming machine 901 may have different playability such as the above-mentioned probability variation loop type and V probability variation type. In this way, when the playability of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is set to the above-mentioned probabilistic loop type or V probabilistic type, the ball is held by a small hit that opens the first big winning opening after the end of a specific big hit game. May have a function capable of increasing (so-called small hit time).

In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is a gaming machine having a small hit time function, the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value as in the above embodiment (for example, in the case of the set value 1, it is in the normal state. The jackpot probability is 1/200 and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is 1/20, and in the case of the set value 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/300 and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is 1/30). As a result, when one set value is set, the initial hit probability is higher than when the other set value is set, so it is easier to enter the small hit time, but it is a big hit during probability variation control. Since the probability of becoming is also higher than when other set values are set, the small hit time is likely to end. In other words, when a pachinko machine capable of performing probability variation control is equipped with a small hit time function, the higher the setting value with a higher jackpot probability in the normal state, the higher the probability of entering the small hit time, while the smaller the probability. It is difficult for the hit time to continue, and the lower the set value with a lower jackpot probability in the normal state, the lower the probability of entering the small hit time, but the easier it is for the small hit time to continue. For this reason, in the probabilistic loop type and V probabilistic type pachinko gaming machines 901, not only can the range of games be expanded by incorporating the small hit time function, but also a set value with a low jackpot probability is set. Even the pachinko gaming machine 901 can provoke the player's willingness to play a game.

Further, in the above-mentioned V probability variation type pachinko gaming machine 901, the opening pattern of the probability variation control determination grand prize opening in the probability variation control determination round is changed to the long-term opening pattern (the game ball wins the probability variation control determination grand prize opening). When determining from an easy-to-use opening pattern) and a short-term opening pattern (an opening pattern in which the game ball is difficult to win in the large winning opening for probability variation control), these long-term opening patterns and short-term opening patterns are set in the pachinko gaming machine 901. By deciding at different ratios according to the set value, the actual probability of entering the probability variation (ratio of the probability variation jackpot) may be different.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a random number value MR2'for determining a jackpot type is extracted at the time of winning a start and the jackpot type is determined based on the extracted MR2' value is illustrated. The present invention is not limited, and as a modification 16, a gate for determining the jackpot type is provided at a predetermined position in the game area (for example, an upper position of the special variable winning ball unit 907), and a combination of special symbols indicating a jackpot is derived and displayed. After that, the random value MR2'for determining the jackpot type is extracted at the timing when the game ball is passed through the jackpot type determination gate, and the jackpot according to the jackpot type determined based on the extracted MR2'value. The game may be started. When the jackpot type determination gate is provided in this way, the jackpot type is determined at different ratios according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, 16 round jackpot and 4 round jackpot as jackpot types). When is provided, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is 1, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds jackpot is the highest, and the setting set in the pachinko gaming machine 901. When the value is 3, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds jackpot is the lowest).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the lock switch 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (game machine frame 903) is illustrated, but this embodiment is not limited to this. The lock switch 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 may be provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 903. When the lock switch 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 are provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 903 in this way, the lock switch 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 are provided in the vicinity of the ball striking operation handle and the ball striking launcher. The operation may be disabled unless the glass door frame 903a is opened.

Further, the counting display may be updated not only for the large winning opening but also for each period based on the winning of the game ball for the starting opening and the general winning opening. For example, the update display related to the winning may be executed in a break from the time when the power is turned on until the winning of a predetermined number of winnings (60,000 shots) occurs. At this time, the display mode may be displayed in various modes. For example, up to a predetermined number (6000) may be displayed in a normal mode (a mode in which the display is always displayed), and when the predetermined number is exceeded, the display may be changed to a blinking display. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily recognize which period the winning prize is displayed depending on whether or not it is blinking. Further, as a display mode, both alphabets and numbers may be displayed, or alphabets and numbers may be displayed alternately.

According to the above specifications, both the display control regarding the hold display and the update display regarding the winning are executed based on the winning at the starting port. Therefore, with one prize, it becomes possible to grasp the data related to the prize and the base of the game machine while executing the effect of paying the player attention to the hold display.

The present invention is applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

1 Pachinko game machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 effect display device 9a 1st variable display 9b 2nd variable display 9c background symbol display 13 1st start winning opening 13a 1st start opening Switch 14 2nd start winning opening 14a 2nd starting opening switch 15 Variable winning ball device 17 Acting gate 17a Acting gate switch 18c Design hold memory display 20 Special variable winning ball device 22 Special variable winning ball device 23 Bottom member 24 Special winning opening 23a 1st count switch 25a 2nd count switch 31 Main board 32 Gate 56 CPU 80 Production control board 200 Production control microcomputer 201 Production control microcomputer 560 Game control microcomputer 901 Pachinko game machine 904A 1st special symbol display 904B 2nd special symbol display 905 effect display device 90100 game control microcomputer 90120 effect control CPU

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can play games using a game medium, can display identification information in a variable manner, and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel, and
A predetermined state control means that is advantageous to the player and can be controlled to a predetermined state different from the advantageous state.
A normal state, and special conditions frequently controlled to the predetermined state by between the time had short at a high rate as the execution time of the variable display of the second identification information than the normal state is selected, the control Possible state control means and
A first hold storage means capable of storing information related to the variable display of the first identification information as a first hold storage, and
A second holding storage means capable of storing information related to the variable display of the second identification information as a second holding storage, and
A first hold display corresponding to the first pending memory, a second hold display corresponding to the second hold memory, a hold display unit capable of displaying,
Corresponding display means that can display the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display during execution,
A setting means that can be set to any of multiple setting values, and
A game control means capable of controlling the advantageous state based on the set value, and
A game value giving means that gives a game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area,
An information display means capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means, and
With
The hold display means
Prior Symbol normal state, but is capable of displaying the first hold display, it is impossible displaying the second hold display,
In the special state, the second hold display can be displayed.
It is possible to make the second hold display difficult to see in a specific period after the specific timing before the end of the special state.
In the normal state, the corresponding display means does not display the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information.
The information display means can display predetermined information according to a set value.
A game machine characterized by that.